WO2017170263A1 - Photosensitive coloring resin composition, color filter and method for producing same, and display device - Google Patents

Photosensitive coloring resin composition, color filter and method for producing same, and display device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2017170263A1
WO2017170263A1 PCT/JP2017/012133 JP2017012133W WO2017170263A1 WO 2017170263 A1 WO2017170263 A1 WO 2017170263A1 JP 2017012133 W JP2017012133 W JP 2017012133W WO 2017170263 A1 WO2017170263 A1 WO 2017170263A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
group
carbon atoms
resin composition
mass
photosensitive
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2017/012133
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
裕史 大島
崇 岩澤
Original Assignee
株式会社Dnpファインケミカル
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 株式会社Dnpファインケミカル filed Critical 株式会社Dnpファインケミカル
Priority to CN201780016692.0A priority Critical patent/CN108780273B/en
Priority to JP2017550960A priority patent/JP7059009B2/en
Publication of WO2017170263A1 publication Critical patent/WO2017170263A1/en
Priority to JP2022001675A priority patent/JP7308993B2/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08KUse of inorganic or non-macromolecular organic substances as compounding ingredients
    • C08K5/00Use of organic ingredients
    • C08K5/04Oxygen-containing compounds
    • C08K5/13Phenols; Phenolates
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08LCOMPOSITIONS OF MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS
    • C08L101/00Compositions of unspecified macromolecular compounds
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09KMATERIALS FOR MISCELLANEOUS APPLICATIONS, NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE
    • C09K15/00Anti-oxidant compositions; Compositions inhibiting chemical change
    • C09K15/04Anti-oxidant compositions; Compositions inhibiting chemical change containing organic compounds
    • C09K15/06Anti-oxidant compositions; Compositions inhibiting chemical change containing organic compounds containing oxygen
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09KMATERIALS FOR MISCELLANEOUS APPLICATIONS, NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE
    • C09K15/00Anti-oxidant compositions; Compositions inhibiting chemical change
    • C09K15/04Anti-oxidant compositions; Compositions inhibiting chemical change containing organic compounds
    • C09K15/30Anti-oxidant compositions; Compositions inhibiting chemical change containing organic compounds containing heterocyclic ring with at least one nitrogen atom as ring member
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B5/00Optical elements other than lenses
    • G02B5/20Filters
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02FOPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
    • G02F1/00Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
    • G02F1/01Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour 
    • G02F1/13Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour  based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells
    • G02F1/133Constructional arrangements; Operation of liquid crystal cells; Circuit arrangements
    • G02F1/1333Constructional arrangements; Manufacturing methods
    • G02F1/1335Structural association of cells with optical devices, e.g. polarisers or reflectors
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • G03F7/027Non-macromolecular photopolymerisable compounds having carbon-to-carbon double bonds, e.g. ethylenic compounds
    • G03F7/028Non-macromolecular photopolymerisable compounds having carbon-to-carbon double bonds, e.g. ethylenic compounds with photosensitivity-increasing substances, e.g. photoinitiators
    • G03F7/031Organic compounds not covered by group G03F7/029
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09BORGANIC DYES OR CLOSELY-RELATED COMPOUNDS FOR PRODUCING DYES, e.g. PIGMENTS; MORDANTS; LAKES
    • C09B11/00Diaryl- or thriarylmethane dyes
    • C09B11/04Diaryl- or thriarylmethane dyes derived from triarylmethanes, i.e. central C-atom is substituted by amino, cyano, alkyl
    • C09B11/10Amino derivatives of triarylmethanes
    • C09B11/12Amino derivatives of triarylmethanes without any OH group bound to an aryl nucleus
    • C09B11/16Preparation from diarylketones or diarylcarbinols, e.g. benzhydrol
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09BORGANIC DYES OR CLOSELY-RELATED COMPOUNDS FOR PRODUCING DYES, e.g. PIGMENTS; MORDANTS; LAKES
    • C09B11/00Diaryl- or thriarylmethane dyes
    • C09B11/28Pyronines ; Xanthon, thioxanthon, selenoxanthan, telluroxanthon dyes

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a photosensitive colored resin composition, a color filter, a method for producing the same, and a display device.
  • Color filters are used in these liquid crystal display devices and organic light emitting display devices.
  • a backlight is used as a light source, the amount of light is controlled by electrically driving the liquid crystal, and color expression is performed by the light passing through a color filter. Therefore, a color filter must be present in the color representation of a liquid crystal television and plays a major role in determining the performance of the display.
  • color adjustment of pixels may be performed using a color filter, or a color image may be formed in the same manner as a liquid crystal display device using a color filter for a white light emitting organic light emitting element.
  • An image display device including a color filter affects the design and performance of a mobile terminal in order to be directly linked to the usable time and charging frequency of the mobile terminal.
  • the color filter is generally formed on the substrate to form the substrate, the colored layer formed of the three primary colors of red, green, and blue, and the respective colored patterns.
  • a light shielding portion As one method for forming such a colored layer, there is known a method in which a photosensitive resin composition containing a colorant and a photopolymerizable compound is applied onto a substrate and cured by irradiating ultraviolet rays or the like. ing.
  • the coloring material of the photosensitive resin composition pigments and dyes are used. Although the pigments are generally superior in heat resistance and light resistance compared to dyes, fading could not be sufficiently prevented during high-temperature heating in the color filter manufacturing process, and brightness was reduced. .
  • Patent Document 1 discloses a blue color filter containing a blue colorant, an alkali-soluble resin, a polyfunctional monomer, a specific photopolymerization initiator, and a specific antioxidant in a specific ratio. Radiation sensitive compositions for use are disclosed. According to Patent Document 1, it is said that a blue pixel with high luminance can be formed.
  • Patent Document 2 discloses a colored resin composition for a color filter containing a lake pigment, a specific dispersant, a hindered phenol antioxidant, a binder component, and a solvent. According to Patent Document 2, heat resistance is improved by a hindered phenol-based antioxidant, and a high-luminance colored layer can be formed.
  • Patent Document 3 discloses a colored photosensitive composition containing a specific latent antioxidant and a specific organic dye as a colored photosensitive composition having excellent heat resistance.
  • a colored layer for a color filter is patterned on a substrate.
  • a colored layer using the photosensitive colored resin composition for example, after forming a coating film of the photosensitive colored resin composition on the substrate, it is exposed through a predetermined mask pattern, and then developed. Thus, a patterned colored layer can be obtained.
  • the present inventors have studied to form a colored layer by the above-described method using a photosensitive colored resin composition containing an antioxidant. As a result, the present inventors have found that when a photosensitive resin composition containing the antioxidant is used, a colored layer as designed may not be formed.
  • the present invention has been made on the basis of the above knowledge, and can form a high-brightness colored layer, and a photosensitive colored resin composition in which a change in line width is suppressed, and the photosensitive colored resin composition. It is an object of the present invention to provide a high-luminance color filter formed using the above and a display device having excellent display characteristics using the color filter.
  • the photosensitive colored resin composition according to the present invention contains a coloring material, a photopolymerizable compound, an initiator, a latent antioxidant, and a solvent, and the coloring material is composed of a dye and a lake coloring material. 1 or more types selected,
  • the said latent antioxidant contains the compound represented by following General formula (1), It is characterized by the above-mentioned.
  • the color filter according to the present invention is a color filter including at least a substrate and a colored layer provided on the substrate, and at least one of the colored layers is a cured cured photosensitive colored resin composition according to the present invention. It is a thing.
  • a method for producing a color filter according to the present invention is a method for producing a color filter comprising at least a substrate and a colored layer provided on the substrate, It has the process of forming at least 1 of the said colored layer using the photosensitive colored resin composition which concerns on the said this invention, It is characterized by the above-mentioned.
  • the display device according to the present invention includes the color filter according to the present invention.
  • a photosensitive colored resin composition capable of forming a high-luminance colored layer and suppressing a change in line width, and a high-luminance color formed using the photosensitive colored resin composition
  • a filter and a display device having excellent display characteristics using the color filter can be provided.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic sectional view showing an example of the color filter of the present invention.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic sectional view showing an example of the display device of the present invention.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing another example of the display device of the present invention.
  • light includes electromagnetic waves having wavelengths in the visible and invisible regions, and further includes radiation, and the radiation includes, for example, microwaves and electron beams. Specifically, it means an electromagnetic wave having a wavelength of 5 ⁇ m or less and an electron beam.
  • (meth) acryl represents each of acryl and methacryl
  • (meth) acrylate represents each of acrylate and methacrylate.
  • the organic group means a group having one or more carbon atoms.
  • solid content means all components other than the solvent which comprises a resin composition, for example, even if it is a liquid monomer, it shall be contained in the said solid content.
  • the photosensitive colored resin composition according to the present invention contains a color material, a photopolymerizable compound, an initiator, a latent antioxidant, and a solvent, and the color material is 1 or more types selected from dye and lake color material,
  • the said latent antioxidant contains the compound represented by following General formula (1), It is characterized by the above-mentioned.
  • ring A is a 5-membered or 6-membered hydrocarbon ring or heterocyclic ring
  • R 1 each independently has a halogen atom, a cyano group, a hydroxyl group, a nitro group, a carboxy group, an alkyl group having 1 to 40 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or a substituent.
  • R 2 is an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, an arylalkyl group having 7 to 20 carbon atoms, or 2 to 2 carbon atoms.
  • R 1 and R 2 a carbon-carbon double bond, —O—, —S—, —C ( ⁇ O) —, —O—C ( ⁇ O) —, —C ( ⁇ O ) —O—, —O—C ( ⁇ O) —O—, —S—C ( ⁇ O) —, —C ( ⁇ O) —S—, —S—C ( ⁇ O) —O—, — OC ( ⁇ O) —S—, —C ( ⁇ O) —NH—, —NH—C ( ⁇ O) —, —NH—C ( ⁇ O) —O—, —NR′—, —S -S- or -SO 2 -may be present, R 'is a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, and a plurality of R 1 and R 2 may be the same or different.
  • X is an a-valent group, and is a direct bond, nitrogen atom, oxygen atom, sulfur atom, phosphorus atom, (—O) 3 P ⁇ O,>C ⁇ O,> NR 3 , —OR 3 , —SR 3 , —N (R 3 ) (R 4 ), an optionally substituted aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 120 carbon atoms, and optionally having 6 to 35 carbon atoms An aromatic ring-containing hydrocarbon group or a heterocyclic group having 2 to 35 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, and R 3 and R 4 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
  • a carbon-carbon double bond —O—, —S—, —C ( ⁇ O) —, —O—C ( ⁇ O ) —, —C ( ⁇ O) —O—, —O—C ( ⁇ O) —O—, —S—C ( ⁇ O) —, —C ( ⁇ O) —S—, —S—C ( ⁇ O) —O—, —O—C ( ⁇ O) —S—, —C ( ⁇ O) —NH—, —NH—C ( ⁇ O) —, —NH—C ( ⁇ O) —O— , -NR'-, -SS-, -SO 2-, or a nitrogen atom.
  • a represents an integer of 1 to 10
  • b represents an integer of 1 to 4
  • c represents an integer of 1 to 3.
  • the photosensitive colored resin composition according to the present invention has an effect that a high-luminance colored layer can be formed and a change in line width is suppressed during development.
  • the photosensitive coloring resin composition of this invention contains the latent antioxidant represented by General formula (1).
  • the latent antioxidant a phenolic hydroxyl group that exhibits an antioxidant effect is protected by a protecting group.
  • the latent antioxidant does not have an antioxidant function at the time of exposure, it does not deactivate radicals generated from the initiator, suppresses a decrease in sensitivity, and suppresses a reduction in line width.
  • the protective group is eliminated and an antioxidant effect is exhibited, so that fading of a color material or the like is suppressed and a high-luminance colored layer is obtained.
  • the photosensitive colored resin composition of the present invention contains at least a colorant, a photopolymerizable compound, an initiator, a latent antioxidant, and a solvent, and does not impair the effects of the present invention. As long as it is necessary, it may further contain other components.
  • each component of the colored resin composition for a color filter of the present invention will be described in detail in order.
  • the latent antioxidant is a compound having a protecting group that can be removed by heating, and exhibiting an antioxidant function when the protecting group is eliminated.
  • those which are easy to remove the protecting group by heating at 150 ° C. or higher are preferable.
  • a compound represented by the following general formula (1) is used as such a latent antioxidant.
  • the latent antioxidant represented by the general formula (1) has a structure in which a specific group is bonded to a specific atom or group having a valence represented by X.
  • the a groups may be the same as or different from each other.
  • the value of a is 1 to 10, and preferably 2 to 6 from the viewpoint of ease of synthesis.
  • Ring A in the general formula (1) is a 5-membered or 6-membered hydrocarbon ring or heterocyclic ring.
  • the 5-membered hydrocarbon ring include alicyclic rings such as cyclopentane ring and cyclopentene ring, and aromatic rings such as cyclopentadiene and ferrocene.
  • the 5-membered heterocyclic ring include furan, thiophene, pyrrole, pyrrolidine, pyrazolidine, pyrazole, imidazole, imidazolidine, oxazole, isoxazole, isoxazolidine, thiazole, isothiazole, isothiazolidine and the like.
  • Examples of the six-membered hydrocarbon ring include six-membered alicyclic rings such as cyclohexane, cyclohexene and cyclohexadiene, and six-membered aromatic rings such as benzene, naphthalene, anthracene, fluorene, perylene and pyrene. It is done.
  • Examples of the six-membered heterocyclic ring include piperidine, piperazine, morpholine, thiomorpholine, pyridine, pyrazine, pyrimidine, pyridazine, and triazine.
  • rings may be condensed or substituted with other rings, and may constitute, for example, quinoline, isoquinoline, indole, urolidine, benzoxazole, benzotriazole, azulene and the like.
  • ring A is a 6-membered aromatic ring or heterocyclic ring from the viewpoint of obtaining a photosensitive colored resin composition capable of forming a high-luminance colored layer and suppressing a change in line width. It is preferably a 6-membered aromatic ring, and more preferably an aromatic ring selected from benzene, naphthalene, anthracene, and pyrene.
  • examples of the halogen atom include fluorine, chlorine, bromine, and iodine.
  • the optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 40 carbon atoms is, for example, methyl, ethyl, propyl, iso-propyl, butyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, iso- Butyl, amyl, iso-amyl, tert-amyl, cyclopentyl, hexyl, 2-hexyl, 3-hexyl, cyclohexyl, 4-methylcyclohexyl, heptyl, 2-heptyl, 3-heptyl, iso-heptyl, tert-heptyl, 1 -Octyl, iso-octyl, tert-octyl, nonyl, isononyl, decyl, undecyl, dodecyl, tridecyl, isotridecyl, tetradecyl, pentadecyl, hexa
  • Examples of the aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms in R 1 include phenyl, naphthyl, anthracenyl, 2-methylphenyl, 3-methylphenyl, 4-methylphenyl, 4-vinylphenyl, and 3-iso-propyl.
  • Phenyl 4-iso-propylphenyl, 4-butylphenyl, 4-iso-butylphenyl, 4-tert-butylphenyl, 4-hexylphenyl, 4-cyclohexylphenyl, 4-octylphenyl, 4- (2-ethylhexyl) Phenyl, 4-stearylphenyl, 2,3-dimethylphenyl, 2,4-dimethylphenyl, 2,5-dimethylphenyl, 2,6-dimethylphenyl, 3,4-dimethylphenyl, 3,5-dimethylphenyl, 2 , 4-Di-tert-butylphenyl, 2,5-di-tert-butyl Ruphenyl, 2,6-di-tert-butylphenyl, 2,4-di-tert-pentylphenyl, 2,5-di-tert-amylphenyl, 2,5-di-tert-oct
  • heterocyclic group containing 2 to 20 carbon atoms in R 1 examples include pyridyl, pyrimidyl, pyridazyl, piperidyl, pyranyl, pyrazolyl, triazyl, pyrrolyl, quinolyl, isoquinolyl, imidazolyl, benzimidazolyl, triazolyl, furyl, and furanyl.
  • the substituent for substituting the hydrogen atom of the alkyl group, aryl group, or heterocyclic group includes ethylenically unsaturated groups such as vinyl, allyl, acrylic, and methacryl; fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine Halogen atoms such as acetyl, 2-chloroacetyl, propionyl, octanoyl, acryloyl, methacryloyl, phenylcarbonyl (benzoyl), phthaloyl, 4-trifluoromethylbenzoyl, pivaloyl, salicyloyl, oxaloyl, stearoyl, methoxycarbonyl, ethoxycarbonyl, t -Acyl groups such as butoxycarbonyl, n-octadecyloxycarbonyl, carbamoyl; acyloxy groups such as acetyloxy, benzoyloxy; amino,
  • examples of the alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms include alkyl groups having 1 to 20 carbon atoms among the alkyl groups exemplified for R 1 above.
  • an alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms includes vinyl, 1-methylethen-1-yl, propen-1-yl, propen-2-yl, propen-3-yl, and buten-1-yl.
  • Buten-2-yl 2-methylpropen-3-yl, 1,1-dimethylethen-2-yl, 1,1-dimethylpropen-3-yl, 3-butenyl, 1-methyl-3-butenyl, Examples include isobutenyl, 3-pentenyl, 4-hexenyl, cyclohexenyl, bicyclohexenyl, heptenyl, octenyl, decenyl, pentadecenyl, eicosenyl, tricoseni and the like.
  • the aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, the arylalkyl group having 7 to 20 carbon atoms, and the heterocyclic-containing group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms are the same as those exemplified for R 1 . Things.
  • examples of the trialkylsilyl group include trimethylsilane, triethylsilane, and ethyldimethylsilane.
  • the alkyl chain includes a carbon-carbon double bond, —O—, —S—, —C ( ⁇ O) —, —O—C ( ⁇ O ) —, —C ( ⁇ O) —O—, —O—C ( ⁇ O) —O—, —S—C ( ⁇ O) —, —C ( ⁇ O) —S—, —S—C ( ⁇ O) —O—, —O—C ( ⁇ O) —S—, —C ( ⁇ O) —NH—, —NH—C ( ⁇ O) —, —NH—C ( ⁇ O) —O— , —NR′—, —SS— or —SO 2 —.
  • R ′ of the —NR′— group is an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, and specifically, an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms among the alkyl groups exemplified as R 1 above. Groups. Note that in the case where the alkyl chain includes the above structure, the alkyl chain preferably does not have a structure in which oxygen atoms are connected (—O—O—).
  • R 1 is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms or an aryl group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms from the viewpoint of easy synthesis.
  • R 1 is preferably a substituent having 4 or more carbon atoms from the viewpoint of excellent heat resistance and light resistance as a latent antioxidant.
  • Specific examples of the substituent having 4 or more carbon atoms include tertiary alkyl groups such as t-butyl, t-pentyl and t-hexyl; secondary alkyl groups such as sec-butyl and sec-pentyl.
  • a branched primary alkyl group such as an i-butyl group and an i-pentyl group; a cycloalkyl group such as a cyclohexyl group and a cyclopentyl group;
  • the t-butyl group is particularly preferred.
  • R 2 is an alkyl group having 2 to 8 carbon atoms in which —C ( ⁇ O) —O— is bonded to the terminal on the oxygen atom side efficiently as a latent additive. It is preferable because it exhibits a function. That is, the substituent —OR 2 in the general formula (1) is preferably —O—C ( ⁇ O) —O—R ′′ (R ′′ is an alkyl group having 1 to 7 carbon atoms).
  • the structure of the a-valent aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 120 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, represented by X in the general formula (1) is not particularly limited.
  • the aliphatic hydrocarbon group may be linear, branched, cyclic (alicyclic hydrocarbon), or a combination thereof.
  • the aliphatic hydrocarbon group includes a carbon-carbon double bond, —O—, —S—, —C ( ⁇ O) —, —O—C ( ⁇ O) in the aliphatic hydrocarbon group.
  • monovalent aliphatic hydrocarbon groups include methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, cyclopropyl, butyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, isobutyl, amyl, isoamyl, tert-amyl, cyclopentyl, hexyl, 2- Hexyl, 3-hexyl, cyclohexyl, bicyclohexyl, 1-methylcyclohexyl, heptyl, 2-heptyl, 3-heptyl, isoheptyl, tertiary heptyl, n-octyl, isooctyl, tertiary octyl, 2-ethylhexyl, nonyl, isononyl, Alkyl groups such as decyl; methyloxy, ethyloxy, propyloxy, isopropyloxy, butyloxy,
  • a-valent aromatic ring-containing hydrocarbon group having 6 to 35 carbon atoms which may have a substituent in X is not particularly limited.
  • monovalent aromatic ring-containing hydrocarbon groups include arylalkyl groups such as benzyl, phenethyl, diphenylmethyl, triphenylmethyl, styryl, and cinnamyl; aryl groups such as phenyl and naphthyl; aryloxy groups such as phenoxy and naphthyloxy Groups: arylthio groups such as phenylthio and naphthylthio, or combinations of these groups with the following substituents, and the like.
  • the divalent or higher aliphatic hydrocarbon group is a part of the hydrogen atoms of the monovalent aromatic ring-containing hydrocarbon group. Is a structure that is off.
  • the structure of the a-valent heterocyclic group having 2 to 35 carbon atoms which may have a substituent in X is not particularly limited.
  • monovalent heterocycle-containing groups include pyridyl, pyrimidyl, pyridazyl, piperidyl, pyranyl, pyrazolyl, triazyl, pyrrolyl, quinolyl, isoquinolyl, imidazolyl, benzimidazolyl, triazolyl, furyl, furanyl, benzofuranyl, thienyl, thiophenyl, benzothiol.
  • Examples of the bivalent or higher heterocyclic group include hydrogen of the above monovalent heterocyclic group. original It includes partially out structure is.
  • Examples of the substituent that X may have include ethylenically unsaturated groups such as vinyl, allyl, acrylic and methacryl; halogen atoms such as fluorine, chlorine, bromine and iodine; acetyl, 2-chloroacetyl, propionyl and octanoyl Acyl groups such as acryloyl, methacryloyl, phenylcarbonyl (benzoyl), phthaloyl, 4-trifluoromethylbenzoyl, pivaloyl, salicyloyl, oxaloyl, stearoyl, methoxycarbonyl, ethoxycarbonyl, t-butoxycarbonyl, n-octadecyloxycarbonyl, carbamoyl Acyloxy groups such as acetyloxy and benzoyloxy; amino, ethylamino, dimethylamino, diethylamino, butyla
  • aromatic ring-containing hydrocarbon group having 6 to 35 carbon atoms and the heterocyclic ring-containing group having 2 to 35 carbon atoms include the monovalent aliphatic hydrocarbon group and the monovalent aromatic ring-containing hydrocarbon, respectively.
  • those exemplified as the group and the monovalent heterocyclic ring-containing group those satisfying the number of carbon atoms can be mentioned.
  • At least one selected from the following general formulas (1A) to (1E) is preferable from the viewpoint of excellent heat resistance.
  • ring A ′ is a six-membered alicyclic ring, aromatic ring or heterocyclic ring, and R 11 , R 12 , R 13 , R 14 , and R 15 are each independently hydrogen.
  • R 1 in atom or the general formula (1) R 2 is the same as R 2 in the general formula (1).
  • R 11, R 12, R 13, R 14 and, At least one of R 15 is the same group as R 1 in the general formula (1).
  • X 1 is a group represented by the following general formula (3), and ring A ′, R 2 , R 11 , R 12 , R 13 , and R 14 are represented by the general formula ( Same as 1A).
  • m is an integer of 2 to 6
  • ring A ′, R 2 , R 11 , R 12 , R 13 , and R 14 are the same as in general formula (1A).
  • m ′ is an integer of 3 to 6, which is the same as in the case where m in the general formula (1C) is 3 to 6.
  • X 1 , ring A ′, R 2 , R 11 , R 12 , R 13 , and R 14 are the same as those in the general formula (1C).
  • Q 1 is —NR 32 —, a divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 35 carbon atoms, a divalent aromatic ring-containing hydrocarbon group having 6 to 35 carbon atoms, or A divalent heterocyclic group having 2 to 35 carbon atoms or a substituent represented by any of the following (3-1) to (3-3):
  • the methylene group in the aliphatic hydrocarbon group represented by Q 1 is replaced with —O—, —S—, —CO—, —COO—, —OCO—, —NH— or a combination thereof.
  • Z 1 and Z 2 each independently represent a direct bond, —O—, —S—, —SO 2 —, —SO—, —NR 32 —, —PR 33 —, wherein R 32 and R Table 33 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, an aryl group or an arylalkyl group having 7 to 20 carbon atoms of 6 to 20 carbon atoms, with R 32 and R 33
  • the alkyl group, aryl group and arylalkyl group which may be substituted with a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group or a nitro group, and the methylene group in the alkyl group and arylalkyl group represented by R 32 and R 33 are: COO-, -O-,- CO -, - NHCO -, - NH- or it may be replaced by -CONH-.
  • the group represented by the general formula (3) is in the range of 1 to 35 carbon atoms
  • R 34 represents a hydrogen atom, a phenyl group optionally substituted by an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, or an alkoxy group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, or a group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • R 35 represents an cycloalkyl group
  • R 35 represents an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, an alkenyl group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms, or a halogen atom
  • R 34 and R 35 The alkyl group, alkoxy group, and alkenyl group represented are substituted or unsubstituted with a halogen atom, and d is an integer of 0 to 5.
  • R 36 and R 37 are each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, or an aryloxy group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • the alkyl group, aryl group, aryloxy group, arylthio group, arylalkenyl group, arylalkyl group and heterocyclic group-containing group represented by R 36 and R 37 are substituted with a halogen atom or unsubstituted, and R
  • the methylene group in the alkyl group and arylalkyl group represented by 36 and R 37 may be replaced with an unsaturated bond, —O— or
  • Q 2 represents a carbon atom substituted by R 38 , a trivalent aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 35 carbon atoms, or a trivalent carbon atom having 6 to 35 carbon atoms.
  • Q 3 is a carbon atom, a tetravalent aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 35 carbon atoms, or an aromatic ring having 4 to 35 carbon atoms.
  • Q 4 represents a pentavalent aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 2 to 35 carbon atoms and a pentavalent carbon atom having 6 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • Z 1 to Z 6 are each independently the same as the groups represented by Z 1 and Z 2 in the general formula (3), provided that the general formula (4) or (5) And each group represented by the general formula (6) or (7) is within a range of 2 to 35 carbon atoms.
  • Examples of the six-membered alicyclic, aromatic or heterocyclic ring represented by the ring A ′ in the general formula (1A) to the general formula (1E) include those exemplified in the description of A in the general formula (1). Can be mentioned.
  • the general formula (1A) ⁇ the general formula (1E), R 11 ⁇ R 15 are each independently a group similar to R 1 in the hydrogen atom or a general formula (1), the R 11 ⁇ R 15 At least one of them is the same group as R 1 .
  • a carbon atom adjacent to the carbon atom substituted with —OR 2 preferably has the same group as R 1, and among them, a substituent having 4 or more carbon atoms is preferable. Since the carbon atom adjacent to the carbon atom substituted with —OR 2 has a bulky substituent, it is excellent in heat resistance and light resistance as a latent antioxidant and also in an antioxidant effect.
  • Examples of the divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 35 carbon atoms represented by Q 1 in the general formula (3) include methane, ethane, propane, iso-propane, butane, sec-butane, and tert-butane.
  • cyclooctyl is substituted with Z 1 and Z 2 , cyclooctyl, cyclodecanyl, 1- Adamantyl, 2-adamantyl, noradamantyl, 2-methyladam Nthyl, norbornyl, isonorbornyl, perhydronaphthyl, perhydroanthracenyl, bicyclo [1.1.0] butyl, bicyclo [1.1.1] pentyl, bicyclo [2.1.0] pentyl, bicyclo [3.
  • cyclododecanyl is a divalent group which is substituted by Z 1 and Z 2, and combinations thereof, the methylene group in the aliphatic hydrocarbon group, —O—, —S—, —CO—, —COO—, —OCO—, —NH— or a combination thereof may be substituted.
  • Examples of the combination thereof include —COO—O —, —COO—S—, —O—OCO—, —S—OCO—, —CO—NH—, —NH—CO—, etc., among others, —COO—, —O—, —OCO—, — Those substituted with NHCO-, -NH-, -CONH-, -O-CONH- or -NHCO-O- are preferred.
  • Examples of the divalent aromatic ring-containing hydrocarbon group having 6 to 35 carbon atoms represented by Q 1 include divalent groups in which groups such as phenyl, naphthyl, and biphenyl are substituted with Z 1 and Z 2. Can be mentioned.
  • divalent groups in which a group such as thiolane is substituted with Z 1 and Z 2 .
  • These groups may be further substituted with a halogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group or an alkoxy group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms.
  • alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms represented by R 32 and R 33 among the groups exemplified as the alkyl group having 1 to 40 carbon atoms represented by R 1 and R 2 , a predetermined carbon number The group which satisfy
  • the aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms represented by R 32 and R 33 include groups exemplified as the aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms represented by R 1 , R 2 and R 4 .
  • Examples of the arylalkyl group having 7 to 20 carbon atoms represented by R 32 and R 33 include groups exemplified as the arylalkyl group having 7 to 20 carbon atoms represented by R 1 , R 2 and R 4. It is done.
  • halogen atom that may be substituted for the alkyl group, aryl group, and arylalkyl group represented by R 32 and R 33 include the groups exemplified as the halogen atom represented by R 1 and R 2. .
  • the phenyl group represented by R 34 and the alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms which may be substituted with the cycloalkyl group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms, and R Examples of the alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms represented by 35 include groups satisfying a predetermined carbon number among the groups exemplified as the alkyl groups having 1 to 40 carbon atoms represented by R 1 and R 2 , etc. Is mentioned.
  • the phenyl group represented by R 34 and the alkoxy group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms which may be substituted with the cycloalkyl group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms and R 35 are also represented.
  • alkoxy group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms examples include methoxy, ethoxy, propyloxy, isopropyloxy, butyloxy, s-butyloxy, t-butyloxy, isobutyloxy, pentyloxy, isoamyloxy, t-amyloxy, hexyloxy, Examples include cyclohexyloxy, cyclohexylmethyloxy, tetrahydrofuranyloxy, tetrahydropyranyloxy and the like.
  • Examples of the cycloalkyl group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms represented by R 34 include cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cyclooctyl and the like, and these groups are the above alkyl groups having 1 to 10 carbon atoms or carbon atoms. And a group substituted with an alkoxy group having 1 to 10 atoms.
  • Examples of the alkenyl group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms represented by R 35 include vinyl, allyl, 1-propenyl, isopropenyl, 2-butenyl, 1,3-butadienyl, 2-pentenyl, 2-octenyl and the like. .
  • the halogen atom represented by R 35 and the halogen atom that may substitute the alkyl group, alkoxy group and alkenyl group represented by R 34 and R 35 are the halogen atom represented by R 1 and R 2.
  • the exemplified groups are mentioned. Incidentally, the substitution position of alkyl group, halogen atom be substituted alkoxy group and alkenyl group represented by R 35, it is not limited.
  • the alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms represented by R 36 and R 37 may have 1 to 40 carbon atoms represented by R 1 and R 2.
  • the groups exemplified as the alkyl group a group satisfying a predetermined carbon number and the like can be mentioned.
  • Examples of the aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms represented by R 36 and R 37 include groups exemplified as the aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms represented by R 1 , R 2 and R 4. .
  • Examples of the aryloxy group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms represented by R 36 and R 37 include phenyloxy, naphthyloxy, 2-methylphenyloxy, 3-methylphenyloxy, 4-methylphenyloxy, 4-vinylphenyl 2-oxy, 3-iso-propylphenyloxy, 4-iso-propylphenyloxy, 4-butylphenyloxy, 4-tert-butylphenyloxy, 4-hexylphenyloxy, 4-cyclohexylphenyloxy, 4-octylphenyl Oxy, 4- (2-ethylhexyl) phenyloxy, 2,3-dimethylphenyloxy, 2,4-dimethylphenyloxy, 2,5-dimethylphenyloxy, 2.6-dimethylphenyloxy, 3.4-dimethylphenyl Oxy, 3.5-dimethylphenyloxy 2,4-di-tert-butylphenyloxy, 2,5-di-
  • the oxygen atom of the aryloxy group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may be substituted with the above halogen atom is substituted with a sulfur atom.
  • the foundation etc. are offered.
  • the oxygen atom of the aryloxy group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may be substituted with the above halogen atom may be vinyl, allyl, Examples include groups substituted with alkenyl groups such as 1-propenyl, isopropenyl, 2-butenyl, 1,3-butadienyl, 2-pentenyl, 2-octenyl and the like.
  • Examples of the arylalkyl group having 7 to 20 carbon atoms represented by R 36 and R 37 include groups exemplified as the arylalkyl group having 7 to 20 carbon atoms represented by R 1 , R 2 and R 4. Can be mentioned.
  • Examples of the heterocyclic group containing 2 to 20 carbon atoms represented by R 36 and R 37 include pyridine, pyrazine, piperidine, piperazine, pyrimidine, pyridazine, triazine, hexahydrotriazine, furan, tetrahydrofuran, chroman, xanthene, thiophene. And groups such as thiofuran and groups in which these groups are substituted with a halogen atom.
  • halogen atom which may be substituted for the alkyl group, aryl group, aryloxy group, arylthio group, arylalkenyl group, arylalkyl group and heterocyclic group represented by R 36 and R 37 , R 1 and R
  • the group illustrated as a halogen atom represented by 2 is mentioned.
  • the heterocyclic group having 2 to 35 atoms the aliphatic hydrocarbon group, aromatic ring-containing hydrocarbon group and heterocyclic group-containing group exemplified in the description of Q 1 in the general formula (3) are each Z 1. , Z 2 and Z 3 substituted trivalent groups and the like.
  • the alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, the aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, or the arylalkyl group having 7 to 20 carbon atoms represented by R 38 is represented by R 32 and R 33. Examples thereof include a group similar to an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, or an arylalkyl group having 7 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • the heterocyclic group having 2 to 35 atoms the aliphatic hydrocarbon group, aromatic ring-containing hydrocarbon group and heterocyclic group-containing group exemplified in the description of Q 1 in the general formula (3) are each Z 1. , Z 2 , Z 3, and a tetravalent group substituted with Z 4 .
  • the heterocyclic group having 2 to 35 atoms the aliphatic hydrocarbon group, aromatic ring-containing hydrocarbon group and heterocyclic group-containing group exemplified in the description of Q 1 in the general formula (3) are each Z 1. , Z 2 , Z 3 , Z 4 and Z 5 , and the like.
  • the heterocyclic group having 2 to 35 atoms each of the aliphatic hydrocarbon group, the aromatic ring-containing hydrocarbon group, and the heterocyclic group-containing group exemplified in the description of X 1 in the general formula (3) is Z 1. , Z 2 , Z 3 , Z 4 , Z 5 and Z 6 and the like.
  • carbamate protecting group such as a t-butoxycarbonyl group.
  • the method for producing the compound represented by the general formula (1) is not particularly limited.
  • the color material is not particularly limited as long as it can form a desired color when forming a colored layer of a color filter, and various organic pigments, inorganic pigments, dyes, and the like can be used alone or Two or more kinds can be mixed and used.
  • the dye may be a dye that can be dispersed in addition to a dye that is dissolved in a solvent. Dispersible dyes are excellent in heat resistance and light resistance when combined with a dispersant described later.
  • Organic pigments are preferably used because of their high color developability and high heat resistance.
  • examples of the organic pigment include compounds classified as pigments in the color index (CI; issued by The Society of Dyers and Colorists), specifically, the following color index (C.I. .) Can be listed with numbers.
  • the inorganic pigment examples include titanium oxide, barium sulfate, calcium carbonate, zinc white, lead sulfate, yellow lead, zinc yellow, red bean (red iron (III) oxide), cadmium red, ultramarine blue, bitumen, and oxidation.
  • examples thereof include chrome green, cobalt green, amber, titanium black, synthetic iron black, and carbon black.
  • a black pigment having a high light shielding property is blended in the ink.
  • the black pigment having a high light shielding property for example, an inorganic pigment such as carbon black or iron trioxide or an organic pigment such as cyanine black can be used.
  • the dispersible dye examples include dyes that can be dispersed by adding various substituents to the dye and insolubilizing the solvent, dyes that can be dispersed by using in combination with a solvent having low solubility, and solvents And a lake color material obtained by forming a salt with a counter ion to form an insoluble (rake) salt.
  • a combination of such a dispersible dye and a dispersant the dispersibility and dispersion stability of the dye can be improved.
  • the amount of dye dissolved in 10 g of solvent (or mixed solvent) is 10 mg or less, it can be determined that the dye can be dispersed in the solvent (or mixed solvent).
  • the rake color material it is particularly preferable to use the rake color material from the viewpoint of improving luminance and contrast.
  • the rake colorant can be usually obtained by mixing a dye soluble in a solvent and a rake agent described later in a solvent.
  • a dye having a high transmittance is preferably used from the viewpoint of increasing the brightness of the color filter.
  • an azo dye suitably according to a desired color tone
  • an azo dye a metal complex azo dye, an anthraquinone dye, a triarylmethane dye, a xanthene dye, a cyanine dye, an indigo dye, a naphthoquinone dye
  • It may be a dye having any basic skeleton (coloring portion) such as a quinoneimine dye, a methine dye, or a phthalocyanine dye.
  • the dye may be a dye classified into any one of an acidic dye having an anionic substituent and a basic dye having a cationic substituent.
  • a blue colored layer from the viewpoint of increasing the brightness, among them, at least one of a triarylmethane dye, a xanthene dye, and a cyanine dye is preferable, and a triarylmethane dye is more preferable. preferable.
  • Examples of the acid dye include C.I. I. Acid Violet 29, 31, 33, 34, 36, 36: 1, 39, 41, 42, 43, 47, 51, 63, 76, 103, 118, 126, C.I. I. Acid Blue 2, 8, 14, 25, 27, 35, 37, 40, 41, 41: 1, 41: 2, 43, 45, 46, 47, 49, 50, 51, 51, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 62, 62: 1, 63, 64, 65, 68, 69, 70, 78, 79, 80, 81, 96, 111, 124, 127, 127: 1, 129, 137, 138, 143,145,150,175,176,183,198,203,204,205,208,215,220,221,225,226,227,230,231,232,233,235,239,245,247, 253, 257, 258, 260, 261, 264, 266, 270, 271, 272, 273, 274, 277,
  • Acid violet 9, 30, 102 sulforhodamine G, sulforhodamine B, sulforhodamine 101, xanthene acid dyes such as sulforhodamine 640 and the like.
  • xanthene acid dyes C.I. I. Acid Red 50, C.I. I. Acid Red 52, C.I. I. Acid Red 289, C.I. I. Acid Violet 9, C.I. I. Acid Violet 30, C.I. I. A rhodamine acid dye such as Acid Blue 19 is preferred.
  • Examples of commercially available basic dyes include C.I. I. Basic violet 1, 3, 14, C.I. I. Basic Blue 1, 5, 7, 8, 11, 26, C.I. I.
  • Triarylmethane basic dyes such as Basic Green 1, 4; I. Basic Yellow 13, C.I. I. Cyanine basic dyes such as Basic Red 14; C.I. I. Azo basic dyes such as Basic Red 29; I. And xanthene-based basic dyes such as Basic Violet 11.
  • Triarylmethane basic dyes are C.I. I. Basic blue 1, 5, 7, 8, 11, 26 are preferred.
  • the dye which has the cation of the coloring material represented by general formula (I ') mentioned later is also mentioned as a suitable thing. These dyes can be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the counter ion differs depending on the type of the dye, the counter ion of the acid dye is a cation, and the counter ion of the basic dye is an anion. Therefore, the rake agent is appropriately selected and used depending on the dye. That is, when the acid dye is insolubilized, a compound that generates a counter cation of the dye is used as a rake agent. When the basic dye is insolubilized, a counter anion of the dye is generated as a rake agent. A compound is used.
  • Examples of the counter cation of the acid dye include an ammonium cation, a metal cation, and an inorganic polymer.
  • a rake agent that generates ammonium ions for example, primary amine compounds, secondary amine compounds, tertiary amine compounds, and the like are preferable. Among them, secondary amines are preferred because of their excellent heat resistance and light resistance. It is preferable to use an amine compound or a tertiary amine compound.
  • what is necessary is just to select suitably from the metal salt which has a desired metal ion as a lake agent which generate
  • the counter cation of the acid dye can be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the rake color material containing an acid dye is preferably a rake color material containing a xanthene-based dye from the viewpoint that high luminance can be achieved.
  • the xanthene acid dye in the lake color material it is preferable to have a compound represented by the following general formula (II), that is, a rhodamine acid dye.
  • R I to R IV each independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group, and R I and R III , R II and R IV are bonded to each other.
  • R V represents an acidic group
  • X represents a halogen atom
  • m represents an integer of 0 to 5.
  • the general formula (II) has one or more acidic groups.
  • N is an integer of 0 or more.
  • the alkyl group in R I to R IV is not particularly limited. Examples thereof include a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent. Among them, a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms is preferable. More preferably, it is a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms.
  • the substituent that the alkyl group may have is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include an aryl group, a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, and the like, and the substituted alkyl group includes a benzyl group, and further, a substituent. May have a halogen atom or an acidic group.
  • the aryl group in R I to R IV is not particularly limited.
  • an aryl group which may have a substituent having 6 to 20 carbon atoms is exemplified, and among them, a group having a phenyl group, a naphthyl group or the like is preferable.
  • the heteroaryl group in R I to R IV include heteroaryl groups which may have a substituent having 5 to 20 carbon atoms, and those containing a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom as the hetero atom are preferable. .
  • Examples of the substituent that the aryl group or heteroaryl group may have include an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, a halogen atom, an acidic group, a hydroxyl group, an alkoxy group, a carbamoyl group, and a carboxylic acid ester group.
  • R I to R IV may be the same or different.
  • the acidic group or a salt thereof include a carboxy group (—COOH), a carboxylate group (—COO ⁇ ), a carboxylate group (—COOM, where M represents a metal atom), a sulfonate group (—SOO). 3 -), a sulfo group (-SO 3 H), sulfonate (-SO 3 M, wherein M represents a metal atom), and among them, a sulfonato group (-SO 3 -.), a sulfo group It is preferable to have at least one of (—SO 3 H) or a sulfonate group (—SO 3 M).
  • the metal atom M include a sodium atom and a potassium atom.
  • Acid Red 50, Acid Red 52, Acid Red 289, Acid Violet 9, Acid Violet 30, Acid Blue 19 and the like are preferable from the viewpoint of increasing brightness.
  • the method for producing the compound represented by the general formula (II) is not particularly limited, and can be obtained by referring to, for example, JP2010-211198A.
  • the metal lake color material of the xanthene acid dye includes a metal atom-containing material as a lake agent.
  • a rake agent containing a metal atom By using a rake agent containing a metal atom, the heat resistance of the coloring material is increased.
  • a rake agent containing a metal atom that becomes a divalent or higher valent metal cation is preferable.
  • the counter anion of the basic dye may be an organic anion or an inorganic anion.
  • organic anion include organic compounds having an anionic group as a substituent.
  • the lake color material is an acid dye and a basic dye present as an ion pair.
  • rake agents that generate these organic anions include alkali metal salts and alkaline earth metal salts of the above organic anions.
  • the inorganic anion for example, an anion of oxo acid (phosphate ion, sulfate ion, chromate ion, tungstate ion (WO 4 2 ⁇ ), molybdate ion (MoO 4 2 ⁇ ), etc.) Mention may be made of inorganic anions such as polyacid anions condensed with oxo acids and mixtures thereof.
  • the polyacid may be an isopolyacid anion (M m O n ) c- or a heteropoly acid anion (X l M m O n ) c- .
  • M represents a poly atom
  • X represents a hetero atom
  • m represents a composition ratio of poly atoms
  • n represents a composition ratio of oxygen atoms.
  • the poly atom M include Mo, W, V, Ti, and Nb.
  • the hetero atom X include Si, P, As, S, Fe, and Co.
  • a polyacid anion containing at least one of molybdenum (Mo) and tungsten (W) is preferable, and a c-valent polyacid anion containing at least tungsten is more preferable.
  • rake agents that generate inorganic anions include alkali salts and alkali metal salts of the above inorganic anions.
  • the counter anion of the basic dye in the lake color material can be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the rake color material is preferably a rake color material composed of a basic dye and an inorganic anion, more preferably a basic dye and a polyacid anion, from the viewpoint of heat resistance and light resistance. .
  • the silane coupling agent is easily changed over time, but in the present invention, the content of the silane coupling agent is the total solid content in the colored resin composition
  • the influence of the change with time is small, while the heat resistance and light resistance are high, so that it is particularly suitably used as a rake color material of the present application.
  • the lake color material includes a lake color material having a triarylmethane dye from the viewpoint that the brightness of the color filter can be improved.
  • the rake colorant is excellent in heat resistance and light resistance, and achieves high brightness of the color filter.
  • the rake colorant is preferably a colorant represented by the following general formula (I): An association state is formed, which is preferable in that it exhibits superior heat resistance.
  • A is an a-valent organic group in which the carbon atom directly bonded to N has no ⁇ bond, and the organic group is saturated aliphatic carbonized at least at the terminal directly bonded to N.
  • R i to R v each independently represents a hydrogen atom, an optionally substituted alkyl group or an optionally substituted aryl group, and R ii and R iii , R iv and R v may combine to form a ring structure
  • Ar 1 represents a divalent aromatic group which may have a substituent
  • a plurality of R i to R v and Ar 1 may be the same or different.
  • a and c represent an integer of 2 or more
  • b and d represent an integer of 1 or more.
  • e is 0 or 1, and when e is 0, there is no bond.
  • a plurality of e may be the same or different.
  • the color material represented by the general formula (I) includes a divalent or higher valent anion 202 and a divalent or higher cation 201. It is presumed that the cation and the cation are not simply ion-bonded by one molecule to one molecule but form a molecular aggregate 210 in which a plurality of molecules are associated through the ion bond 203. Therefore, the apparent molecular weight of the color material represented by the general formula (I) is remarkably increased as compared with the molecular weight of the conventional lake color material. It is presumed that the formation of such molecular aggregates increases the cohesive force in the solid state, lowers the thermal motion, suppresses dissociation of ion pairs and decomposition of the cation part, and improves heat resistance.
  • a in the general formula (I) is an a-valent organic group in which the carbon atom directly bonded to N (nitrogen atom) does not have a ⁇ bond, and the organic group is saturated at least at the terminal directly bonded to N.
  • A preferably does not have a siloxane bond, and more preferably does not have Si (silicon atom).
  • an aliphatic hydrocarbon group having a saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group at the terminal directly bonded to N is linear, branched or cyclic unless the terminal carbon atom directly bonded to N has a ⁇ bond.
  • the carbon atom other than the terminal may have an unsaturated bond, may have a substituent, and the carbon chain contains O, S, and N. Also good.
  • a carbonyl group, a carboxy group, an oxycarbonyl group, an amide group or the like may be contained, and a hydrogen atom may be further substituted with a halogen atom or the like.
  • the aromatic group having an aliphatic hydrocarbon group in A is a monocyclic or polycyclic aromatic group having an aliphatic hydrocarbon group having a saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group at the terminal directly bonded to N. And may have a substituent, and may be a heterocyclic ring containing O, S, and N. Especially, it is preferable that A contains a cyclic
  • the cyclic aliphatic hydrocarbon groups a bridged alicyclic hydrocarbon group is preferable from the viewpoint of skeleton fastness.
  • the bridged alicyclic hydrocarbon group means a polycyclic aliphatic hydrocarbon group having a bridged structure in the aliphatic ring and having a polycyclic structure, for example, norbornane, bicyclo [2,2,2]. Examples include octane and adamantane.
  • norbornane is preferable.
  • the group containing a benzene ring and a naphthalene ring is mentioned, for example, Among these, the group containing a benzene ring is preferable.
  • A is a divalent organic group, a linear, branched or cyclic alkylene group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or an aromatic group substituted with two alkylene groups having 1 to 20 carbon atoms such as a xylylene group Etc.
  • the valence a in the general formula (I) is the number of chromogenic cation sites constituting the cation, and a is an integer of 2 or more. In the color material of the present invention, since the valence a of the cation is 2 or more, it has excellent heat resistance.
  • the upper limit of a is not particularly limited, but a is preferably 4 or less, and more preferably 3 or less, from the viewpoint of ease of production.
  • the alkyl group for R i to R v is not particularly limited. Examples thereof include straight-chain or branched alkyl groups having 1 to 20 carbon atoms. Among them, straight-chain or branched alkyl groups having 1 to 8 carbon atoms are preferable, and straight chain having 1 to 5 carbon atoms. A chain or branched alkyl group is more preferable from the viewpoint of luminance and heat resistance. Of these, the alkyl group in R i to R v is particularly preferably an ethyl group or a methyl group.
  • the substituent that the alkyl group may have is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include an aryl group, a halogen atom, and a hydroxyl group, and examples of the substituted alkyl group include a benzyl group.
  • the aryl group in R i to R v is not particularly limited. For example, a phenyl group, a naphthyl group, etc. are mentioned. Examples of the substituent that the aryl group may have include an alkyl group and a halogen atom.
  • R i to R v are each independently a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, a phenyl group, or R ii and R iii , or R iv and R v.
  • R i to R v are each independently a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, a phenyl group, or R ii and R iii , or R iv and R v.
  • R i to R v can each independently have the above-described structure, and among these, R i is preferably a hydrogen atom from the viewpoint of color purity, and R ii to R ii from the viewpoint of ease of production and raw material procurement. More preferably, R v are all the same.
  • the divalent aromatic group in Ar 1 is not particularly limited.
  • the aromatic group for Ar 1 the same aromatic groups as those described for the aromatic group for A can be used.
  • Ar 1 is preferably an aromatic group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably an aromatic group composed of a condensed polycyclic carbocycle having 10 to 14 carbon atoms. Among these, a phenylene group or a naphthylene group is more preferable because the structure is simple and the raw material is inexpensive.
  • a plurality of R i to R v and Ar 1 in one molecule may be the same or different.
  • the combination of R i to R v and Ar 1 can be adjusted to a desired color.
  • the anion portion (B c ⁇ ) represents a c-valent polyacid anion containing at least tungsten and optionally containing molybdenum.
  • the polyacid anion in the colorant represented by the general formula (I) can be used alone or in combination of two or more of the above-mentioned anions.
  • the overall ratio of tungsten to molybdenum is preferably 90:10 to 100: 0 from the viewpoint of heat resistance and light resistance.
  • b represents the number of cations
  • d represents the number of anions in the molecular aggregate
  • b and d represent an integer of 1 or more.
  • a plurality of cations in the molecular aggregate may be one kind alone, or two or more kinds may be combined.
  • the anion present in the molecular aggregate may be a single anion or a combination of two or more, and an organic anion and an inorganic anion may be used in combination. .
  • E in the general formula (I) is an integer of 0 or 1.
  • a plurality of e may be the same or different. That is, for example, it may be a cation moiety having only a triarylmethane skeleton or a plurality of xanthene skeletons, or may be a cation moiety containing both a triarylmethane skeleton and a xanthene skeleton in one molecule. From the viewpoint of color purity, an anion portion having only the same skeleton is preferable.
  • the color material represented by the general formula (I) can be adjusted to a desired color by using a cation portion including both a triarylmethane skeleton and a xanthene skeleton.
  • e in the color material represented by the general formula (I) is 0, that is, the use of the color material represented by the following general formula (I ′) is easy to adjust to a desired color. More preferred.
  • the method for producing the color material represented by the general formula (I) is not particularly limited. For example, it can be obtained by the production method described in International Publication No. 2012/144520 pamphlet.
  • the color materials can be used singly or in combination of two or more.
  • the color material includes at least one selected from a lake color material having a xanthene skeleton, a lake color material having a triarylmethane skeleton, and a dye having a xanthene skeleton from the viewpoint of improving luminance and contrast. It is preferable that at least one selected from a lake color material represented by the general formula (I), a lake color material containing the xanthene dye, and a combination thereof is particularly preferably used.
  • the average primary particle size of the color material used in the present invention is not particularly limited as long as it can produce a desired color when it is used as a color layer of a color filter, and varies depending on the type of color material used. Is preferably in the range of 10 nm to 200 nm, more preferably 15 nm to 150 nm. When the average primary particle diameter of the color material is in the above range, the display device including the color filter manufactured using the color material dispersion according to the present invention has high contrast and high quality. it can.
  • the color material used in the present invention can be produced by a known method such as a recrystallization method or a solvent salt milling method. Further, a commercially available color material may be used after being refined.
  • the photopolymerizable compound used in the photosensitive colored resin composition of the present invention may be appropriately selected from conventionally known compounds, and is not particularly limited.
  • a compound having two or more ethylenically unsaturated double bonds Is preferably used, and is particularly preferably a polyfunctional (meth) acrylate having two or more acryloyl groups or methacryloyl groups.
  • Such polyfunctional (meth) acrylate may be appropriately selected from conventionally known ones. Specific examples include those described in JP2013-029832A.
  • polyfunctional (meth) acrylates may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the polyfunctional monomer has three polymerizable double bonds (trifunctional).
  • (Meth) acrylate succinic acid modified product of pentaerythritol tri (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol tetra (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol tetra (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol penta (meth) )
  • Succinic acid modified product of acrylate, dipen Hexa (meth) acrylate are preferable.
  • initiator there is no restriction
  • Initiators include aromatic ketones, benzoin ethers, halomethyl oxadiazole compounds, ⁇ -amino ketones, biimidazoles, N, N-dimethylaminobenzophenone, halomethyl-S-triazine compounds, thioxanthone, etc. Can do.
  • Specific examples of the initiator include aromatic ketones such as benzophenone, 4,4′-bisdiethylaminobenzophenone and 4-methoxy-4′-dimethylaminobenzophenone, benzoin ethers such as benzoin methyl ether, and benzoin such as ethylbenzoin.
  • Biimidazoles such as 2- (o-chlorophenyl) -4,5-phenylimidazole dimer, halo such as 2-trichloromethyl-5- (p-methoxystyryl) -1,3,4-oxadiazole Methyloxadiazole compounds, halomethyl-S-triazine compounds such as 2- (4-butoxy-naphth-1-yl) -4,6-bis-trichloromethyl-S-triazine, 2,2-dimethoxy-1, 2-diphenylethane-1-one, 2-methyl-1- [4- (methylthio) phenyl] -2 Morpholinopropanone, 1,2-benzyl-2-dimethylamino-1- (4-morpholinophenyl) -butanone-1,1-hydroxy-cyclohexyl-phenyl ketone, benzyl, benzoylbenzoic acid, methyl benzoylbenzoate, 4 -Benzoyl
  • 2-methyl-1- [4- (methylthio) phenyl] -2-morpholinopropan-1-one, 2-benzyl-2- (dimethylamino) -1- (4-morpholinophenyl) -1- Butanone, 4,4′-bis (diethylamino) benzophenone, and diethylthioxanthone are preferably used.
  • the sensitivity is obtained by combining an ⁇ -aminoacetophenone initiator such as 2-methyl-1- [4- (methylthio) phenyl] -2-morpholinopropan-1-one with a thioxan initiator such as diethylthioxanthone.
  • the total content thereof is preferably 5% by mass or more and 15% by mass or less based on the total solid content of the photosensitive colored resin composition.
  • An initiator amount of 15% by mass or less is preferable because sublimates during the production process are reduced.
  • the initiator amount is 5% by mass or more, development resistance is improved.
  • the initiator preferably contains an oxime-based initiator, and more preferably contains an oxime ester-based photoinitiator, from the viewpoint that a margin for adjusting the line width can be secured.
  • the oxime ester-based photoinitiator those having an aromatic ring are preferable from the viewpoint of reducing contamination of the colored resin composition for color filters and degradation of the apparatus due to decomposition products, and having condensed rings including aromatic rings. More preferred are those having a condensed ring containing a benzene ring and a heterocycle.
  • the oxime ester photoinitiator include oxime ester light described in JP-A No. 2000-80068, JP-A No. 2001-233842, JP-T 2010-527339, JP-T 2010-527338, JP-A 2013-041153, and the like. An initiator etc. are mentioned.
  • the oxime ester photoinitiator used in the present invention is preferably an oxime ester photoinitiator that generates an aryl radical, particularly a phenyl radical, and more preferably an oxime ester type that generates an alkyl radical, particularly a methyl radical. It is preferable to use a photoinitiator because it has high sensitivity, and when combined with a latent antioxidant, the reduction in line width is small, and solvent resistance and development resistance are excellent. It is presumed that the alkyl radical is more easily activated by radical movement than the phenyl radical.
  • the oxime ester photoinitiator it is preferable to use an oxime ester photoinitiator having a diphenyl sulfide skeleton from the viewpoint of improving luminance as compared with the case having a carbazole skeleton. Moreover, it is preferable from the point which a sensitivity improves that at least 2 sorts of oxime system initiators are included. Further, the inclusion of at least two oxime-based initiators is preferable in terms of improving the development resistance and enhancing the effect of suppressing the occurrence of water stains.
  • water stain means that, when a component that enhances alkali developability is used, a trace of water stain is generated after rinsing with pure water after alkali development. Such a water stain disappears after post-baking, so there is no problem as a product. Arise. Therefore, if the inspection sensitivity of the inspection apparatus is lowered in the appearance inspection, the yield of the final color filter product is lowered as a result, which becomes a problem.
  • a photoinitiator having a tertiary amine structure in combination with the oxime ester photoinitiator from the viewpoint of improving sensitivity. Since the photoinitiator having a tertiary amine structure has a tertiary amine structure that is an oxygen quencher in the molecule, radicals generated from the initiator are hardly deactivated by oxygen, and sensitivity can be improved. is there.
  • Examples of commercially available photoinitiators having the tertiary amine structure include 2-methyl-1- (4-methylthiophenyl) -2-morpholinopropan-1-one (for example, Irgacure 907, manufactured by BASF), 2-benzyl-2- (dimethylamino) -1- (4-morpholinophenyl) -1-butanone (eg Irgacure 369, manufactured by BASF), 4,4′-bis (diethylamino) benzophenone (eg Hycure ABP, Kawaguchi Pharmaceutical).
  • 2-methyl-1- (4-methylthiophenyl) -2-morpholinopropan-1-one for example, Irgacure 907, manufactured by BASF
  • 2-benzyl-2- (dimethylamino) -1- (4-morpholinophenyl) -1-butanone eg Irgacure 369, manufactured by BASF
  • an oxime ester photoinitiator with an ⁇ -aminoalkylphenone initiator, and among them, an alkyl radical oxime ester compound and an ⁇ -aminoalkylphenone. It is more preferable to combine with a system initiator.
  • the solvent used in the present invention is not particularly limited as long as it is an organic solvent that does not react with each component in the photosensitive colored resin composition and can dissolve or disperse them.
  • a solvent can be used individually or in combination of 2 or more types.
  • Specific examples of the solvent include alcohol solvents such as methyl alcohol, ethyl alcohol, N-propyl alcohol, i-propyl alcohol, methoxy alcohol, and ethoxy alcohol; carbitol solvents such as methoxyethoxyethanol and ethoxyethoxyethanol; Ethyl acetate, butyl acetate, methyl methoxypropionate, ethyl methoxypropionate, ethyl ethoxypropionate, ethyl lactate, methyl hydroxypropionate, ethyl hydroxypropionate, n-butyl acetate, isobutyl acetate, isobutyl butyrate, n-butyl butyrate, Ester solvents such
  • glycol ether acetate solvents such as methoxyethyl acetate, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, 3-methoxy-3-methyl-1-butyl acetate, 3-methoxybutyl acetate, ethoxyethyl acetate; methoxyethoxyethyl acetate, ethoxy Carbitol acetate solvents such as ethoxyethyl acetate and butyl carbitol acetate (BCA); diacetates such as propylene glycol diacetate and 1,3-butylene glycol diacetate; ethylene glycol monomethyl ether, ethylene glycol monoethyl ether, ethylene Glycol dimethyl ether, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, diethylene glycol monoethyl ether, diethylene Glycol ether solvents such as glycol diethyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether and dipropylene glycol dimethyl ether;
  • Lactone solvents include cyclic ether solvents such as tetrahydrofuran; unsaturated hydrocarbon solvents such as benzene, toluene, xylene, and naphthalene; saturated hydrocarbon solvents such as N-heptane, N-hexane, and N-octane; Examples include organic solvents such as aromatic hydrocarbons such as xylene.
  • glycol ether acetate solvents, carbitol acetate solvents, glycol ether solvents, and ester solvents are preferably used from the viewpoint of solubility of other components.
  • the solvent used in the present invention includes propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, butyl carbitol acetate (BCA), 3-methoxy-3-methyl-1-butyl acetate, ethyl ethoxypropionate, ethyl lactate,
  • BCA butyl carbitol acetate
  • 3-methoxy-3-methyl-1-butyl acetate ethyl ethoxypropionate
  • ethyl lactate ethyl lactate
  • one or more selected from the group consisting of 3-methoxybutyl acetate is preferable from the viewpoints of solubility of other components and coating suitability.
  • propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate is included, and further, diethylene glycol ethyl methyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, 3-methoxy-3-methyl-1-butanol. It is preferable to use a mixed solvent containing one or more selected from 3-methoxy-3-methyl-1-butyl acetate and propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate.
  • the content ratio of propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate in the mixed solvent is preferably 70% by mass to 99% by mass and more preferably 80% by mass to 99% by mass with respect to the total amount of the solvent.
  • the colorant is preferably used by being dispersed in a solvent with a dispersant.
  • the dispersant can be appropriately selected from conventionally known dispersants.
  • a dispersing agent can be used individually by 1 type or in combination of 2 or more types.
  • the dispersant that can be used include cationic, anionic, nonionic, amphoteric, silicone, and fluorine surfactants.
  • the surfactants a polymer dispersant is preferable because it can be uniformly and finely dispersed.
  • polymer dispersant examples include (co) polymers of unsaturated carboxylic acid esters such as polyacrylic acid esters; (partial) amine salts of (co) polymers of unsaturated carboxylic acid such as polyacrylic acid; (Partial) ammonium salts and (partial) alkylamine salts; (co) polymers of hydroxyl group-containing unsaturated carboxylic acid esters such as hydroxyl group-containing polyacrylates and their modified products; polyurethanes; unsaturated polyamides; polysiloxanes Long chain polyaminoamide phosphates; polyethyleneimine derivatives (amides and their bases obtained by reaction of poly (lower alkylene imines) with free carboxy group-containing polyesters); polyallylamine derivatives (polyallylamine and free carboxy) Polyester, polyamide or ester-amide co-condensate having a group The reaction product obtained by reacting one or more compound selected from among the three compounds of the polyesteramide)) or the like.
  • a polymer dispersant containing a nitrogen atom in the main chain or side chain and having an amine value is preferable from the viewpoint that the colorant can be suitably dispersed and the dispersion stability is good.
  • a polymer dispersant composed of a polymer containing a repeating unit having a tertiary amine is preferable from the viewpoint of good dispersibility, no precipitation of foreign matters when forming a coating film, and improvement of luminance and contrast.
  • the repeating unit having a tertiary amine is a site having an affinity for the colorant.
  • the polymer containing a repeating unit having a tertiary amine usually contains a repeating unit that becomes a site having an affinity for a solvent.
  • a polymer containing a repeating unit having a tertiary amine a block copolymer having a block part composed of a repeating unit having a tertiary amine and a block part having a solvent affinity is particularly preferable. It is preferable at the point which can form the coating film which is excellent in it and becomes high-intensity.
  • the repeating unit having a tertiary amine only needs to have a tertiary amine, and the tertiary amine may be contained in the side chain of the block polymer or may constitute the main chain.
  • a repeating unit having a tertiary amine in the side chain is preferable, and among them, the repeating unit (a) represented by the following general formula (2) is preferable because the main chain skeleton is hardly thermally decomposed and has high heat resistance. ) Is more preferable.
  • R 41 is a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • L is a divalent linking group
  • R 42 is an alkylene group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, — [CH (R 45 ) —CH
  • R 43 and R 44 each independently, represent a substituted optionally also be a chain or cyclic hydrocarbon group
  • R 45 and R 46 R 43 and R 44 form a ring structure by bonding with each other is, Each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
  • x represents an integer of 1 to 18, y represents an integer of 1 to 5, and
  • z represents an integer of 1 to 18.
  • Examples of the divalent linking group L in the general formula (2) include, for example, an alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, an arylene group, a —CONH— group, a —COO— group, an ether group having a carbon number of 1 to 10 (— R′—OR ′′ —: R ′ and R ′′ are each independently an alkylene group) and combinations thereof.
  • L is a —COO— group or a —CONH— group because of the heat resistance of the polymer obtained, solubility in propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (PGMEA) which is suitably used as a solvent, and a relatively inexpensive material. It is preferably a group.
  • the divalent organic group R 42 in the general formula (2) is an alkylene group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, — [CH (R 45 ) —CH (R 46 ) —O] x —CH (R 45 ) —CH (R 46 ) — or — [(CH 2 ) y —O] z — (CH 2 ) y —.
  • the alkylene group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms may be linear or branched.
  • R 45 and R 46 are each independently a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
  • R 42 is preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms from the viewpoint of dispersibility, and among them, R 42 is more preferably a methylene group, an ethylene group, a propylene group, or a butylene group. Groups are more preferred.
  • Examples of the cyclic structure formed by combining R 43 and R 44 in the general formula (2) with each other include a 5- to 7-membered nitrogen-containing heterocyclic monocycle or a condensed ring formed by condensing two of these. It is done.
  • the nitrogen-containing heterocycle preferably has no aromaticity, more preferably a saturated ring.
  • Examples of the repeating unit represented by the general formula (2) include alkyl group-substituted amino such as dimethylaminoethyl (meth) acrylate, dimethylaminopropyl (meth) acrylate, diethylaminoethyl (meth) acrylate, and diethylaminopropyl (meth) acrylate.
  • alkyl group-substituted amino such as dimethylaminoethyl (meth) acrylate, dimethylaminopropyl (meth) acrylate, diethylaminoethyl (meth) acrylate, and diethylaminopropyl (meth) acrylate.
  • Examples include group-containing (meth) acrylates, alkyl group-substituted amino group-containing (meth) acrylamides such as dimethylaminoethyl (meth) acrylamide, dimethylaminopropyl (meth) acrylamide, and the like
  • dimethylaminoethyl (meth) acrylate, diethylaminoethyl (meth) acrylate, and dimethylaminopropyl (meth) acrylamide can be preferably used in terms of improving dispersibility and dispersion stability.
  • the block part composed of repeating units having a tertiary amine it is preferable that three or more structural units represented by the general formula (2) are included.
  • it is preferably 3 to 100, more preferably 3 to 50, and even more preferably 3 to 30.
  • a block having a block part composed of a repeating unit having a tertiary amine and a block part having solvent affinity (hereinafter sometimes referred to as B block).
  • B block a block part having solvent affinity in the polymer
  • the polymer does not have the structural unit represented by the general formula (2), and the general formula ( 2) It has a solvent-affinity block part having a structural unit copolymerizable with.
  • the arrangement of each block of the block copolymer is not particularly limited, and for example, an AB block copolymer, an ABA block copolymer, a BAB block copolymer, and the like can be used.
  • the structural unit copolymerizable with the general formula (2) is a structural unit represented by the following general formula (8) from the viewpoint of improving the heat resistance while improving the dispersibility and dispersion stability of the coloring material. It is preferable that
  • R 47 is a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • A is a direct bond or a divalent linking group
  • R 48 is an alkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms
  • R 49 and R 50 are each independently a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • R 51 is a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms, an alkenyl group having 2 to 18 carbon atoms, an aralkyl group
  • X is an integer from 1 to 18, and y is an integer from 1 to 5.
  • the number z represents an integer of 1-18.
  • the divalent linking group A in the general formula (8) can be the same as L in the general formula (2), and propylene glycol which is suitably used as the heat resistance and solvent of the obtained polymer. From the viewpoint of solubility in monomethyl ether acetate (PGMEA) and relatively inexpensive material, A is preferably a —COO— group.
  • the alkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms may be linear, branched or cyclic.
  • the alkenyl group having 2 to 18 carbon atoms may be linear, branched or cyclic.
  • R 48 is preferably a methyl group, various butyl groups, various hexyl groups, benzyl groups, cyclohexyl groups, or hydroxyethyl groups from the viewpoint of dispersibility and substrate adhesion.
  • Examples of the aryl group which may have a substituent include a phenyl group, a biphenyl group, a naphthyl group, a tolyl group, and a xylyl group.
  • the aryl group preferably has 6 to 24 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms.
  • Examples of the aralkyl group which may have a substituent include a benzyl group, a phenethyl group, a naphthylmethyl group, and a biphenylmethyl group.
  • the aralkyl group preferably has 7 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 7 to 14 carbon atoms.
  • Examples of the substituent of the aromatic ring such as an aryl group and an aralkyl group include an alkenyl group, a nitro group, and a halogen atom in addition to a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • R 51 may be a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms, alkenyl group having 2 to 18 carbon atoms, aralkyl group, aryl group, —CHO, —CH 2 CHO. Or a monovalent group represented by —CH 2 COOR 52 , wherein R 52 is a hydrogen atom or a linear, branched or cyclic alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms.
  • examples of the substituent that may be included include linear, branched or cyclic alkyl groups having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and halogen atoms such as F, Cl and Br. And so on.
  • the alkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms and the alkenyl group, aralkyl group and aryl group having 2 to 18 carbon atoms in R 51 are the same as those described for R 48 above.
  • x, y and z are the same as R 42 in the general formula (2).
  • the number of structural units constituting the solvent affinity block may be appropriately adjusted within a range where the colorant dispersibility is improved.
  • the number of structural units constituting the solvent-affinity block part is 10 or more and 200 or less from the viewpoint that the solvent-affinity part and the colorant affinity part act effectively and improve the dispersibility of the colorant.
  • it is 10 or more and 100 or less, more preferably 10 or more and 70 or less.
  • the solvent-affinity block part may be selected so as to function as a solvent-affinity site, and the repeating unit constituting the solvent-affinity block part may be composed of one kind, or two or more kinds.
  • the repeating unit may be included.
  • the ratio between the number m of the structural unit represented by the general formula (2) and the number n of other structural units constituting the solvent-affinity block unit m / n is preferably in the range of 0.01 to 1 and more preferably in the range of 0.05 to 0.7 from the viewpoint of the dispersibility and dispersion stability of the color material. preferable.
  • the dispersant is a polymer having a structure represented by the general formula (2) and having an amine value of 40 mgKOH / g or more and 120 mgKOH / g or less. It is preferable from the viewpoint of improving luminance and contrast without depositing foreign matters.
  • the amine value is within the above range, the viscosity is excellent in stability over time and heat resistance, and is also excellent in alkali developability and solvent resolubility.
  • the amine value of the dispersant is preferably 80 mgKOH / g or more, more preferably 90 mgKOH / g or more, from the viewpoint of dispersibility and dispersion stability.
  • the amine value of the dispersant is preferably 110 mgKOH / g or less, more preferably 105 mgKOH / g or less.
  • the amine value is the number of mg of potassium hydroxide equivalent to perchloric acid required to neutralize the amine component contained in 1 g of a sample, and can be measured by the method defined in JIS-K7237: 1995. .
  • the organic acid compound when measured by this method, even if it is an amino group that forms a salt with the organic acid compound in the dispersant, the organic acid compound usually dissociates, so that the block copolymer itself used as the dispersant is itself The amine value of can be measured.
  • the acid value of the dispersant used in the present invention is preferably 1 mgKOH / g or more as a lower limit from the viewpoint of the effect of suppressing development residue.
  • the acid value of the dispersant is more preferably 2 mgKOH / g or more from the viewpoint of more excellent development residue suppression effect.
  • the acid value of the dispersant used in the present invention is 18 mgKOH / g or less as the upper limit of the acid value of the dispersant from the viewpoint of preventing deterioration in development adhesion and solvent resolubility. preferable.
  • the acid value of the dispersant is more preferably 16 mgKOH / g or less, even more preferably 14 mgKOH / g or less, from the viewpoint that the development adhesiveness and the solvent re-solubility are good. It is particularly preferred that it is g or less.
  • the acid value of the block copolymer before salt formation is preferably 1 mgKOH / g or more, and more preferably 2 mgKOH / g or more. This is because the effect of suppressing development residue is improved.
  • the upper limit of the acid value of the block copolymer before salt formation is preferably 18 mgKOH / g or less, more preferably 16 mgKOH / g or less, and still more preferably 14 mgKOH / g or less. , 12 mgKOH / g or less is particularly preferable. This is because the development adhesiveness and the solvent resolubility are improved.
  • the amount of the binder is relatively decreased, so that the colored resin layer is easily peeled off from the base substrate during development.
  • the dispersant contains a B block containing a structural unit derived from a carboxy group-containing monomer and has the specific acid value and glass transition temperature, the development adhesion is improved. If the acid value is too high, the developability is excellent, but it is presumed that the polarity is too high and peeling easily occurs during development.
  • the dispersant is a polymer having a structure represented by the general formula (2) and having an amine value of 40 mgKOH / g or more and 120 mgKOH / g or less, and an acid value.
  • 1 mgKOH / g or more and 18 mgKOH / g or less and a glass transition temperature of 30 ° C. or more is excellent in colorant dispersion stability, improves contrast, and suppresses generation of development residue when a colored resin composition is obtained.
  • the carboxy group-containing monomer a monomer that can be copolymerized with a monomer having a structural unit represented by the general formula (2) and contains an unsaturated double bond and a carboxy group can be used.
  • monomers include (meth) acrylic acid, vinyl benzoic acid, maleic acid, maleic acid monoalkyl ester, fumaric acid, itaconic acid, crotonic acid, cinnamic acid, acrylic acid dimer, and the like.
  • an addition reaction product of a monomer having a hydroxyl group such as 2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate and a cyclic anhydride such as maleic anhydride, phthalic anhydride, or cyclohexanedicarboxylic anhydride, ⁇ -carboxy-polycaprolactone Mono (meth) acrylates can also be used.
  • a cyclic anhydride such as maleic anhydride, phthalic anhydride, or cyclohexanedicarboxylic anhydride, ⁇ -carboxy-polycaprolactone Mono (meth) acrylates
  • acid anhydride group containing monomers such as maleic anhydride, itaconic anhydride, and citraconic anhydride, as a precursor of a carboxy group.
  • (meth) acrylic acid is particularly preferable from the viewpoints of copolymerizability, cost, solubility, glass transition temperature, and the like.
  • the content ratio of the structural unit derived from the carboxy group-containing monomer may be appropriately set so that the acid value of the block copolymer is within the range of the specific acid value.
  • it is preferable that it is 0.05 mass% or more and 4.5 mass% or less with respect to the total mass of all the structural units of a block copolymer, and is 0.07 mass% or more and 3.7 mass% or less. More preferably.
  • the structural unit derived from the carboxy group-containing monomer Since the content ratio of the structural unit derived from the carboxy group-containing monomer is not less than the lower limit value, the effect of suppressing the development residue is expressed, and since it is not more than the upper limit value, the development adhesiveness is deteriorated and the solvent resolubility is reduced. Deterioration can be prevented.
  • the structural unit derived from a carboxy group containing monomer should just become said specific acid value, may consist of 1 type, and may contain 2 or more types of structural units.
  • the ratio m / n of the unit number m of the structural unit of the A block and the unit number n of the structural unit of the B block is in the range of 0.05 to 1.5. In view of the dispersibility and dispersion stability of the coloring material, it is more preferably within the range of 0.1 to 1.0.
  • the weight average molecular weight Mw of the block copolymer is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1000 or more and 20000 or less, and preferably 2000 or more and 15000 or less, from the viewpoint of improving the colorant dispersibility and dispersion stability. More preferably, it is more preferably 3000 or more and 12000 or less.
  • the weight average molecular weight is determined as a standard polystyrene conversion value by (Mw) and gel permeation chromatography (GPC).
  • Mw polystyrene conversion value by
  • GPC gel permeation chromatography
  • the method for producing the block copolymer is not particularly limited. Although a block copolymer can be produced by a known method, it is preferable to produce it by a living polymerization method.
  • a block copolymer having a block part composed of a repeating unit having a tertiary amine and a block part having a solvent affinity for example, a block copolymer described in Japanese Patent No. 4911253 is used. It can be mentioned as a suitable thing.
  • the polymer containing a repeating unit having the tertiary amine with respect to 100 parts by mass of the coloring material. Is preferably 15 parts by mass or more and 300 parts by mass or less, and more preferably 20 parts by mass or more and 250 parts by mass or less. If it is in the said range, it is excellent in the dispersibility and dispersion stability, and the effect which improves a contrast becomes high.
  • the polymer containing the repeating unit having the tertiary amine an organic acid compound, and a halogenated hydrocarbon.
  • a salt forming a salt as a dispersant (hereinafter, such a polymer may be referred to as a salt-type polymer).
  • the polymer containing a repeating unit having a tertiary amine is a block copolymer
  • the organic acid compound is an acidic organic phosphorus compound such as phenylphosphonic acid or phenylphosphinic acid. And preferred from the viewpoint of excellent dispersion stability.
  • organic acid compound used for such a dispersant examples include, for example, organic acid compounds described in JP 2012-236882 A and the like.
  • the halogenated hydrocarbon is preferably at least one of allyl halides such as allyl bromide and benzyl chloride and aralkyl halides from the viewpoint of excellent dispersibility and dispersion stability of the coloring material.
  • the alkali-soluble resin in the present invention has an acidic group, can act as a binder resin, and can be used by appropriately selecting from those that are soluble in an alkali developer used when forming a pattern.
  • One kind can be used alone, or two or more kinds can be used in combination.
  • the alkali-soluble resin can be based on an acid value of 40 mgKOH / g or more.
  • a preferred alkali-soluble resin in the present invention is a resin having an acidic group, usually a carboxy group, and specifically, acrylic resins such as an acrylic copolymer having a carboxy group and a styrene-acrylic copolymer having a carboxy group.
  • epoxy (meth) acrylate resins having a carboxy group particularly preferred are those having a carboxy group in the side chain and further having a photopolymerizable functional group such as an ethylenically unsaturated group in the side chain. This is because the film strength of the cured film formed by containing the photopolymerizable functional group is improved.
  • acrylic resins such as acrylic copolymers and styrene-acrylic copolymers, and epoxy acrylate resins may be used in combination.
  • An acrylic resin such as an acrylic copolymer having a constitutional unit having a carboxy group and a styrene-acrylic copolymer having a carboxy group includes, for example, a carboxy group-containing ethylenically unsaturated monomer and, if necessary, a copolymer. It is a (co) polymer obtained by (co) polymerizing other polymerizable monomers by a known method.
  • the carboxy group-containing ethylenically unsaturated monomer include (meth) acrylic acid, vinyl benzoic acid, maleic acid, maleic acid monoalkyl ester, fumaric acid, itaconic acid, crotonic acid, cinnamic acid, and acrylic acid dimer.
  • an addition reaction product of a monomer having a hydroxyl group such as 2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate and a cyclic anhydride such as maleic anhydride, phthalic anhydride, or cyclohexanedicarboxylic anhydride, ⁇ -carboxy-polycaprolactone Mono (meth) acrylates can also be used.
  • a cyclic anhydride such as maleic anhydride, phthalic anhydride, or cyclohexanedicarboxylic anhydride, ⁇ -carboxy-polycaprolactone Mono (meth) acrylates
  • anhydride containing monomers such as maleic anhydride, itaconic anhydride, and citraconic anhydride, as a precursor of a carboxy group.
  • (meth) acrylic acid is particularly preferable from the viewpoints of copolymerizability, cost, solubility, glass transition temperature, and the like.
  • the alkali-soluble resin preferably further has a hydrocarbon ring from the viewpoint of excellent heat resistance and light resistance of the colored layer. It was found that by using an alkali-soluble resin having a hydrocarbon ring, the solvent resistance, heat resistance, and light resistance of the obtained colored layer were improved, and in particular, swelling of the colored layer was suppressed. Although the action is unclear, the bulky hydrocarbon ring in the colored layer suppresses the movement of molecules in the colored layer, resulting in an increase in the strength of the coating and suppression of swelling by the solvent. It is estimated that.
  • a hydrocarbon ring include a cyclic aliphatic hydrocarbon ring which may have a substituent, an aromatic ring which may have a substituent, and combinations thereof.
  • a substituent such as a carbonyl group, a carboxy group, an oxycarbonyl group, or an amide group.
  • a substituent such as a carbonyl group, a carboxy group, an oxycarbonyl group, or an amide group.
  • the hydrocarbon ring include aliphatic hydrocarbons such as cyclopropane, cyclobutane, cyclopentane, cyclohexane, norbornane, tricyclo [5.2.1.0 (2,6)] decane (dicyclopentane), and adamantane.
  • Rings aromatic rings such as benzene, naphthalene, anthracene, phenanthrene, fluorene; chain polycycles such as biphenyl, terphenyl, diphenylmethane, triphenylmethane, stilbene, and cardo structures represented by the following chemical formula (9) It is done.
  • an aliphatic ring is included as the hydrocarbon ring, it is preferable from the viewpoint of improving the heat resistance and adhesion of the colored layer and improving the luminance of the obtained colored layer. Moreover, when the cardo structure shown by the said Chemical formula (9) is included, it is especially preferable from the point which the sclerosis
  • the alkali-soluble resin used in the present invention it is easy to adjust the amount of each constituent unit by using an acrylic copolymer having a constituent unit having a hydrocarbon ring separately from the constituent unit having a carboxy group. This is preferable because the amount of the structural unit having a hydrocarbon ring is increased to easily improve the function of the structural unit.
  • the acrylic copolymer having a structural unit having a carboxy group and the hydrocarbon ring is prepared by using an ethylenically unsaturated monomer having a hydrocarbon ring as the above-mentioned “other monomer capable of copolymerization”. be able to.
  • Examples of the ethylenically unsaturated monomer having a hydrocarbon ring combined with a latent antioxidant include cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, dicyclopentanyl (meth) acrylate, adamantyl (meth) acrylate, isobornyl (meth) acrylate, benzyl Examples include (meth) acrylate, phenoxyethyl (meth) acrylate, and styrene.
  • cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate dicyclopentanyl (meth) acrylate, adamantyl (meth) acrylate, benzyl (Meth) acrylate and styrene are preferred.
  • the alkali-soluble resin used in the present invention preferably has an ethylenic double bond in the side chain.
  • the alkali-soluble resins, or the alkali-soluble resin and the polyfunctional monomer can form a cross-linked bond in the curing step of the resin composition at the time of producing the color filter.
  • the method for introducing an ethylenic double bond into the alkali-soluble resin may be appropriately selected from conventionally known methods.
  • a method of introducing an ethylenic double bond into a side chain by adding a compound having both an epoxy group and an ethylenic double bond in the molecule, such as glycidyl (meth) acrylate, to the carboxy group of the alkali-soluble resin Or by introducing a structural unit having a hydroxyl group into a copolymer, adding a compound having an isocyanate group and an ethylenic double bond in the molecule, and introducing an ethylenic double bond into the side chain.
  • a compound having both an epoxy group and an ethylenic double bond in the molecule such as glycidyl (meth) acrylate
  • the alkali-soluble resin of the present invention may further contain other structural units such as a structural unit having an ester group such as methyl (meth) acrylate and ethyl (meth) acrylate.
  • the structural unit having an ester group not only functions as a component that suppresses alkali solubility of the colored resin composition for a color filter, but also functions as a component that improves the solubility in a solvent and further the solvent resolubility.
  • the alkali-soluble resin in the present invention is preferably an acrylic resin such as an acrylic copolymer and a styrene-acrylic copolymer having a structural unit having a carboxy group and a structural unit having a hydrocarbon ring, It is an acrylic resin such as an acrylic copolymer and a styrene-acrylic copolymer having a structural unit having a carboxy group, a structural unit having a hydrocarbon ring, and a structural unit having an ethylenic double bond. Is more preferable.
  • the alkali-soluble resin can be made into an alkali-soluble resin having desired performance by appropriately adjusting the charged amount of each structural unit.
  • the charging amount of the carboxy group-containing ethylenically unsaturated monomer is preferably 5% by mass or more and more preferably 10% by mass or more with respect to the total amount of the monomer from the viewpoint of obtaining a good pattern.
  • the amount of the carboxy group-containing ethylenically unsaturated monomer is preferably 50% by mass or less, and 40% by mass or less, based on the total amount of monomers. More preferably.
  • the proportion of the carboxy group-containing ethylenically unsaturated monomer is 5% by mass or more, the resulting coating film has sufficient solubility in an alkaline developer.
  • the ratio of the carboxy group-containing ethylenically unsaturated monomer is 50% by mass or less, dropping of the formed pattern from the substrate and film roughness on the pattern surface can be suppressed during development with an alkali developer.
  • an acrylic resin such as an acrylic copolymer having a structural unit having an ethylenic double bond and a styrene-acrylic copolymer, which is more preferably used as an alkali-soluble resin
  • an epoxy group and an ethylenic double bond are used.
  • the compound having a bond is preferably 10% by mass or more and 95% by mass or less, and more preferably 15% by mass or more and 90% by mass or less, based on the charged amount of the carboxy group-containing ethylenically unsaturated monomer.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the carboxy group-containing copolymer is preferably in the range of 1,000 to 50,000, and more preferably 3,000 to 20,000.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the carboxy group-containing copolymer can be measured by a Shodex GPC System-21H using polystyrene as a standard substance and THF as an eluent.
  • Epoxy (meth) acrylate resin which has a carboxy group Epoxy (meth) obtained by making the reaction product of an epoxy compound and unsaturated group containing monocarboxylic acid react with an acid anhydride. Acrylate compounds are suitable.
  • the epoxy compound, unsaturated group-containing monocarboxylic acid, and acid anhydride can be appropriately selected from known ones.
  • the epoxy (meth) acrylate resin having a carboxy group may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the alkali-soluble resin is preferably selected from those having an acid value of 50 mgKOH / g or more from the viewpoint of developability (solubility) with respect to an alkaline aqueous solution used for the developer.
  • the alkali-soluble resin preferably has an acid value of 70 mgKOH / g or more and 300 mgKOH / g or less from the viewpoint of developability (solubility) with respect to an aqueous alkali solution used for the developer and adhesion to the substrate. It is preferable that they are 70 mgKOH / g or more and 280 mgKOH / g or less.
  • the acid value can be measured according to JIS K 0070: 1992.
  • the ethylenically unsaturated bond equivalent is preferably in the range of 100 to 2000, and particularly preferably in the range of 140 to 1500.
  • the ethylenically unsaturated bond equivalent is 2000 or less, the development resistance and adhesion are excellent.
  • the ratio of other structural units, such as the structural unit which has the said carboxy group, and the structural unit which has a hydrocarbon ring can be relatively increased if it is 100 or more, it is excellent in developability and heat resistance.
  • the ethylenically unsaturated bond equivalent is a weight average molecular weight per mole of the ethylenically unsaturated bond in the alkali-soluble resin, and is represented by the following formula (1).
  • Ethylenically unsaturated bond equivalent (g / mol) W (g) / M (mol) (In Formula (1), W represents the mass (g) of the alkali-soluble resin, and M represents the number of moles (mol) of the ethylenic double bond contained in the alkali-soluble resin W (g).)
  • the ethylenically unsaturated bond equivalent is determined, for example, by measuring the number of ethylenic double bonds contained in 1 g of the alkali-soluble resin in accordance with the test method for the iodine value described in JIS K 0070: 1992. It may be calculated.
  • the photosensitive colored resin composition of the present invention further contains an antioxidant.
  • an antioxidant represented by the general formula (1) and a known antioxidant, the light resistance is particularly superior to that obtained when the latent antioxidant is used alone.
  • the antioxidant and the latent antioxidant sequentially exhibit the antioxidant function, thereby suppressing the fading of color materials and the like in all the steps of manufacturing the color filter. be able to.
  • the antioxidant can be appropriately selected from conventionally known ones.
  • An antioxidant can be used individually by 1 type or in combination of 2 or more types.
  • Specific examples of antioxidants include, for example, hindered phenol antioxidants, amine antioxidants, phosphorus antioxidants, sulfur antioxidants, hydrazine antioxidants, and the like. From the viewpoint, it is preferable to use a hindered phenol-based antioxidant.
  • the hindered phenol antioxidant contains at least one phenol structure, and has a structure in which a substituent having 4 or more carbon atoms is substituted on at least one of the 2-position and 6-position of the hydroxyl group of the phenol structure.
  • Specific examples of the hindered phenol antioxidant include, for example, pentaerythritol tetrakis [3- (3,5-di-tert-butyl-4-hydroxyphenyl) propionate] (trade name: Irganox 1010, manufactured by BASF).
  • 1,3,5-tris (3,5-di-tert-butyl-4-hydroxybenzyl) isocyanurate (trade name: Irganox 3114, manufactured by BASF), 2,4,6-tris (4-hydroxy- 3,5-di-tert-butylbenzyl) mesitylene (trade name: Irganox 1330, manufactured by BASF), 6- (4-hydroxy-3,5-di-tert-butylanilino) -2,4-bis (octylthio) -1,3,5-triazine (trade name: Irganox 565, manufactured by BASF), 2,2′-thiodiethylbi [3- (3,5-di-tert-butyl-4-hydroxyphenyl) propionate] (trade name: Irganox 1035, manufactured by BASF), 1,2-bis [3- (4-hydroxy-3,5 -Di-tert-butylphenyl) propionyl] hydrazine (trade name:
  • the photosensitive colored resin composition of the present invention may contain various additives as necessary.
  • the additive include a polymerization terminator, a chain transfer agent, a leveling agent, a plasticizer, a surfactant, an antifoaming agent, a silane coupling agent, an ultraviolet absorber, and an adhesion promoter.
  • the blending ratio of each component is not particularly limited, and can be appropriately prepared according to the use and the like within a range not impairing the effects of the present invention.
  • the content ratio of the color material may be appropriately adjusted according to the desired color, but from the viewpoint of increasing the brightness, it is 10% by mass or more with respect to the total solid content of the photosensitive colored resin composition. It is preferably 60% by mass or less, and more preferably 12% by mass or more and 50% by mass or less.
  • the solid content represents all components other than the solvent constituting the photosensitive colored resin composition. For example, even a liquid photopolymerizable compound is included in the solid content.
  • the content of the photopolymerizable compound is preferably 5% by mass or more and 60% by mass or less, more preferably 10% by mass or more and 40% by mass or less, based on the total solid content of the photosensitive colored resin composition. preferable. If the content of the photopolymerizable compound is less than the above lower limit, the photocuring may not proceed sufficiently, and the exposed part may be eluted during development, and if the content of the photopolymerizable compound is greater than the above upper limit, There is a possibility that developability may be lowered.
  • the content ratio of the initiator is preferably 1% by mass or more and 40% by mass or less, and more preferably 3% by mass or more and 30% by mass or less with respect to the total solid content of the photosensitive colored resin composition. If the amount of initiator is less than the above upper limit value, it is preferable because the pattern does not become too thick with respect to the mask opening. If the amount of initiator is not less than the above lower limit, the solvent resistance is good. Moreover, the total content of two or more oxime initiators when containing at least two oxime initiators as the initiator is 0.1% by mass or more based on the total solid content of the photosensitive colored resin composition. It is preferably 12.0% by mass or less, more preferably 1.0% by mass or more and 8.0% by mass or less from the viewpoint of sufficiently exerting the combined effect of these initiators.
  • the content ratio of the latent antioxidant represented by the general formula (1) is that a highly colored layer can be formed and a photosensitive colored resin composition in which a change in line width is suppressed can be obtained. Therefore, the content is preferably 0.1% by mass or more and 10% by mass or less, and more preferably 0.1% by mass or more and 8% by mass or less, based on the total solid content of the photosensitive colored resin composition.
  • the content is preferably 5% by mass or more and 60% by mass or less, and preferably 5% by mass or more and 50% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the photosensitive colored resin composition from the viewpoint of developability.
  • the following is more preferable, and 10 mass% or more and 40 mass% or less are still more preferable. If the content of the alkali-soluble resin is not less than the above lower limit value, sufficient alkali developability can be obtained, and if the content of the alkali-soluble resin is not more than the above upper limit value, film roughness or pattern chipping may occur during development. Can be suppressed.
  • the content in the case of using the dispersant is not particularly limited as long as it can uniformly disperse the coloring material.
  • the content is 1 with respect to the total solid content of the photosensitive colored resin composition. It can be used in the range of from mass% to 40 mass%. Furthermore, it is preferable to mix
  • the content of the dispersant is 2% by mass or more and 25% by mass or less, more preferably 3% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the photosensitive colored resin composition. It is preferable to mix
  • the content of the antioxidant is a photosensitive colored resin capable of forming a high-brightness colored layer and suppressing a change in line width.
  • it is preferably 0.1% by mass or more and 10% by mass or less, and preferably 0.1% by mass or more and 8% by mass or less, based on the total solid content of the photosensitive colored resin composition. It is more preferable that the content is 0.1% by mass or more and 5.0% by mass or more. If it is more than the said lower limit, a combined use effect will be easy to be exhibited. On the other hand, if it is below the said upper limit, it can be set as the highly sensitive photosensitive resin composition.
  • the content ratio between the latent antioxidant represented by the general formula (1) and the antioxidant is that the above general formula ( 1 to 10 parts by mass, preferably 0.1 to 5.0 parts by mass, based on 1 part by mass of the latent antioxidant represented by 1) Is preferred.
  • the content of the solvent may be appropriately set within a range in which the colored layer can be formed with high accuracy.
  • the total amount of the photosensitive colored resin composition for color filters containing the solvent is usually preferably in the range of 55% by mass to 95% by mass, and more preferably in the range of 65% by mass to 88% by mass. More preferably, it is within.
  • the content of the solvent is within the above range, the coating property can be excellent.
  • the method for producing the photosensitive colored resin composition of the present invention comprises at least a colorant, a photopolymerizable compound, an initiator, a latent antioxidant, and a solvent, and more preferably a dispersant, Can be prepared by mixing using a known mixing means as long as it contains an antioxidant and preferably an alkali-soluble resin and the colorant can be uniformly dispersed or dissolved in the solvent. .
  • a method for preparing the resin composition for example, (1) First, a color material and a dispersant as necessary are added to a solvent to prepare a color material dispersion, and photopolymerization is performed on the dispersion.
  • examples thereof include a method in which an antioxidant is simultaneously added and mixed.
  • the method (1) is preferable because it can effectively prevent aggregation of the color material and can be uniformly dispersed.
  • the method for preparing the colorant dispersion can be appropriately selected from conventionally known dispersion methods. For example, (1) A dispersant is mixed and stirred in advance to prepare a dispersant solution, and then an organic acid compound is mixed as necessary to form a salt between the amino group of the dispersant and the organic acid compound.
  • the dispersing machine for performing the dispersion treatment examples include a roll mill such as a two-roll or a three-roll, a ball mill such as a ball mill or a vibration ball mill, a bead mill such as a paint conditioner, a continuous disk type bead mill, or a continuous annular type bead mill.
  • the bead diameter to be used is preferably 0.03 mm or more and 2.00 mm or less, and more preferably 0.10 mm or more and 1.0 mm or less.
  • preliminary dispersion is performed with 2 mm zirconia beads having a relatively large bead diameter, and the main dispersion is further performed with 0.1 mm zirconia beads having a relatively small bead diameter.
  • filter it is preferable to filter with a membrane filter of 0.5 ⁇ m or more and 2 ⁇ m or less after dispersion.
  • Color filter is a color filter comprising at least a substrate and a colored layer provided on the substrate, wherein at least one of the colored layers is the photosensitive colored resin composition according to the present invention. It is a cured product.
  • a method for producing a color filter according to the present invention is a method for producing a color filter comprising at least a substrate and a colored layer provided on the substrate, It has the process of forming at least 1 of the said colored layer using the photosensitive colored resin composition which concerns on the said this invention.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic sectional view showing an example of the color filter of the present invention.
  • the color filter 10 of the present invention has a substrate 1, a light shielding part 2, and a colored layer 3.
  • At least one of the colored layers used in the color filter of the present invention is a colored layer made of a cured product of the photosensitive colored resin composition according to the present invention.
  • the colored layer is usually formed in an opening of a light-shielding part on the substrate to be described later, and is usually composed of a colored pattern of three or more colors.
  • the arrangement of the colored layers is not particularly limited, and for example, a general arrangement such as a stripe type, a mosaic type, a triangle type, or a four-pixel arrangement type can be used.
  • variety, area, etc. of a colored layer can be set arbitrarily.
  • the thickness of the colored layer is appropriately controlled by adjusting the coating method, the solid content concentration and viscosity of the photosensitive colored resin composition for a color filter, and is usually in the range of 1 ⁇ m to 5 ⁇ m. preferable.
  • the colored layer can be formed by the following method, for example.
  • Examples of the light source used for exposure include ultraviolet rays such as a low-pressure mercury lamp, a high-pressure mercury lamp, and a metal halide lamp, and an electron beam.
  • the exposure amount is appropriately adjusted depending on the light source used, the thickness of the coating film, and the like. Further, heat treatment may be performed in order to accelerate the polymerization reaction after exposure.
  • the heating conditions are appropriately selected depending on the blending ratio of each component in the photosensitive colored resin composition to be used, the thickness of the coating film, and the like.
  • a coating film is formed with a desired pattern by melt
  • a solution in which an alkali is dissolved in water or a water-soluble solvent is usually used.
  • An appropriate amount of a surfactant or the like may be added to the alkaline solution.
  • a general method can be adopted as the developing method.
  • the developer is usually washed and the cured coating film of the photosensitive colored resin composition is dried to form a colored layer.
  • the heating conditions are not particularly limited and are appropriately selected depending on the application of the coating film.
  • the light shielding part in the color filter of the present invention is formed in a pattern on a substrate to be described later, and can be the same as that used as a light shielding part in a general color filter.
  • the pattern shape of the light shielding portion is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a stripe shape and a matrix shape.
  • the light shielding part may be a metal thin film such as chromium by sputtering, vacuum deposition or the like.
  • the light shielding part may be a resin layer in which light shielding particles such as carbon fine particles, metal oxides, inorganic pigments, and organic pigments are contained in a resin binder.
  • the film thickness of the light shielding part is set to about 0.2 ⁇ m to 0.4 ⁇ m in the case of a metal thin film, and is set to about 0.5 ⁇ m to 2 ⁇ m in the case where a black pigment is dispersed or dissolved in a binder resin. Is done.
  • substrate As the substrate, a transparent substrate or a silicon substrate, which will be described later, or an aluminum, silver, or silver / copper / palladium alloy thin film formed on the substrate is used. On these substrates, another color filter layer, a resin layer, a transistor such as a TFT, a circuit, or the like may be formed.
  • the transparent substrate in the color filter of the present invention is not particularly limited as long as it is a base material transparent to visible light, and a transparent substrate used for a general color filter can be used.
  • transparent flexible rigid materials such as quartz glass, alkali-free glass, and synthetic quartz plates, or transparent flexible flexible materials such as transparent resin films, optical resin plates, and flexible glasses. Materials.
  • the thickness of the transparent substrate is not particularly limited, but for example, a thickness of about 100 ⁇ m to 1 mm can be used according to the use of the color filter of the present invention.
  • the color filter of the present invention includes, for example, an overcoat layer, a transparent electrode layer, an alignment film, an alignment protrusion, a columnar spacer, etc., in addition to the substrate, the light shielding portion, and the colored layer. Also good.
  • Display Device A display device according to the present invention includes the color filter according to the present invention.
  • the configuration of the display device is not particularly limited, and can be appropriately selected from conventionally known display devices, such as a liquid crystal display device and an organic light emitting display device.
  • the liquid crystal display device includes the above-described color filter according to the present invention, a counter substrate, and a liquid crystal layer formed between the color filter and the counter substrate.
  • a liquid crystal display device of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic view showing an example of the liquid crystal display device of the present invention.
  • the liquid crystal display device 40 of the present invention includes a color filter 10, a counter substrate 20 having a TFT array substrate and the like, and a liquid crystal layer formed between the color filter 10 and the counter substrate 20. 30.
  • the liquid crystal display device of the present invention is not limited to the configuration shown in FIG. 2, but can be a configuration generally known as a liquid crystal display device using a color filter.
  • the driving method of the liquid crystal display device of the present invention is not particularly limited, and a driving method generally used for a liquid crystal display device can be employed. Examples of such a drive method include a TN method, an IPS method, an OCB method, and an MVA method. In the present invention, any of these methods can be preferably used. Further, the counter substrate can be appropriately selected and used according to the driving method of the liquid crystal display device of the present invention. Furthermore, as the liquid crystal constituting the liquid crystal layer, various liquid crystals having different dielectric anisotropy and mixtures thereof can be used according to the driving method of the liquid crystal display device of the present invention.
  • a method for forming a liquid crystal layer a method generally used as a method for producing a liquid crystal cell can be used, and examples thereof include a vacuum injection method and a liquid crystal dropping method. After forming the liquid crystal layer by the above-described method, the sealed liquid crystal can be aligned by slowly cooling the liquid crystal cell to room temperature.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic view illustrating an example of the organic light emitting display device of the present invention.
  • the organic light emitting display device 100 of the present invention includes a color filter 10 and an organic light emitter 80.
  • An organic protective layer 50 and an inorganic oxide film 60 may be provided between the color filter 10 and the organic light emitter 80.
  • the transparent anode 71, the hole injection layer 72, the hole transport layer 73, the light emitting layer 74, the electron injection layer 75, and the cathode 76 are sequentially formed on the upper surface of the color filter. Examples thereof include a method and a method in which an organic light emitter 80 formed on another substrate is bonded onto the inorganic oxide film 60.
  • the transparent anode 71, the hole injection layer 72, the hole transport layer 73, the light emitting layer 74, the electron injection layer 75, the cathode 76, and other configurations in the organic light emitting body 80 known structures can be appropriately used.
  • the organic light emitting display device 100 manufactured as described above can be applied to, for example, a passive drive type organic EL display or an active drive type organic EL display.
  • the organic light emitting display device of the present invention is not limited to the configuration shown in FIG. 3, and may be a known configuration as an organic light emitting display device that generally uses a color filter.
  • EEMA Ethoxyethyl methacrylate
  • HEMA 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate
  • EHMA 2-ethylhexyl methacrylate
  • MMA methyl methacrylate
  • the obtained block copolymer PGMEA solution is reprecipitated in hexane, purified by filtration and vacuum drying, and a structural unit derived from a block containing a structural unit represented by the general formula (2) and a carboxy group-containing monomer A block copolymer A (acid value: 8 mgKOH / g) containing B block having solvophilic property was obtained.
  • the block copolymer A thus obtained was confirmed by GPC (gel permeation chromatography), and the weight average molecular weight Mw was 7730.
  • the amine value was 95 mgKOH / g.
  • the weight average molecular weight was measured by a Shodex GPC System-21H (Shorex GPC System-21H) using polystyrene as a standard substance and THF as an eluent.
  • the acid value was measured based on JIS K 0070: 1992.
  • Photosensitive binders B to F were obtained in the same manner as in Production Example 1 except that the blending ratio in Production Example 1 was changed as shown in Table 1 below.
  • the compound (alpha) in Table 1 represents the antioxidant IRGANOX1010 by BASF Corporation.
  • Example 1 Preparation of photosensitive colored resin composition 1
  • 24.6 parts by mass of the colorant dispersion A obtained in Preparation Example 1 34.1 parts by mass of the photosensitive binder A obtained in Production Example 1, and 0.16 parts by mass of the surfactant Megafac R08MH (manufactured by DIC) 41.1 parts by mass of PGMEA were mixed to obtain a photosensitive colored resin composition 1 of Example 1.
  • Examples 2 to 6 Preparation of photosensitive colored resin compositions 2 to 6)
  • photosensitive colored resin compositions 2 to 6 were prepared in the same manner as in Example 1, except that photosensitive binders B to F of Production Examples 2 to 6 were used instead of photosensitive binder A, respectively. Obtained.
  • Example 1 Preparation of photosensitive colored resin compositions X1 and X2
  • photosensitive colored resin compositions X1 to X2 were used in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the photosensitive binders G to H of Comparative Production Examples 1 and 2 were used in place of the photosensitive binder A, respectively.
  • the photosensitive binders G to H of Comparative Production Examples 1 and 2 were used in place of the photosensitive binder A, respectively.
  • Example 7 Preparation of photosensitive colored resin composition 7
  • Example 1 instead of using 24.6 parts by mass of the color material dispersion A, 17.2 parts by mass of the color material dispersion A and 7.4 parts by mass of the color material dispersion B were used in combination.
  • a photosensitive colored resin composition 7 was obtained.
  • Example 7 Preparation of photosensitive colored resin compositions 8 to 9
  • a photosensitive colored resin composition was used in the same manner as in Example 7 except that instead of the photosensitive binder A, the photosensitive binder B of Production Example 2 and the photosensitive binder D of Production Example 4 were used. Products 8-9 were obtained.
  • Example 10 Preparation of photosensitive colored resin composition 10.
  • Example 1 instead of 24.6 parts by mass of the color material dispersion A, 19.7 parts by mass of the color material dispersion A and 8.3 parts by mass of the color material dispersion C were used in combination.
  • a photosensitive colored resin composition 10 was obtained in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the amount of A was changed to 33.9 parts by mass and the amount of PGMEA was changed to 37.9 parts by mass.
  • Example 11 to 12 Preparation of photosensitive colored resin compositions 11 to 12
  • a photosensitive colored resin composition was used in the same manner as in Example 10 except that instead of the photosensitive binder A, the photosensitive binder B of Production Example 2 and the photosensitive binder D of Production Example 4 were used. Items 11-12 were obtained.
  • Example 13 Preparation of photosensitive colored resin composition 13
  • 41.6 parts by mass of the colorant dispersion C was used instead of 24.6 parts by mass of the colorant dispersion A
  • the compounding amount of the photosensitive binder A was 33.1 parts by mass
  • the compounding amount of PGMEA Except having changed into 25.2 mass parts, it carried out similarly to Example 1, and obtained the photosensitive colored resin composition 13.
  • Example 14 to 15 Preparation of photosensitive colored resin compositions 14 to 15
  • a photosensitive colored resin composition was prepared in the same manner as in Example 13 except that instead of the photosensitive binder A, the photosensitive binder B of Production Example 2 and the photosensitive binder D of Production Example 4 were used. Items 14 to 15 were obtained.
  • Luminance evaluation The photosensitive colored resin compositions of Examples and Comparative Examples were each applied on a 0.7 mm-thick glass substrate (NH Techno Glass Co., Ltd., “NA35”) using a spin coater. After drying for 3 minutes on a hot plate at 80 ° C., ultraviolet rays of 60 mJ / cm 2 were irradiated using an ultra-high pressure mercury lamp. Thereafter, it was post-baked in a clean oven at 230 ° C. for 75 minutes. Before and after the ultraviolet irradiation, the color film chromaticity (x, y) and luminance (Y) were measured. The chromaticity and luminance were measured using “Microspectroscope OSP-SP200” manufactured by Olympus Corporation. The results are shown in Tables 2-5.
  • the photosensitive colored resin composition obtained in each example and each comparative example was coated on a glass substrate (NH Techno Glass Co., Ltd., “NA35”) using a spin coater to obtain a cured coating film having a thickness of 3 After coating to a thickness of 0.0 ⁇ m, it was dried at 80 ° C. for 3 minutes using a hot plate to form a coating film on the glass substrate.
  • a glass substrate NH Techno Glass Co., Ltd., “NA35”
  • a post-exposure coating film is formed on the glass substrate.
  • 0.05 wt% aqueous potassium hydroxide solution is spin-developed as a developing solution, the developing solution is subjected to an indirect solution for 60 seconds and then washed with pure water, followed by post-processing for 25 minutes in a 230 ° C. clean oven. Baking was performed to form a fine line pattern.
  • the width of the fine line pattern of the portion where the opening width of the chromium mask at the time of exposure corresponds to 90 ⁇ m is measured with an optical microscope, and based on the line width of the comparative example in which no antioxidant is added, The line width increase / decrease rate was calculated according to Equation (2).
  • the results are shown in Tables 2-5.
  • Formula (2) (L ⁇ L 0 ) / L 0 ⁇ 100 (%)
  • L 0 represents the line width of the comparative example to which no antioxidant is added
  • L represents the line width of the example or comparative example to be evaluated.
  • a photosensitive colored resin composition capable of forming a high-luminance colored layer and suppressing a change in line width can be obtained.
  • the results of Table 2 by combining the latent antioxidant and the antioxidant, the light resistance is improved as compared with the case where the latent antioxidant is used alone while suppressing the change in the line width.
  • the decrease in luminance of the colored layer due to ultraviolet irradiation can be suppressed.
  • the photosensitive colored resin composition containing the coloring material C as a dye tended to have a narrow line width. This is presumably because the coloring material C, which is a dye, has decreased sensitivity.
  • the colored layer using the colored resin composition of Comparative Example 8 has such a combination that the color material C and the antioxidant are insufficient in sensitivity even in the exposed portion, and has a hardness that can withstand development. Was not obtained, and a fine line pattern was not formed.
  • the photosensitive colored resin composition of the present invention using the latent antioxidant can obtain good sensitivity even when such a dye is contained, and has a line width of It became clear that the change was suppressed.
  • Production Example 8 Comparative Production Example 3: Preparation of photosensitive binders J and K
  • photosensitive binders J and K were obtained in the same manner as Production Example 7 except that the blending ratio was changed as shown in Table 6 below.
  • the compound (alpha) in Table 6 represents the antioxidant IRGANOX1010 by BASF Corporation.
  • Example 16 Preparation of photosensitive colored resin composition 16
  • 24.6 parts by mass of the colorant dispersion A obtained in Preparation Example 1, 34.1 parts by mass of the photosensitive binder I obtained in Production Example 7, and 0.16 parts by mass of the surfactant MegaFac R08MH (manufactured by DIC) 41.1 parts by mass of PGMEA were mixed to obtain a photosensitive colored resin composition 16 of Example 16.
  • Example 17 Comparative Example 9: Preparation of photosensitive colored resin composition 17, X9
  • photosensitive colored resin composition 17 was prepared in the same manner as in Example 16 except that photosensitive binders J and K of Production Example 8 and Comparative Production Example 3 were used instead of photosensitive binder I. X9 was obtained.
  • Example 18 Preparation of photosensitive colored resin composition 18
  • Example 16 instead of using 24.6 parts by mass of the color material dispersion A, 17.2 parts by mass of the color material dispersion A and 7.4 parts by mass of the color material dispersion B were used in combination.
  • a photosensitive colored resin composition 18 was obtained.
  • Example 19 Comparative Example 10: Preparation of photosensitive colored resin composition 19, X10
  • the photosensitive colored resin composition 19 was used in the same manner as in Example 18 except that instead of the photosensitive binder I, the photosensitive binders J and K of Production Example 8 and Comparative Production Example 3 were used, respectively. X10 was obtained.
  • Example 20 Preparation of photosensitive colored resin composition 20
  • Example 16 instead of 24.6 parts by mass of the color material dispersion A, 19.7 parts by mass of the color material dispersion A and 8.3 parts by mass of the color material dispersion C were used in combination.
  • a photosensitive colored resin composition 20 was obtained in the same manner as in Example 16, except that the amount of I was changed to 33.9 parts by mass and the amount of PGMEA was changed to 37.9 parts by mass.
  • Example 21, Comparative Example 11 Preparation of photosensitive colored resin composition 21, X11
  • the photosensitive colored resin composition 21 was used in the same manner as in Example 20 except that instead of the photosensitive binder I, the photosensitive binders J and K of Production Example 8 and Comparative Production Example 3 were used, respectively. X11 was obtained.
  • Example 22 Preparation of photosensitive colored resin composition 22
  • Example 16 in place of 24.6 parts by mass of the color material dispersion A, 41.6 parts by mass of the color material dispersion C was used, the blending amount of the photosensitive binder I was 33.1 parts by mass, and the blending amount of PGMEA.
  • a photosensitive colored resin composition 22 was obtained in the same manner as in Example 16 except that the amount was changed to 25.2 parts by mass.
  • Example 23 Comparative Example 12: Preparation of photosensitive colored resin composition 23, X12
  • the photosensitive colored resin composition 23 was obtained in the same manner as in Example 22 except that the photosensitive binders J and K of Production Example 8 and Comparative Production Example 3 were used instead of the photosensitive binder I.
  • X12 was obtained.
  • a colored layer having a thickness of 1.6 ⁇ m is formed on the glass substrate (NH Techno Glass Co., Ltd., “NA35”) after post-baking the photosensitive colored resin composition for color filter using a spin coater. After coating with a film thickness, it is dried at 60 ° C. for 3 minutes using a hot plate, and colored on the glass substrate by irradiating the entire surface with 60 mJ / cm 2 ultraviolet rays using an ultrahigh pressure mercury lamp without using a photomask. A layer was formed.
  • the developer is subjected to an indirect solution for 60 seconds and then washed with pure water, and the washed substrate is rotated for 10 seconds to remove water.
  • the contact angle of pure water was measured as described below to evaluate water stain.
  • the contact angle of pure water is measured by dropping 1.0 ⁇ L of pure water on the surface of the colored layer immediately after removing the water by centrifugation, and determining the static contact angle 30 seconds after the landing according to the ⁇ / 2 method. Measured.
  • the measuring device was measured using a contact angle meter DM 500 manufactured by Kyowa Interface Science Co., Ltd.

Landscapes

  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Optics & Photonics (AREA)
  • Nonlinear Science (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Polymers & Plastics (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Materials Engineering (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Mathematical Physics (AREA)
  • Crystallography & Structural Chemistry (AREA)
  • Spectroscopy & Molecular Physics (AREA)
  • Materials For Photolithography (AREA)
  • Addition Polymer Or Copolymer, Post-Treatments, Or Chemical Modifications (AREA)
  • Optical Filters (AREA)
  • Anti-Oxidant Or Stabilizer Compositions (AREA)
  • Polymerisation Methods In General (AREA)

Abstract

Provided is a photosensitive coloring resin composition which is capable of forming a colored layer that has high luminance, and which is suppressed in line width change. A photosensitive coloring resin composition which contains a colorant, a photopolymerizable compound, an initiator, a latent antioxidant and a solvent, and wherein: the colorant contains one or more materials selected from among dyes and lake colorants; and the latent antioxidant contains a compound represented by general formula (1). (In general formula (1), the symbols are as defined in the description.) AA general formula (1)

Description

感光性着色樹脂組成物、カラーフィルタ及びその製造方法、並びに表示装置Photosensitive colored resin composition, color filter, method for producing the same, and display device
 本発明は、感光性着色樹脂組成物、カラーフィルタ及びその製造方法、並びに表示装置に関する。 The present invention relates to a photosensitive colored resin composition, a color filter, a method for producing the same, and a display device.
 ディスプレイ等に代表される薄型画像表示装置、いわゆるフラットパネルディスプレイが、ブラウン管型ディスプレイよりも薄く奥行き方向に場所をとらないことを特徴として数多く上市された。その市場価格は生産技術の進化と共に年々価格が手ごろになり、さらに需要が拡大され、生産量も年々増加している。特にカラー液晶テレビはほぼTVのメインストリームに到達した。また、最近においては、自発光により視認性が高い有機ELディスプレイのような有機発光表示装置も、次世代画像表示装置として注目されている。これらの画像表示装置の性能においては、コントラストや色再現性の向上といったさらなる高画質化や消費電力の低減が強く望まれている。
 これらの液晶表示装置や有機発光表示装置には、カラーフィルタが用いられる。例えばカラー液晶ディスプレイの場合は、バックライトを光源とし、電気的に液晶を駆動させることで光量を制御し、その光がカラーフィルタを通過することで色表現を行っている。よって液晶テレビの色表現にはカラーフィルタは無くてはならず、またディスプレイの性能を左右する大きな役目を担っている。また、有機発光表示装置では、画素の色調整をカラーフィルタを用いて行う場合や、白色発光の有機発光素子にカラーフィルタを用いて液晶表示装置と同様にカラー画像を形成する場合がある。
Many thin image display devices represented by displays and the like, so-called flat panel displays, have been put on the market, characterized by being thinner than a cathode ray tube type display and taking up little space in the depth direction. The market price has become affordable year by year with the evolution of production technology, the demand has further expanded, and the production volume has been increasing year by year. In particular, color LCD TVs have almost reached the mainstream of TV. Recently, an organic light-emitting display device such as an organic EL display having high visibility due to self-emission has been attracting attention as a next-generation image display device. In the performance of these image display devices, further improvement in image quality such as improvement in contrast and color reproducibility and reduction in power consumption are strongly desired.
Color filters are used in these liquid crystal display devices and organic light emitting display devices. For example, in the case of a color liquid crystal display, a backlight is used as a light source, the amount of light is controlled by electrically driving the liquid crystal, and color expression is performed by the light passing through a color filter. Therefore, a color filter must be present in the color representation of a liquid crystal television and plays a major role in determining the performance of the display. Further, in an organic light emitting display device, color adjustment of pixels may be performed using a color filter, or a color image may be formed in the same manner as a liquid crystal display device using a color filter for a white light emitting organic light emitting element.
 近年の傾向として、画像表示装置の省電力化が求められており、バックライトの利用効率を向上させるためにカラーフィルタの高輝度化が特に求められている。特にモバイルディスプレイ(携帯電話、スマートフォン、タブレットPC)では大きな課題である。
 技術進化により電池容量が大きくなったとは言え、モバイルの蓄電量は有限であることに変わりはなく、その一方で画面サイズの拡大に伴い消費電力は増加する傾向にある。モバイル端末の使用可能時間や充電頻度に直結するために、カラーフィルタを含む画像表示装置は、モバイル端末の設計や性能を左右する。
As a recent trend, there is a demand for power saving of an image display device, and in order to improve the utilization efficiency of a backlight, a high brightness of a color filter is particularly demanded. This is a big problem especially for mobile displays (cell phones, smartphones, tablet PCs).
Although the battery capacity has increased due to technological evolution, the amount of electricity stored in the mobile is still limited, while the power consumption tends to increase as the screen size increases. An image display device including a color filter affects the design and performance of a mobile terminal in order to be directly linked to the usable time and charging frequency of the mobile terminal.
 ここで、カラーフィルタは、一般的に、基板と、基板上に形成され、赤、緑、青の三原色の着色パターンからなる着色層と、各着色パターンを区画するように基板上に形成された遮光部とを有している。
 このような着色層の形成方法の一つとして、基板上に、色材と光重合性化合物とを含む感光性樹脂組成物を塗布し、紫外線等を照射することにより硬化させる方法などが知られている。
 上記感光性樹脂組成物の色材としては、顔料や染料が用いられている。顔料は、染料と比較して、一般に耐熱性や耐光性に優れているものの、カラーフィルタ製造工程における高温加熱の際に、十分に退色を防止することができず、輝度の低下がみられた。
 また、近年、カラーフィルタの更なる高輝度化の観点から、一般に透過率の高い染料を用いたカラーフィルタ用感光性樹脂組成物が検討されており、また、染料の耐熱性や耐光性を改善するために染料を不溶化したレーキ色材を用いることも検討されている。しかしながら染料は、顔料に比べて耐熱性や耐光性が悪いため、カラーフィルタ製造工程における高温加熱や光照射の際に、色度が変化し易く、また、着色層の輝度が低下しやすいという問題があった。
Here, the color filter is generally formed on the substrate to form the substrate, the colored layer formed of the three primary colors of red, green, and blue, and the respective colored patterns. A light shielding portion.
As one method for forming such a colored layer, there is known a method in which a photosensitive resin composition containing a colorant and a photopolymerizable compound is applied onto a substrate and cured by irradiating ultraviolet rays or the like. ing.
As the coloring material of the photosensitive resin composition, pigments and dyes are used. Although the pigments are generally superior in heat resistance and light resistance compared to dyes, fading could not be sufficiently prevented during high-temperature heating in the color filter manufacturing process, and brightness was reduced. .
In recent years, photosensitive resin compositions for color filters using dyes with high transmittance have been studied from the viewpoint of further increasing the brightness of color filters, and the heat resistance and light resistance of dyes have been improved. In order to achieve this, the use of a rake color material in which a dye is insolubilized has been studied. However, since dyes have poor heat resistance and light resistance compared to pigments, the chromaticity is likely to change during high-temperature heating and light irradiation in the color filter manufacturing process, and the brightness of the colored layer is likely to decrease. was there.
 上記の問題を解決する手法の一つとして、酸化防止剤を含有する樹脂組成物を用いることが検討されている。
 例えば特許文献1には、青色着色剤と、アルカリ可溶性樹脂と、多官能性単量体と、特定の光重合開始剤と、特定の酸化防止剤とを特定の比率で含有する、青色カラーフィルタ用感放射線性組成物が開示されている。特許文献1によれば、輝度の高い青色画素が形成し得るとされている。
As one of the techniques for solving the above problems, it has been studied to use a resin composition containing an antioxidant.
For example, Patent Document 1 discloses a blue color filter containing a blue colorant, an alkali-soluble resin, a polyfunctional monomer, a specific photopolymerization initiator, and a specific antioxidant in a specific ratio. Radiation sensitive compositions for use are disclosed. According to Patent Document 1, it is said that a blue pixel with high luminance can be formed.
 また、特許文献2には、レーキ顔料と、特定の分散剤と、ヒンダードフェノール系酸化防止剤と、バインダー成分と、溶剤とを含有する、カラーフィルタ用着色樹脂組成物が開示されている。特許文献2によれば、ヒンダードフェノール系酸化防止剤により耐熱性が向上して、高輝度な着色層が形成できるとされている。 Patent Document 2 discloses a colored resin composition for a color filter containing a lake pigment, a specific dispersant, a hindered phenol antioxidant, a binder component, and a solvent. According to Patent Document 2, heat resistance is improved by a hindered phenol-based antioxidant, and a high-luminance colored layer can be formed.
 一方、特許文献3には、耐熱性に優れた着色感光性組成物として、特定の潜在性酸化防止剤と、特定の有機色素を含有する着色感光性組成物が開示されている。 On the other hand, Patent Document 3 discloses a colored photosensitive composition containing a specific latent antioxidant and a specific organic dye as a colored photosensitive composition having excellent heat resistance.
特開2014-160254号公報JP 2014-160254 A 特開2014-153569号公報JP 2014-1553569 A 国際公開第2014/021023号パンフレットInternational Publication No. 2014/021023 Pamphlet
 一般に、カラーフィルタ用の着色層は、基板上でパターニングされている。感光性着色樹脂組成物を用いて着色層を形成する場合、例えば、基板上に感光性着色樹脂組成物の塗膜を形成した後、所定のマスクパターンを介して露光し、その後、現像処理することにより、パターニングされた着色層とすることができる。
 本発明者らは、酸化防止剤を含有する感光性着色樹脂組成物を用いて、上記の手法により着色層を形成することを検討した。その結果、本発明者らは、当該酸化防止剤を含有する感光性樹脂組成物を用いた場合には、設計通りの着色層が形成されない場合があるとの知見を得た。
In general, a colored layer for a color filter is patterned on a substrate. When forming a colored layer using the photosensitive colored resin composition, for example, after forming a coating film of the photosensitive colored resin composition on the substrate, it is exposed through a predetermined mask pattern, and then developed. Thus, a patterned colored layer can be obtained.
The present inventors have studied to form a colored layer by the above-described method using a photosensitive colored resin composition containing an antioxidant. As a result, the present inventors have found that when a photosensitive resin composition containing the antioxidant is used, a colored layer as designed may not be formed.
 本発明は、上記の知見に基づいてなされたものであり、高輝度な着色層を形成可能で、かつ、線幅の変化が抑制された感光性着色樹脂組成物、当該感光性着色樹脂組成物を用いて形成された高輝度なカラーフィルタ、及び、当該カラーフィルタを用いた表示特性に優れた表示装置を提供することを目的とする。 The present invention has been made on the basis of the above knowledge, and can form a high-brightness colored layer, and a photosensitive colored resin composition in which a change in line width is suppressed, and the photosensitive colored resin composition. It is an object of the present invention to provide a high-luminance color filter formed using the above and a display device having excellent display characteristics using the color filter.
 本発明に係る感光性着色樹脂組成物は、色材と、光重合性化合物と、開始剤と、潜在性酸化防止剤と、溶剤とを含有し、前記色材が、染料及びレーキ色材より選択される1種以上を含み、前記潜在性酸化防止剤が下記一般式(1)で表される化合物を含むことを特徴とする。 The photosensitive colored resin composition according to the present invention contains a coloring material, a photopolymerizable compound, an initiator, a latent antioxidant, and a solvent, and the coloring material is composed of a dye and a lake coloring material. 1 or more types selected, The said latent antioxidant contains the compound represented by following General formula (1), It is characterized by the above-mentioned.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003
(一般式(1)中の各符号は、後述のとおりである。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003
(Each symbol in the general formula (1) is as described later.)
 本発明に係るカラーフィルタは、基板と、当該基板上に設けられた着色層とを少なくとも備えるカラーフィルタであって、当該着色層の少なくとも1つが前記本発明に係る感光性着色樹脂組成物の硬化物であることを特徴とする。
 本発明に係るカラーフィルタの製造方法は、基板と、当該基板上に設けられた着色層とを少なくとも備えるカラーフィルタの製造方法であって、
 当該着色層の少なくとも1つを、前記本発明に係る感光性着色樹脂組成物を用いて形成する工程を有することを特徴とする。
The color filter according to the present invention is a color filter including at least a substrate and a colored layer provided on the substrate, and at least one of the colored layers is a cured cured photosensitive colored resin composition according to the present invention. It is a thing.
A method for producing a color filter according to the present invention is a method for producing a color filter comprising at least a substrate and a colored layer provided on the substrate,
It has the process of forming at least 1 of the said colored layer using the photosensitive colored resin composition which concerns on the said this invention, It is characterized by the above-mentioned.
 また、本発明に係る表示装置は、前記本発明に係るカラーフィルタを有することを特徴とする。 The display device according to the present invention includes the color filter according to the present invention.
 本発明によれば、高輝度な着色層を形成可能で、かつ、線幅の変化が抑制された感光性着色樹脂組成物、当該感光性着色樹脂組成物を用いて形成された高輝度なカラーフィルタ、及び、当該カラーフィルタを用いた表示特性に優れた表示装置を提供することができる。 According to the present invention, a photosensitive colored resin composition capable of forming a high-luminance colored layer and suppressing a change in line width, and a high-luminance color formed using the photosensitive colored resin composition A filter and a display device having excellent display characteristics using the color filter can be provided.
図1は、本発明のカラーフィルタの一例を示す概略断面図である。FIG. 1 is a schematic sectional view showing an example of the color filter of the present invention. 図2は、本発明の表示装置の一例を示す概略断面図である。FIG. 2 is a schematic sectional view showing an example of the display device of the present invention. 図3は、本発明の表示装置の他の一例を示す概略断面図である。FIG. 3 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing another example of the display device of the present invention.
 以下、本発明に係る感光性着色樹脂組成物、カラーフィルタ、及び表示装置について順に説明する。
 なお、本発明において光には、可視及び非可視領域の波長の電磁波、さらには放射線が含まれ、放射線には、例えばマイクロ波、電子線が含まれる。具体的には、波長5μm以下の電磁波、及び電子線のことを言う。
 本発明において(メタ)アクリルとは、アクリル及びメタクリルの各々を表し、(メタ)アクリレートとは、アクリレート及びメタクリレートの各々を表す。
 本発明において有機基とは、炭素原子を1個以上有する基をいう。
 また、本発明において固形分とは、樹脂組成物を構成する溶剤以外の全ての成分をいい、例えば、液状のモノマーであっても当該固形分に含まれるものとする。
Hereinafter, the photosensitive colored resin composition, the color filter, and the display device according to the present invention will be described in order.
In the present invention, light includes electromagnetic waves having wavelengths in the visible and invisible regions, and further includes radiation, and the radiation includes, for example, microwaves and electron beams. Specifically, it means an electromagnetic wave having a wavelength of 5 μm or less and an electron beam.
In the present invention, (meth) acryl represents each of acryl and methacryl, and (meth) acrylate represents each of acrylate and methacrylate.
In the present invention, the organic group means a group having one or more carbon atoms.
Moreover, in this invention, solid content means all components other than the solvent which comprises a resin composition, for example, even if it is a liquid monomer, it shall be contained in the said solid content.
1.感光性着色樹脂組成物
 本発明に係る感光性着色樹脂組成物は、色材と、光重合性化合物と、開始剤と、潜在性酸化防止剤と、溶剤とを含有し、前記色材が、染料及びレーキ色材より選択される1種以上を含み、前記潜在性酸化防止剤が下記一般式(1)で表される化合物を含むことを特徴とする。
1. Photosensitive Colored Resin Composition The photosensitive colored resin composition according to the present invention contains a color material, a photopolymerizable compound, an initiator, a latent antioxidant, and a solvent, and the color material is 1 or more types selected from dye and lake color material, The said latent antioxidant contains the compound represented by following General formula (1), It is characterized by the above-mentioned.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
(一般式(1)中、環Aは、五員環又は六員環の炭化水素環又は複素環であり、
 Rは、それぞれ独立に、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、水酸基、ニトロ基、カルボキシ基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素原子数1~40のアルキル基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素原子数6~20のアリール基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素原子数7~20のアリールアルキル基、又は置換基を有していてもよい炭素原子数2~20の複素環含有基であるか、又は、複数のR同士が結合してベンゼン環若しくはナフタレン環を形成し、
 Rは、炭素原子数1~20のアルキル基、炭素原子数2~20のアルケニル基、炭素原子数6~20のアリール基、炭素原子数7~20のアリールアルキル基、炭素原子数2~20の複素環含有基、又はトリアルキルシリル基であり、
 R及びRが有するアルキル基中に、炭素-炭素二重結合、-O-、-S-、-C(=O)-、-O-C(=O)-、-C(=O)-O-、-O-C(=O)-O-、-S-C(=O)-、-C(=O)-S-、-S-C(=O)-O-、-O-C(=O)-S-、-C(=O)-NH-、-NH-C(=O)-、-NH-C(=O)-O-、-NR’-、-S-S-又は-SO-を有してもよく、R’は、水素原子又は炭素原子数1~8のアルキル基であり、複数あるR及びRはそれぞれ同一であっても異なっていてもよい。
 Xは、a価の基であって、直接結合、窒素原子、酸素原子、硫黄原子、リン原子、(-O)P=O、>C=O、>NR、-OR、-SR、-N(R)(R)、置換基を有していてもよい炭素原子数1~120の脂肪族炭化水素基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素原子数6~35の芳香環含有炭化水素基、又は、置換基を有していてもよい炭素原子数2~35の複素環含有基であり、R及びRは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素原子数1~35の脂肪族炭化水素基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素原子数6~35の芳香環含有炭化水素基、又は置換基を有していてもよい炭素原子数2~35の複素環含有基である。Xにおける前記脂肪族炭化水素基、及び前記芳香環含有炭化水素基中に、炭素-炭素二重結合、-O-、-S-、-C(=O)-、-O-C(=O)-、-C(=O)-O-、-O-C(=O)-O-、-S-C(=O)-、-C(=O)-S-、-S-C(=O)-O-、-O-C(=O)-S-、-C(=O)-NH-、-NH-C(=O)-、-NH-C(=O)-O-、-NR’-、-S-S-、-SO-又は窒素原子を有してもよい。
 aは、1~10の整数を表し、bは、1~4の整数を表し、cは、1~3の整数を表す。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
(In general formula (1), ring A is a 5-membered or 6-membered hydrocarbon ring or heterocyclic ring,
R 1 each independently has a halogen atom, a cyano group, a hydroxyl group, a nitro group, a carboxy group, an alkyl group having 1 to 40 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or a substituent. An aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, an arylalkyl group having 7 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or a heterocyclic ring having 2 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent Or a plurality of R 1 are bonded to each other to form a benzene ring or a naphthalene ring,
R 2 is an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, an arylalkyl group having 7 to 20 carbon atoms, or 2 to 2 carbon atoms. 20 heterocycle-containing groups, or trialkylsilyl groups,
In the alkyl group of R 1 and R 2 , a carbon-carbon double bond, —O—, —S—, —C (═O) —, —O—C (═O) —, —C (═O ) —O—, —O—C (═O) —O—, —S—C (═O) —, —C (═O) —S—, —S—C (═O) —O—, — OC (═O) —S—, —C (═O) —NH—, —NH—C (═O) —, —NH—C (═O) —O—, —NR′—, —S -S- or -SO 2 -may be present, R 'is a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, and a plurality of R 1 and R 2 may be the same or different. May be.
X is an a-valent group, and is a direct bond, nitrogen atom, oxygen atom, sulfur atom, phosphorus atom, (—O) 3 P═O,>C═O,> NR 3 , —OR 3 , —SR 3 , —N (R 3 ) (R 4 ), an optionally substituted aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 120 carbon atoms, and optionally having 6 to 35 carbon atoms An aromatic ring-containing hydrocarbon group or a heterocyclic group having 2 to 35 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, and R 3 and R 4 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent. An aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 35 carbon atoms that may have, an aromatic ring-containing hydrocarbon group having 6 to 35 carbon atoms that may have a substituent, or a substituent. It is also a heterocyclic group having 2 to 35 carbon atoms. In the aliphatic hydrocarbon group and the aromatic ring-containing hydrocarbon group in X, a carbon-carbon double bond, —O—, —S—, —C (═O) —, —O—C (═O ) —, —C (═O) —O—, —O—C (═O) —O—, —S—C (═O) —, —C (═O) —S—, —S—C ( ═O) —O—, —O—C (═O) —S—, —C (═O) —NH—, —NH—C (═O) —, —NH—C (═O) —O— , -NR'-, -SS-, -SO 2-, or a nitrogen atom.
a represents an integer of 1 to 10, b represents an integer of 1 to 4, and c represents an integer of 1 to 3. )
 上記本発明に係る感光性着色樹脂組成物は、高輝度な着色層を形成可能で、かつ、現像時において線幅の変化が抑制されるという効果を有する。 The photosensitive colored resin composition according to the present invention has an effect that a high-luminance colored layer can be formed and a change in line width is suppressed during development.
 本発明の構成により上記の効果が得られる作用については未解明な部分もあるが以下のように推定される。
 従来より、耐熱性や耐光性を改善する手法として、感光性樹脂組成物に酸化防止剤を添加することが検討されている。一般的に酸化防止剤は、加熱時や露光時に発生したラジカル等を失活させることにより、色材等の酸化を抑制することが可能となる。しかしながら、本発明者らは、酸化防止剤を含有する着色感光性樹脂組成物の塗膜を所定のマスクパターンを介して露光し、その後、現像処理することにより、パターニングされた着色層とする場合、従来の酸化防止剤を有しない感光性着色樹脂組成物を用いた場合よりも線幅が細るとの知見を得た。原因として、酸化防止剤は、露光時に開始剤から発生するラジカルをも失活させるため、酸化防止剤を用いることにより光重合反応が十分に進まず、感度が不足することが推測された。
 マスクパターンを変更せずに、設計通りの細線パターンを得るために、例えば、開始剤を多量に加えることが考えられた。しかしながら、このような手法では、相対的に色材の含有割合を下げることとなり、所望の色度を達成できない問題があった。
 本発明の感光性着色樹脂組成物は、一般式(1)で表される潜在性酸化防止剤を含有する。当該潜在性酸化防止剤は、酸化防止効果を発現するフェノール系水酸基が保護基により保護されている。当該潜在性酸化防止剤は、露光時においては酸化防止機能を持たないため、開始剤から発生したラジカルを失活せず、感度の低下を抑制し、線幅の細りを抑制する。一方、露光後に行われる加熱工程においては、前記保護基が脱離して酸化防止効果が発現するため、色材等の退色が抑制されて、高輝度な着色層が得られる。
Although there is an unclear part about the effect | action which said effect is acquired by the structure of this invention, it estimates as follows.
Conventionally, addition of an antioxidant to a photosensitive resin composition has been studied as a method for improving heat resistance and light resistance. In general, an antioxidant can suppress oxidation of a coloring material or the like by deactivating radicals generated during heating or exposure. However, the present inventors have exposed a coated film of a colored photosensitive resin composition containing an antioxidant through a predetermined mask pattern and then developed it to form a patterned colored layer. The present inventors have found that the line width is narrower than in the case where a photosensitive colored resin composition having no conventional antioxidant is used. As a cause, since the antioxidant also deactivates radicals generated from the initiator at the time of exposure, it was speculated that by using the antioxidant, the photopolymerization reaction does not sufficiently proceed and the sensitivity is insufficient.
In order to obtain a designed fine line pattern without changing the mask pattern, for example, it was considered to add a large amount of an initiator. However, such a method has a problem that the content ratio of the coloring material is relatively lowered, and a desired chromaticity cannot be achieved.
The photosensitive coloring resin composition of this invention contains the latent antioxidant represented by General formula (1). In the latent antioxidant, a phenolic hydroxyl group that exhibits an antioxidant effect is protected by a protecting group. Since the latent antioxidant does not have an antioxidant function at the time of exposure, it does not deactivate radicals generated from the initiator, suppresses a decrease in sensitivity, and suppresses a reduction in line width. On the other hand, in the heating step performed after exposure, the protective group is eliminated and an antioxidant effect is exhibited, so that fading of a color material or the like is suppressed and a high-luminance colored layer is obtained.
 本発明の感光性着色樹脂組成物は、少なくとも、色材と、光重合性化合物と、開始剤と、潜在性酸化防止剤と、溶剤とを含有するものであり、本発明の効果を損なわない限り、必要に応じて更にその他の成分を含有してもよいものである。
 以下、このような本発明のカラーフィルタ用着色樹脂組成物の各成分について順に詳細に説明する。
The photosensitive colored resin composition of the present invention contains at least a colorant, a photopolymerizable compound, an initiator, a latent antioxidant, and a solvent, and does not impair the effects of the present invention. As long as it is necessary, it may further contain other components.
Hereinafter, each component of the colored resin composition for a color filter of the present invention will be described in detail in order.
[潜在性酸化防止剤]
 本発明において潜在性酸化防止剤とは、加熱により脱離可能な保護基を有する化合物であって、当該保護基が脱離することにより、酸化防止機能を発現する化合物である。中でも150℃以上で加熱することにより、保護基が脱離しやすくなるものが好ましい。
[Latent antioxidants]
In the present invention, the latent antioxidant is a compound having a protecting group that can be removed by heating, and exhibiting an antioxidant function when the protecting group is eliminated. Among them, those which are easy to remove the protecting group by heating at 150 ° C. or higher are preferable.
 本発明においては、このような潜在性酸化防止剤として、下記一般式(1)で表される化合物が用いられる。 In the present invention, a compound represented by the following general formula (1) is used as such a latent antioxidant.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
(一般式(1)中の各符号は、前述のとおりである。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
(Each symbol in the general formula (1) is as described above.)
 上記一般式(1)で表される潜在性酸化防止剤は、Xで表されるa価の特定の原子又は基に、a個の特定の基が結合した構造を有する。このa個の基は、互いに同じであっても異なっていてもよい。aの値は1~10であり、合成の容易さの点から、好ましくは2~6である。 The latent antioxidant represented by the general formula (1) has a structure in which a specific group is bonded to a specific atom or group having a valence represented by X. The a groups may be the same as or different from each other. The value of a is 1 to 10, and preferably 2 to 6 from the viewpoint of ease of synthesis.
 上記一般式(1)における環Aは、五員環又は六員環の炭化水素環又は複素環である。
 五員環の炭化水素環としては、シクロペンタン環、シクロペンテン環等の脂環や、シクロペンタジエン、フェロセン等の芳香環が挙げられる。
 五員環の複素環としては、フラン、チオフェン、ピロール、ピロリジン、ピラゾリジン、ピラゾール、イミダゾール、イミダゾリジン、オキサゾール、イソキサゾール、イソオキサゾリジン、チアゾール、イソチアゾール、イソチアゾリジン等が挙げられる。
 六員環の炭化水素環としては、シクロヘキサン環、シクロヘキセン環、シクロヘキサジエン環等の六員環の脂環や、ベンゼン、ナフタレン、アントラセン、フルオレン、ペリレン、ピレン等の六員環の芳香環が挙げられる。
 六員環の複素環としては、ピペリジン、ピペラジン、モルフォリン、チオモルフォリン、ピリジン、ピラジン、ピリミジン、ピリダジン、トリアジン等が挙げられる。
 これらの環は、他の環と縮合されていたり置換されていたりしていてもよく、例えば、キノリン、イソキノリン、インドール、ユロリジン、ベンゾオキサゾール、ベンゾトリアゾール、アズレン等を構成していてもよい。
 本発明において環Aは、高輝度な着色層を形成可能で、かつ、線幅の変化が抑制された感光性着色樹脂組成物が得られる点から、中でも、六員環の芳香環又は複素環であることが好ましく、六員環の芳香環がより好ましく、ベンゼン、ナフタレン、アントラセン、ピレンより選択される芳香環であることが更により好ましい。
Ring A in the general formula (1) is a 5-membered or 6-membered hydrocarbon ring or heterocyclic ring.
Examples of the 5-membered hydrocarbon ring include alicyclic rings such as cyclopentane ring and cyclopentene ring, and aromatic rings such as cyclopentadiene and ferrocene.
Examples of the 5-membered heterocyclic ring include furan, thiophene, pyrrole, pyrrolidine, pyrazolidine, pyrazole, imidazole, imidazolidine, oxazole, isoxazole, isoxazolidine, thiazole, isothiazole, isothiazolidine and the like.
Examples of the six-membered hydrocarbon ring include six-membered alicyclic rings such as cyclohexane, cyclohexene and cyclohexadiene, and six-membered aromatic rings such as benzene, naphthalene, anthracene, fluorene, perylene and pyrene. It is done.
Examples of the six-membered heterocyclic ring include piperidine, piperazine, morpholine, thiomorpholine, pyridine, pyrazine, pyrimidine, pyridazine, and triazine.
These rings may be condensed or substituted with other rings, and may constitute, for example, quinoline, isoquinoline, indole, urolidine, benzoxazole, benzotriazole, azulene and the like.
In the present invention, ring A is a 6-membered aromatic ring or heterocyclic ring from the viewpoint of obtaining a photosensitive colored resin composition capable of forming a high-luminance colored layer and suppressing a change in line width. It is preferably a 6-membered aromatic ring, and more preferably an aromatic ring selected from benzene, naphthalene, anthracene, and pyrene.
 上記一般式(1)におけるRのうち、ハロゲン原子としては、例えば、フッ素、塩素、臭素、ヨウ素が挙げられる。 Of R 1 in the general formula (1), examples of the halogen atom include fluorine, chlorine, bromine, and iodine.
 Rのうち、置換基を有していてもよい炭素原子数1~40のアルキル基としては、例えば、メチル、エチル、プロピル、iso-プロピル、ブチル、sec-ブチル、tert-ブチル、iso-ブチル、アミル、iso-アミル、tert-アミル、シクロペンチル、ヘキシル、2-ヘキシル、3-ヘキシル、シクロヘキシル、4-メチルシクロヘキシル、ヘプチル、2-ヘプチル、3-ヘプチル、iso-ヘプチル、tert-ヘプチル、1-オクチル、iso-オクチル、tert-オクチル、ノニル、イソノニル、デシル、ウンデシル、ドデシル、トリデシル、イソトリデシル、テトラデシル、ペンタデシル、ヘキサデシル、へプタデシル、オクタデシル、アダマンチル、1-アダマンチル、2-アダマンチル、2-メチル-1-アダマンチル、2-メチル-2-アダマンチル、2-エチル-1-アダマンチル、2-エチル-2-アダマンチル、2-ノルボルニル、2-ノルボルニルメチル等が挙げられる。 Among R 1, the optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 40 carbon atoms is, for example, methyl, ethyl, propyl, iso-propyl, butyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, iso- Butyl, amyl, iso-amyl, tert-amyl, cyclopentyl, hexyl, 2-hexyl, 3-hexyl, cyclohexyl, 4-methylcyclohexyl, heptyl, 2-heptyl, 3-heptyl, iso-heptyl, tert-heptyl, 1 -Octyl, iso-octyl, tert-octyl, nonyl, isononyl, decyl, undecyl, dodecyl, tridecyl, isotridecyl, tetradecyl, pentadecyl, hexadecyl, heptadecyl, octadecyl, adamantyl, 1-adamantyl, 2-adamantyl, 2-methyl- 1- Examples thereof include adamantyl, 2-methyl-2-adamantyl, 2-ethyl-1-adamantyl, 2-ethyl-2-adamantyl, 2-norbornyl, 2-norbornylmethyl and the like.
 Rのうち、炭素原子数6~20のアリール基としては、例えば、フェニル、ナフチル、アントラセニル、2-メチルフェニル、3-メチルフェニル、4-メチルフェニル、4-ビニルフェニル、3-iso-プロピルフェニル、4-iso-プロピルフェニル、4-ブチルフェニル、4-iso-ブチルフェニル、4-tert-ブチルフェニル、4-ヘキシルフェニル、4-シクロヘキシルフェニル、4-オクチルフェニル、4-(2-エチルヘキシル)フェニル、4-ステアリルフェニル、2,3-ジメチルフェニル、2,4-ジメチルフェニル、2,5-ジメチルフェニル、2,6-ジメチルフェニル、3,4-ジメチルフェニル、3,5-ジメチルフェニル、2,4-ジ-tert-ブチルフェニル、2,5-ジ-tert-ブチルフェニル、2,6-ジ-tert-ブチルフェニル、2,4-ジ-tert-ペンチルフェニル、2,5-ジ-tert-アミルフェニル、2,5-ジ-tert-オクチルフェニル、2,4-ジクミルフェニル、4-シクロヘキシルフェニル、(1,1’-ビフェニル)-4-イル、2,4,5-トリメチルフェニル、フェロセニル等が挙げられる。 Examples of the aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms in R 1 include phenyl, naphthyl, anthracenyl, 2-methylphenyl, 3-methylphenyl, 4-methylphenyl, 4-vinylphenyl, and 3-iso-propyl. Phenyl, 4-iso-propylphenyl, 4-butylphenyl, 4-iso-butylphenyl, 4-tert-butylphenyl, 4-hexylphenyl, 4-cyclohexylphenyl, 4-octylphenyl, 4- (2-ethylhexyl) Phenyl, 4-stearylphenyl, 2,3-dimethylphenyl, 2,4-dimethylphenyl, 2,5-dimethylphenyl, 2,6-dimethylphenyl, 3,4-dimethylphenyl, 3,5-dimethylphenyl, 2 , 4-Di-tert-butylphenyl, 2,5-di-tert-butyl Ruphenyl, 2,6-di-tert-butylphenyl, 2,4-di-tert-pentylphenyl, 2,5-di-tert-amylphenyl, 2,5-di-tert-octylphenyl, 2,4- Examples include dicumylphenyl, 4-cyclohexylphenyl, (1,1′-biphenyl) -4-yl, 2,4,5-trimethylphenyl, and ferrocenyl.
 Rのうち、炭素原子数2~20の複素環含有基としては、例えば、ピリジル、ピリミジル、ピリダジル、ピペリジル、ピラニル、ピラゾリル、トリアジル、ピロリル、キノリル、イソキノリル、イミダゾリル、ベンゾイミダゾリル、トリアゾリル、フリル、フラニル、ベンゾフラニル、チエニル、チオフェニル、ベンゾチオフェニル、チアジアゾリル、チアゾリル、ベンゾチアゾリル、オキサゾリル、ベンゾオキサゾリル、イソチアゾリル、イソオキサゾリル、インドリル、2-ピロリジノン-1-イル、2-ピペリドン-1-イル、2,4-ジオキシイミダゾリジン-3-イル、2,4-ジオキシオキサゾリジン-3-イル等が挙げられる。 Examples of the heterocyclic group containing 2 to 20 carbon atoms in R 1 include pyridyl, pyrimidyl, pyridazyl, piperidyl, pyranyl, pyrazolyl, triazyl, pyrrolyl, quinolyl, isoquinolyl, imidazolyl, benzimidazolyl, triazolyl, furyl, and furanyl. , Benzofuranyl, thienyl, thiophenyl, benzothiophenyl, thiadiazolyl, thiazolyl, benzothiazolyl, oxazolyl, benzoxazolyl, isothiazolyl, isoxazolyl, indolyl, 2-pyrrolidinon-1-yl, 2-piperidone-1-yl, 2,4- Examples include dioxyimidazolidin-3-yl and 2,4-dioxyoxazolidine-3-yl.
 また、Rのうち、アルキル基、アリール基、複素環含有基の水素原子を置換する置換基としては、ビニル、アリル、アクリル、メタクリル等のエチレン性不飽和基;フッ素、塩素、臭素、ヨウ素等のハロゲン原子;アセチル、2-クロロアセチル、プロピオニル、オクタノイル、アクリロイル、メタクリロイル、フェニルカルボニル(ベンゾイル)、フタロイル、4-トリフルオロメチルベンゾイル、ピバロイル、サリチロイル、オキザロイル、ステアロイル、メトキシカルボニル、エトキシカルボニル、t-ブトキシカルボニル、n-オクタデシルオキシカルボニル、カルバモイル等のアシル基;アセチルオキシ、ベンゾイルオキシ等のアシルオキシ基;アミノ、エチルアミノ、ジメチルアミノ、ジエチルアミノ、ブチルアミノ、シクロペンチルアミノ、2-エチルヘキシルアミノ、ドデシルアミノ、アニリノ、クロロフェニルアミノ、トルイジノ、アニシジノ、N-メチル-アニリノ、ジフェニルアミノ、ナフチルアミノ、2-ピリジルアミノ、メトキシカルボニルアミノ、フェノキシカルボニルアミノ、アセチルアミノ、ベンゾイルアミノ、ホルミルアミノ、ピバロイルアミノ、ラウロイルアミノ、カルバモイルアミノ、N,N-ジメチルアミノカルボニルアミノ、N,N-ジエチルアミノカルボニルアミノ、モルホリノカルボニルアミノ、メトキシカルボニルアミノ、エトキシカルボニルアミノ、t-ブトキシカルボニルアミノ、n-オクタデシルオキシカルボニルアミノ、N-メチル-メトキシカルボニルアミノ、フェノキシカルボニルアミノ、スルファモイルアミノ、N,N-ジメチルアミノスルホニルアミノ、メチルスルホニルアミノ、ブチルスルホニルアミノ、フェニルスルホニルアミノ等の置換アミノ基;スルホンアミド基、スルホニル基、カルボキシ基、シアノ基、スルホ基、水酸基、ニトロ基、メルカプト基、イミド基、カルバモイル基、スルホンアミド基、ホスホン酸基、リン酸基又はカルボキシ基、スルホ基、ホスホン酸基、リン酸基の塩等が挙げられる。 In R 1 , the substituent for substituting the hydrogen atom of the alkyl group, aryl group, or heterocyclic group includes ethylenically unsaturated groups such as vinyl, allyl, acrylic, and methacryl; fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine Halogen atoms such as acetyl, 2-chloroacetyl, propionyl, octanoyl, acryloyl, methacryloyl, phenylcarbonyl (benzoyl), phthaloyl, 4-trifluoromethylbenzoyl, pivaloyl, salicyloyl, oxaloyl, stearoyl, methoxycarbonyl, ethoxycarbonyl, t -Acyl groups such as butoxycarbonyl, n-octadecyloxycarbonyl, carbamoyl; acyloxy groups such as acetyloxy, benzoyloxy; amino, ethylamino, dimethylamino, diethylamino, butylamino, cyclo Pentylamino, 2-ethylhexylamino, dodecylamino, anilino, chlorophenylamino, toluidino, anisidino, N-methyl-anilino, diphenylamino, naphthylamino, 2-pyridylamino, methoxycarbonylamino, phenoxycarbonylamino, acetylamino, benzoylamino, Formylamino, pivaloylamino, lauroylamino, carbamoylamino, N, N-dimethylaminocarbonylamino, N, N-diethylaminocarbonylamino, morpholinocarbonylamino, methoxycarbonylamino, ethoxycarbonylamino, t-butoxycarbonylamino, n-octadecyloxy Carbonylamino, N-methyl-methoxycarbonylamino, phenoxycarbonylamino, sulfamoylamino Substituted amino groups such as N, N-dimethylaminosulfonylamino, methylsulfonylamino, butylsulfonylamino, phenylsulfonylamino; sulfonamide group, sulfonyl group, carboxy group, cyano group, sulfo group, hydroxyl group, nitro group, mercapto group, Examples thereof include imide groups, carbamoyl groups, sulfonamido groups, phosphonic acid groups, phosphoric acid groups or carboxy groups, sulfo groups, phosphonic acid groups, and salts of phosphoric acid groups.
 上記一般式(1)におけるRのうち、炭素原子数1~20のアルキル基としては、上記Rで例示されたアルキル基のうち、炭素原子数が1~20であるアルキル基が挙げられる。
 Rのうち、炭素原子数2~20のアルケニル基としては、ビニル、1-メチルエテン-1-イル、プロペン-1-イル、プロペン-2-イル、プロペン-3-イル、ブテン-1-イル、ブテン-2-イル、2-メチルプロペン-3-イル、1,1-ジメチルエテン-2-イル、1,1-ジメチルプロペン-3-イル、3-ブテニル、1-メチル-3-ブテニル、イソブテニル、3-ペンテニル、4-ヘキセニル、シクロヘキセニル、ビシクロヘキセニル、ヘプテニル、オクテニル、デセニル、ペンタデセニル、エイコセニル、トリコセニ等が挙げられる。
 Rのうち、炭素原子数6~20のアリール基、炭素原子数7~20のアリールアルキル基、炭素原子数2~20の複素環含有基としては、Rで例示されたものと同様のものが挙げられる。
 また、Rのうち、トリアルキルシリル基としては、トリメチルシラン、トリエチルシラン、エチルジメチルシラン等が挙げられる。
Among R 2 in the general formula (1), examples of the alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms include alkyl groups having 1 to 20 carbon atoms among the alkyl groups exemplified for R 1 above. .
Among R 2 , an alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms includes vinyl, 1-methylethen-1-yl, propen-1-yl, propen-2-yl, propen-3-yl, and buten-1-yl. Buten-2-yl, 2-methylpropen-3-yl, 1,1-dimethylethen-2-yl, 1,1-dimethylpropen-3-yl, 3-butenyl, 1-methyl-3-butenyl, Examples include isobutenyl, 3-pentenyl, 4-hexenyl, cyclohexenyl, bicyclohexenyl, heptenyl, octenyl, decenyl, pentadecenyl, eicosenyl, tricoseni and the like.
Among R 2 , the aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, the arylalkyl group having 7 to 20 carbon atoms, and the heterocyclic-containing group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms are the same as those exemplified for R 1 . Things.
In R 2 , examples of the trialkylsilyl group include trimethylsilane, triethylsilane, and ethyldimethylsilane.
 更に前記R及びRがアルキル基を有する場合、当該アルキル鎖中に、炭素-炭素二重結合、-O-、-S-、-C(=O)-、-O-C(=O)-、-C(=O)-O-、-O-C(=O)-O-、-S-C(=O)-、-C(=O)-S-、-S-C(=O)-O-、-O-C(=O)-S-、-C(=O)-NH-、-NH-C(=O)-、-NH-C(=O)-O-、-NR’-、-S-S-又は-SO-を有してもよい。
 上記-NR’-基のR’は、炭素原子数1~8のアルキル基であり、具体的には、上記Rで例示されたアルキル基のうち、炭素原子数が1~8であるアルキル基が挙げられる。
 なお、アルキル鎖中に上記の構造を含む場合、酸素原子同士が連結した構造(-O-O-)を有しないことが好ましい。
Further, when R 1 and R 2 have an alkyl group, the alkyl chain includes a carbon-carbon double bond, —O—, —S—, —C (═O) —, —O—C (═O ) —, —C (═O) —O—, —O—C (═O) —O—, —S—C (═O) —, —C (═O) —S—, —S—C ( ═O) —O—, —O—C (═O) —S—, —C (═O) —NH—, —NH—C (═O) —, —NH—C (═O) —O— , —NR′—, —SS— or —SO 2 —.
R ′ of the —NR′— group is an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, and specifically, an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms among the alkyl groups exemplified as R 1 above. Groups.
Note that in the case where the alkyl chain includes the above structure, the alkyl chain preferably does not have a structure in which oxygen atoms are connected (—O—O—).
 本発明においてRは、合成容易な点からは、炭素原子数1~8のアルキル基、又は、炭素原子数6~12のアリール基が好ましい。また、Rは、潜在性酸化防止剤としての耐熱性や耐光性に優れる点からは、中でも、炭素原子数4以上の置換基であることが好ましい。炭素原子数4以上の置換基の具体例としては、t-ブチル基、t-ペンチル基、t-ヘキシル基等の3級アルキル基;sec-ブチル基、sec-ペンチル基等の2級アルキル基;i-ブチル基、i-ペンチル基等の分枝1級アルキル基;シクロヘキシル基、シクロペンチル基等のシクロアルキル基等が挙げられ、ラジカルとの反応性の点から、3級アルキル基がより好ましく、t-ブチル基が特に好ましい。 In the present invention, R 1 is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms or an aryl group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms from the viewpoint of easy synthesis. R 1 is preferably a substituent having 4 or more carbon atoms from the viewpoint of excellent heat resistance and light resistance as a latent antioxidant. Specific examples of the substituent having 4 or more carbon atoms include tertiary alkyl groups such as t-butyl, t-pentyl and t-hexyl; secondary alkyl groups such as sec-butyl and sec-pentyl. A branched primary alkyl group such as an i-butyl group and an i-pentyl group; a cycloalkyl group such as a cyclohexyl group and a cyclopentyl group; The t-butyl group is particularly preferred.
 また、本発明においてRは、炭素原子数2~8のアルキル基の酸素原子側の末端に-C(=O)-O-が結合しているものが、潜在性添加剤として効率的に機能を発現するので好ましい。即ち、一般式(1)における置換基-ORは、-O-C(=O)-O-R”(R”は炭素原子数1~7のアルキル基)であることが好ましい。 In the present invention, R 2 is an alkyl group having 2 to 8 carbon atoms in which —C (═O) —O— is bonded to the terminal on the oxygen atom side efficiently as a latent additive. It is preferable because it exhibits a function. That is, the substituent —OR 2 in the general formula (1) is preferably —O—C (═O) —O—R ″ (R ″ is an alkyl group having 1 to 7 carbon atoms).
 上記一般式(1)におけるXで表される、置換基を有してもよい炭素原子数1~120のa価の脂肪族炭化水素基の構造は特に限定されない。当該脂肪族炭化水素基は、直鎖、分岐鎖、環状(脂環式炭化水素)及びこれらの組み合わせのいずれであっても良い。また、当該脂肪族炭化水素基は、当該脂肪族炭化水素基中に、炭素-炭素二重結合、-O-、-S-、-C(=O)-、-O-C(=O)-、-C(=O)-O-、-O-C(=O)-O-、-S-C(=O)-、-C(=O)-S-、-S-C(=O)-O-、-O-C(=O)-S-、-C(=O)-NH-、-NH-C(=O)-、-NH-C(=O)-O-、-NR’-、-S-S-、-SO-又は窒素原子を有してもよい。例えば、1価の脂肪族炭化水素基としては、メチル、エチル、プロピル、イソプロピル、シクロプロピル、ブチル、第二ブチル、第三ブチル、イソブチル、アミル、イソアミル、第三アミル、シクロペンチル、ヘキシル、2-ヘキシル、3-ヘキシル、シクロヘキシル、ビシクロヘキシル、1-メチルシクロヘキシル、ヘプチル、2-ヘプチル、3-ヘプチル、イソヘプチル、第三ヘプチル、n-オクチル、イソオクチル、第三オクチル、2-エチルヘキシル、ノニル、イソノニル、デシル等のアルキル基;メチルオキシ、エチルオキシ、プロピルオキシ、イソプロピルオキシ、ブチルオキシ、第二ブチルオキシ、第三ブチルオキシ、イソブチルオキシ、アミルオキシ、イソアミルオキシ、第三アミルオキシ、ヘキシルオキシ、シクロヘキシルオキシ、ヘプチルオキシ、イソヘプチルオキシ、第三ヘプチルオキシ、n-オクチルオキシ、イソオクチルオキシ、第三オクチルオキシ、2-エチルヘキシルオキシ、ノニルオキシ、デシルオキシ等のアルコキシ基;メチルチオ、エチルチオ、プロピルチオ、イソプロピルチオ、ブチルチオ、第二ブチルチオ、第三ブチルチオ、イソブチルチオ、アミルチオ、イソアミルチオ、第三アミルチオ、ヘキシルチオ、シクロヘキシルチオ、ヘプチルチオ、イソヘプチルチオ、第三ヘプチルチオ、n-オクチルチオ、イソオクチルチオ、第三オクチルチオ、2-エチルヘキシルチオ等のアルキルチオ基;ビニル、1-メチルエテニル、2-メチルエテニル、2-プロペニル、1-メチル-3-プロペニル、3-ブテニル、1-メチル-3-ブテニル、イソブテニル、3-ペンテニル、4-ヘキセニル、シクロヘキセニル、ビシクロヘキセニル、ヘプテニル、オクテニル、デセニル、ペンタデセニル、エイコセニル、トリコセニル等のアルケニル基又はこれらの基と下記置換基との組み合わせ等が挙げられ、2価以上の脂肪族炭化水素基は上記1価の脂肪族炭化水素基の水素原子の一部が外れた構造が挙げられる。 The structure of the a-valent aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 120 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, represented by X in the general formula (1) is not particularly limited. The aliphatic hydrocarbon group may be linear, branched, cyclic (alicyclic hydrocarbon), or a combination thereof. The aliphatic hydrocarbon group includes a carbon-carbon double bond, —O—, —S—, —C (═O) —, —O—C (═O) in the aliphatic hydrocarbon group. —, —C (═O) —O—, —O—C (═O) —O—, —S—C (═O) —, —C (═O) —S—, —S—C (= O) —O—, —O—C (═O) —S—, —C (═O) —NH—, —NH—C (═O) —, —NH—C (═O) —O—, It may have —NR′—, —SS—, —SO 2 — or a nitrogen atom. For example, monovalent aliphatic hydrocarbon groups include methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, cyclopropyl, butyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, isobutyl, amyl, isoamyl, tert-amyl, cyclopentyl, hexyl, 2- Hexyl, 3-hexyl, cyclohexyl, bicyclohexyl, 1-methylcyclohexyl, heptyl, 2-heptyl, 3-heptyl, isoheptyl, tertiary heptyl, n-octyl, isooctyl, tertiary octyl, 2-ethylhexyl, nonyl, isononyl, Alkyl groups such as decyl; methyloxy, ethyloxy, propyloxy, isopropyloxy, butyloxy, sec-butyloxy, tert-butyloxy, isobutyloxy, amyloxy, isoamyloxy, tert-amyloxy, hexyloxy, cyclohexyl Alkoxy groups such as oxy, heptyloxy, isoheptyloxy, tertiary heptyloxy, n-octyloxy, isooctyloxy, tertiary octyloxy, 2-ethylhexyloxy, nonyloxy, decyloxy; methylthio, ethylthio, propylthio, isopropylthio, Butylthio, sec-butylthio, tert-butylthio, isobutylthio, amylthio, isoamylthio, tert-amylthio, hexylthio, cyclohexylthio, heptylthio, isoheptylthio, tert-heptylthio, n-octylthio, isooctylthio, tert-octylthio, 2-ethylhexyl Alkylthio groups such as thio; vinyl, 1-methylethenyl, 2-methylethenyl, 2-propenyl, 1-methyl-3-propenyl, 3-butenyl, 1-methyl-3-butenyl Examples include alkenyl groups such as isobutenyl, 3-pentenyl, 4-hexenyl, cyclohexenyl, bicyclohexenyl, heptenyl, octenyl, decenyl, pentadecenyl, eicosenyl, and tricosenyl, and combinations of these groups with the following substituents. Examples of the aliphatic hydrocarbon group include a structure in which a part of hydrogen atoms of the monovalent aliphatic hydrocarbon group is removed.
 Xにおける置換基を有してもよい炭素原子数6~35のa価の芳香環含有炭化水素基の構造は特に限定されない。例えば、1価の芳香環含有炭化水素基としては、ベンジル、フェネチル、ジフェニルメチル、トリフェニルメチル、スチリル、シンナミル等のアリールアルキル基;フェニル、ナフチル等のアリール基;フェノキシ、ナフチルオキシ等のアリールオキシ基;フェニルチオ、ナフチルチオ等のアリールチオ基又はこれらの基と下記置換基との組み合わせ等が挙げられ2価以上の脂肪族炭化水素基は上記1価の芳香環含有炭化水素基の水素原子の一部が外れた構造が挙げられる。また、当該芳香環含有炭化水素基は、当該芳香環含有炭化水素基中に、炭素-炭素二重結合、-O-、-S-、-C(=O)-、-O-C(=O)-、-C(=O)-O-、-O-C(=O)-O-、-S-C(=O)-、-C(=O)-S-、-S-C(=O)-O-、-O-C(=O)-S-、-C(=O)-NH-、-NH-C(=O)-、-NH-C(=O)-O-、-NR’-、-S-S-、-SO-又は窒素原子を有してもよい。 The structure of the a-valent aromatic ring-containing hydrocarbon group having 6 to 35 carbon atoms which may have a substituent in X is not particularly limited. For example, monovalent aromatic ring-containing hydrocarbon groups include arylalkyl groups such as benzyl, phenethyl, diphenylmethyl, triphenylmethyl, styryl, and cinnamyl; aryl groups such as phenyl and naphthyl; aryloxy groups such as phenoxy and naphthyloxy Groups: arylthio groups such as phenylthio and naphthylthio, or combinations of these groups with the following substituents, and the like. The divalent or higher aliphatic hydrocarbon group is a part of the hydrogen atoms of the monovalent aromatic ring-containing hydrocarbon group. Is a structure that is off. In addition, the aromatic ring-containing hydrocarbon group includes a carbon-carbon double bond, —O—, —S—, —C (═O) —, —O—C (= O)-, -C (= O) -O-, -O-C (= O) -O-, -SC (= O)-, -C (= O) -S-, -SC (═O) —O—, —O—C (═O) —S—, —C (═O) —NH—, —NH—C (═O) —, —NH—C (═O) —O It may have —, —NR′—, —SS—, —SO 2 — or a nitrogen atom.
 Xにおける置換基を有してもよい炭素原子数2~35のa価の複素環含有基の構造は特に限定されない。例えば、1価の複素環含有基としては、ピリジル、ピリミジル、ピリダジル、ピペリジル、ピラニル、ピラゾリル、トリアジル、ピロリル、キノリル、イソキノリル、イミダゾリル、ベンゾイミダゾリル、トリアゾリル、フリル、フラニル、ベンゾフラニル、チエニル、チオフェニル、ベンゾチオフェニル、チアジアゾリル、チアゾリル、ベンゾチアゾリル、オキサゾリル、ベンゾオキサゾリル、イソチアゾリル、イソオキサゾリル、インドリル、2-ピロリジノン-1-イル、2-ピペリドン-1-イル、2,4-ジオキシイミダゾリジン-3-イル、2,4-ジオキシオキサゾリジン-3-イル、ベンゾトリアゾイル等又はこれらの基と下記置換基との組み合わせ等が挙げられ2価以上の複素環含有基は上記1価の複素環含有基の水素原子の一部が外れた構造が挙げられる。 The structure of the a-valent heterocyclic group having 2 to 35 carbon atoms which may have a substituent in X is not particularly limited. For example, monovalent heterocycle-containing groups include pyridyl, pyrimidyl, pyridazyl, piperidyl, pyranyl, pyrazolyl, triazyl, pyrrolyl, quinolyl, isoquinolyl, imidazolyl, benzimidazolyl, triazolyl, furyl, furanyl, benzofuranyl, thienyl, thiophenyl, benzothiol. Phenyl, thiadiazolyl, thiazolyl, benzothiazolyl, oxazolyl, benzoxazolyl, isothiazolyl, isoxazolyl, indolyl, 2-pyrrolidinon-1-yl, 2-piperidone-1-yl, 2,4-dioxyimidazolidin-3-yl, 2,4-dioxyoxazolidine-3-yl, benzotriazoyl and the like, or combinations of these groups with the following substituents, and the like. Examples of the bivalent or higher heterocyclic group include hydrogen of the above monovalent heterocyclic group. original It includes partially out structure is.
 Xが有していてもよい置換基としては、ビニル、アリル、アクリル、メタクリル等のエチレン性不飽和基;フッ素、塩素、臭素、ヨウ素等のハロゲン原子;アセチル、2-クロロアセチル、プロピオニル、オクタノイル、アクリロイル、メタクリロイル、フェニルカルボニル(ベンゾイル)、フタロイル、4-トリフルオロメチルベンゾイル、ピバロイル、サリチロイル、オキザロイル、ステアロイル、メトキシカルボニル、エトキシカルボニル、t-ブトキシカルボニル、n-オクタデシルオキシカルボニル、カルバモイル等のアシル基;アセチルオキシ、ベンゾイルオキシ等のアシルオキシ基;アミノ、エチルアミノ、ジメチルアミノ、ジエチルアミノ、ブチルアミノ、シクロペンチルアミノ、2-エチルヘキシルアミノ、ドデシルアミノ、アニリノ、クロロフェニルアミノ、トルイジノ、アニシジノ、N-メチル-アニリノ、ジフェニルアミノ、ナフチルアミノ、2-ピリジルアミノ、メトキシカルボニルアミノ、フェノキシカルボニルアミノ、アセチルアミノ、ベンゾイルアミノ、ホルミルアミノ、ピバロイルアミノ、ラウロイルアミノ、カルバモイルアミノ、N,N-ジメチルアミノカルボニルアミノ、N,N-ジエチルアミノカルボニルアミノ、モルホリノカルボニルアミノ、メトキシカルボニルアミノ、エトキシカルボニルアミノ、t-ブトキシカルボニルアミノ、n-オクタデシルオキシカルボニルアミノ、N-メチル-メトキシカルボニルアミノ、フェノキシカルボニルアミノ、スルファモイルアミノ、N,N-ジメチルアミノスルホニルアミノ、メチルスルホニルアミノ、ブチルスルホニルアミノ、フェニルスルホニルアミノ等の置換アミノ基;スルホンアミド基、スルホニル基、カルボキシ基、シアノ基、スルホ基、水酸基、ニトロ基、メルカプト基、イミド基、カルバモイル基、スルホンアミド基、ホスホン酸基、リン酸基又はカルボキシ基、スルホ基、ホスホン酸基、リン酸基の塩等が挙げられ、これらの基は更に置換されていてもよい。また、カルボキシ基及びスルホ基は塩を形成していてもよい。 Examples of the substituent that X may have include ethylenically unsaturated groups such as vinyl, allyl, acrylic and methacryl; halogen atoms such as fluorine, chlorine, bromine and iodine; acetyl, 2-chloroacetyl, propionyl and octanoyl Acyl groups such as acryloyl, methacryloyl, phenylcarbonyl (benzoyl), phthaloyl, 4-trifluoromethylbenzoyl, pivaloyl, salicyloyl, oxaloyl, stearoyl, methoxycarbonyl, ethoxycarbonyl, t-butoxycarbonyl, n-octadecyloxycarbonyl, carbamoyl Acyloxy groups such as acetyloxy and benzoyloxy; amino, ethylamino, dimethylamino, diethylamino, butylamino, cyclopentylamino, 2-ethylhexylamino, dodecylamine , Anilino, chlorophenylamino, toluidino, anisidino, N-methyl-anilino, diphenylamino, naphthylamino, 2-pyridylamino, methoxycarbonylamino, phenoxycarbonylamino, acetylamino, benzoylamino, formylamino, pivaloylamino, lauroylamino, carbamoyl Amino, N, N-dimethylaminocarbonylamino, N, N-diethylaminocarbonylamino, morpholinocarbonylamino, methoxycarbonylamino, ethoxycarbonylamino, t-butoxycarbonylamino, n-octadecyloxycarbonylamino, N-methyl-methoxycarbonyl Amino, phenoxycarbonylamino, sulfamoylamino, N, N-dimethylaminosulfonylamino, methylsulfur Substituted amino groups such as nylamino, butylsulfonylamino, phenylsulfonylamino; sulfonamide group, sulfonyl group, carboxy group, cyano group, sulfo group, hydroxyl group, nitro group, mercapto group, imide group, carbamoyl group, sulfonamide group, phosphone Examples thereof include an acid group, a phosphoric acid group or a carboxy group, a sulfo group, a phosphonic acid group, a salt of a phosphoric acid group, and the like, and these groups may be further substituted. Moreover, the carboxy group and the sulfo group may form a salt.
 また、Xのうち、>NR、-OR、-SR、-N(R)(R)、におけるR及びRにおいて、炭素原子数1~35の脂肪族炭化水素基、炭素原子数6~35の芳香環含有炭化水素基、及び炭素原子数2~35の複素環含有基としては、それぞれ、上記1価の脂肪族炭化水素基、上記1価の芳香環含有炭化水素基、上記1価の複素環含有基として例示されたもののうち、炭素原子数を満たすものが挙げられる。 Further, in X, R 3 and R 4 in> NR 3 , —OR 3 , —SR 3 , —N (R 3 ) (R 4 ), an aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 35 carbon atoms, Examples of the aromatic ring-containing hydrocarbon group having 6 to 35 carbon atoms and the heterocyclic ring-containing group having 2 to 35 carbon atoms include the monovalent aliphatic hydrocarbon group and the monovalent aromatic ring-containing hydrocarbon, respectively. Among those exemplified as the group and the monovalent heterocyclic ring-containing group, those satisfying the number of carbon atoms can be mentioned.
 本発明においては、一般式(1)で表される化合物の中でも、下記一般式(1A)~(1E)より選択される1種以上であることが、耐熱性に優れる点から好ましい。 In the present invention, among the compounds represented by the general formula (1), at least one selected from the following general formulas (1A) to (1E) is preferable from the viewpoint of excellent heat resistance.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
(一般式(1A)中、環A’は、六員環の脂環、芳香環又は複素環であり、R11、R12、R13、R14、及びR15は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子又は前記一般式(1)におけるRと同様の基であり、Rは前記一般式(1)におけるRと同様である。但し、R11、R12、R13、R14、及びR15のうち少なくとも一つは、一般式(1)におけるRと同様の基である。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
(In General Formula (1A), ring A ′ is a six-membered alicyclic ring, aromatic ring or heterocyclic ring, and R 11 , R 12 , R 13 , R 14 , and R 15 are each independently hydrogen. is the same group as R 1 in atom or the general formula (1), R 2 is the same as R 2 in the general formula (1). However, R 11, R 12, R 13, R 14 and, At least one of R 15 is the same group as R 1 in the general formula (1).)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
(一般式(1B)中、Xは、下記一般式(3)で表される基であり、環A’、R、R11、R12、R13、及びR14は、一般式(1A)と同様である。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
(In general formula (1B), X 1 is a group represented by the following general formula (3), and ring A ′, R 2 , R 11 , R 12 , R 13 , and R 14 are represented by the general formula ( Same as 1A).)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
(一般式(1C)中、mは2~6の整数であり、Xは、m=2のとき下記一般式(3)で表される基であり、m=3のとき下記一般式(4)で表される基であり、m=4のとき下記一般式(5)で表される基であり、m=5のとき下記一般式(6)で表される基であり、m=6のとき下記一般式(7)で表される基であり、環A’、R、R11、R12、R13、及びR14は、一般式(1A)と同様である。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
(In general formula (1C), m is an integer of 2 to 6, X 1 is a group represented by the following general formula (3) when m = 2, and the following general formula (3 4) a group represented by the following general formula (5) when m = 4, a group represented by the following general formula (6) when m = 5, and m = 6 is a group represented by the following general formula (7), and ring A ′, R 2 , R 11 , R 12 , R 13 , and R 14 are the same as in general formula (1A).)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
(一般式(1D)中、m、X、環A’、R、R11、R12、R13、及びR14は、一般式(1C)と同様である。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
(In General Formula (1D), m, X 1 , Ring A ′, R 2 , R 11 , R 12 , R 13 , and R 14 are the same as in General Formula (1C).)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
(一般式(1E)中、m’は3~6の整数であり、一般式(1C)のmが3~6の場合とそれぞれ同様である。X、環A’、R、R11、R12、R13、及びR14は、一般式(1C)と同様である。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
(In the general formula (1E), m ′ is an integer of 3 to 6, which is the same as in the case where m in the general formula (1C) is 3 to 6. X 1 , ring A ′, R 2 , R 11 , R 12 , R 13 , and R 14 are the same as those in the general formula (1C).)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
(一般式(3)中、Qは、-NR32-、二価の炭素原子数1~35の脂肪族炭化水素基、二価の炭素原子数6~35の芳香環含有炭化水素基若しくは二価の炭素原子数2~35の複素環含有基又は下記(3-1)~(3-3)の何れかで表される置換基を表し、
 Qで表される脂肪族炭化水素基中のメチレン基は、-O-、-S-、-CO-、-COO-、-OCO-、-NH-又はこれらを組み合わせた基で置き換わっていてもよく、Z及びZは、それぞれ独立に、直接結合、-O-、-S-、-SO-、-SO-、-NR32-、-PR33-を表し、R32及びR33は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、炭素原子数1~8のアルキル基、炭素原子数6~20のアリール基又は炭素原子数7~20のアリールアルキル基を表し、R32及びR33で表されるアルキル基、アリール基及びアリールアルキル基は、ハロゲン原子、水酸基又はニトロ基で置換されていてもよく、R32及びR33で表されるアルキル基及びアリールアルキル基中のメチレン基は、-COO-、-O-、-OCO-、-NHCO-、-NH-又は-CONH-で置き換わっていてもよい。
 但し、上記一般式(3)で表される基は炭素原子数1~35の範囲内である。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
(In General Formula (3), Q 1 is —NR 32 —, a divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 35 carbon atoms, a divalent aromatic ring-containing hydrocarbon group having 6 to 35 carbon atoms, or A divalent heterocyclic group having 2 to 35 carbon atoms or a substituent represented by any of the following (3-1) to (3-3):
The methylene group in the aliphatic hydrocarbon group represented by Q 1 is replaced with —O—, —S—, —CO—, —COO—, —OCO—, —NH— or a combination thereof. Z 1 and Z 2 each independently represent a direct bond, —O—, —S—, —SO 2 —, —SO—, —NR 32 —, —PR 33 —, wherein R 32 and R Table 33 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, an aryl group or an arylalkyl group having 7 to 20 carbon atoms of 6 to 20 carbon atoms, with R 32 and R 33 The alkyl group, aryl group and arylalkyl group which may be substituted with a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group or a nitro group, and the methylene group in the alkyl group and arylalkyl group represented by R 32 and R 33 are: COO-, -O-,- CO -, - NHCO -, - NH- or it may be replaced by -CONH-.
However, the group represented by the general formula (3) is in the range of 1 to 35 carbon atoms. )
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
(式(3-1)中、R34は水素原子、炭素原子数1~10のアルキル基若しくは炭素原子数1~10のアルコキシ基により置換されてもよいフェニル基又は炭素原子数3~10のシクロアルキル基を表し、R35は炭素原子数1~10のアルキル基、炭素原子数1~10のアルコキシ基、炭素原子数2~10のアルケニル基又はハロゲン原子を表し、R34及びR35で表されるアルキル基、アルコキシ基及びアルケニル基は、ハロゲン原子で置換されているか又は無置換であり、dは0~5の整数である。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
(In the formula (3-1), R 34 represents a hydrogen atom, a phenyl group optionally substituted by an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, or an alkoxy group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, or a group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms. R 35 represents an cycloalkyl group, R 35 represents an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, an alkenyl group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms, or a halogen atom, and R 34 and R 35 (The alkyl group, alkoxy group, and alkenyl group represented are substituted or unsubstituted with a halogen atom, and d is an integer of 0 to 5.)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
(式(3-3)中、R36及びR37は、それぞれ独立に、炭素原子数1~10のアルキル基、炭素原子数6~20のアリール基、炭素原子数6~20のアリールオキシ基、炭素原子数6~20のアリールチオ基、炭素原子数8~20のアリールアルケニル基、炭素原子数7~20のアリールアルキル基、炭素原子数2~20の複素環含有基又はハロゲン原子を表し、R36及びR37で表されるアルキル基、アリール基、アリールオキシ基、アリールチオ基、アリールアルケニル基、アリールアルキル基及び複素環含有基は、ハロゲン原子で置換されているか又は無置換であり、R36及びR37で表されるアルキル基及びアリールアルキル基中のメチレン基は、不飽和結合、-O-又は-S-で置き換わっていてもよく、R36は、隣接するR36同士で環を形成していてもよく、eは0~4の数を表し、fは0~8の数を表し、gは0~4の数を表し、hは0~4の数を表し、gとhの数の合計は2~4である。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
(In the formula (3-3), R 36 and R 37 are each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, or an aryloxy group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms. Represents an arylthio group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, an arylalkenyl group having 8 to 20 carbon atoms, an arylalkyl group having 7 to 20 carbon atoms, a heterocyclic-containing group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, or a halogen atom, The alkyl group, aryl group, aryloxy group, arylthio group, arylalkenyl group, arylalkyl group and heterocyclic group-containing group represented by R 36 and R 37 are substituted with a halogen atom or unsubstituted, and R The methylene group in the alkyl group and arylalkyl group represented by 36 and R 37 may be replaced with an unsaturated bond, —O— or —S—, and R 36 is Adjacent R 36 may form a ring, e represents a number of 0 to 4, f represents a number of 0 to 8, g represents a number of 0 to 4, and h represents 0 to 4 The total number of g and h is 2 to 4.)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
(一般式(4)~(7)中、Qは、R38で置換された炭素原子、三価の炭素原子数1~35の脂肪族炭化水素基、三価の炭素原子数6~35の芳香環含有炭化水素基又は三価の炭素原子数2~35の複素環含有基を表し、R38は、水素原子、炭素原子数1~8のアルキル基、炭素原子数6~20のアリール基又は炭素原子数7~20のアリールアルキル基を表し、Qは、炭素原子、四価の炭素原子数1~35の脂肪族炭化水素基、四価の炭素原子数6~35の芳香環含有炭化水素基又は四価の炭素原子数2~35の複素環含有基を表し、Qは、五価の炭素原子数2~35の脂肪族炭化水素基、五価の炭素原子数6~35の芳香環含有炭化水素基又は五価の炭素原子数2~35の複素環含有基を表し、Qは、六価の炭素原子数2~35の脂肪族炭化水素基、六価の炭素原子数6~35の芳香環含有炭化水素基又は六価の炭素原子数2~35の複素環含有基を表し、Q、Q、Q、Qで表される脂肪族炭化水素基中のメチレン基は、-O-、-S-、-CO-、-COO-、-OCO-、-NH-又はこれらを組み合わせた基で置き換わっていてもよく、Z~Zは、それぞれ独立に、上記一般式(3)におけるZ及びZで表される基と同じである。但し、上記一般式(4)又は(5)で表わされる基はそれぞれ炭素原子数1~35の範囲内であり、上記一般式(6)又は(7)で表される基はそれぞれ炭素原子数2~35の範囲内である。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
(In the general formulas (4) to (7), Q 2 represents a carbon atom substituted by R 38 , a trivalent aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 35 carbon atoms, or a trivalent carbon atom having 6 to 35 carbon atoms. An aromatic ring-containing hydrocarbon group or a trivalent heterocyclic ring-containing group having 2 to 35 carbon atoms, wherein R 38 is a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, or an aryl having 6 to 20 carbon atoms. A group or an arylalkyl group having 7 to 20 carbon atoms, Q 3 is a carbon atom, a tetravalent aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 35 carbon atoms, or an aromatic ring having 4 to 35 carbon atoms. Represents a hydrocarbon-containing group or a tetravalent heterocyclic group having 2 to 35 carbon atoms, and Q 4 represents a pentavalent aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 2 to 35 carbon atoms and a pentavalent carbon atom having 6 to 6 carbon atoms. represents 35 aromatic ring-containing hydrocarbon group or a pentavalent heterocyclic containing group having a carbon number of 2 to 35, Q 5 is hexavalent carbon atoms Aliphatic hydrocarbon group having to 35, represents a hexavalent aromatic ring-containing hydrocarbon group or hexavalent heterocyclic containing group having a carbon number of 2 to 35 carbon atoms 6 ~ 35, Q 2, Q 4, Q 5 , the methylene group in the aliphatic hydrocarbon group represented by Q 6 is replaced with —O—, —S—, —CO—, —COO—, —OCO—, —NH— or a combination thereof. Z 1 to Z 6 are each independently the same as the groups represented by Z 1 and Z 2 in the general formula (3), provided that the general formula (4) or (5) And each group represented by the general formula (6) or (7) is within a range of 2 to 35 carbon atoms.)
 上記一般式(1A)~一般式(1E)における環A’で表される六員環の脂環、芳香環又は複素環としては、上記一般式(1)におけるAの説明で例示したものが挙げられる。
 上記一般式(1A)~一般式(1E)において、R11~R15はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子又は前記一般式(1)におけるRと同様の基であって、R11~R15のうち少なくとも一つはRと同様の基である。本発明においては、中でも、-ORが置換された炭素原子に隣接する炭素原子にRと同様の基を有することが好ましく、中でも、炭素原子数4以上の置換基であることが好ましい。-ORが置換された炭素原子に隣接する炭素原子に嵩高い置換基があることにより、潜在性酸化防止剤としての耐熱性や耐光性に優れ、酸化防止効果にも優れている。
Examples of the six-membered alicyclic, aromatic or heterocyclic ring represented by the ring A ′ in the general formula (1A) to the general formula (1E) include those exemplified in the description of A in the general formula (1). Can be mentioned.
The general formula (1A) ~ the general formula (1E), R 11 ~ R 15 are each independently a group similar to R 1 in the hydrogen atom or a general formula (1), the R 11 ~ R 15 At least one of them is the same group as R 1 . In the present invention, among them, a carbon atom adjacent to the carbon atom substituted with —OR 2 preferably has the same group as R 1, and among them, a substituent having 4 or more carbon atoms is preferable. Since the carbon atom adjacent to the carbon atom substituted with —OR 2 has a bulky substituent, it is excellent in heat resistance and light resistance as a latent antioxidant and also in an antioxidant effect.
 上記一般式(3)におけるQで表される二価の炭素原子数1~35の脂肪族炭化水素基としては、メタン、エタン、プロパン、iso-プロパン、ブタン、sec-ブタン、tert-ブタン、iso-ブタン、ヘキサン、2-メチルヘキサン、3-メチルヘキサン、ヘプタン、2-メチルヘプタン、3-メチルヘプタン、iso-ヘプタン、tert-ヘプタン、1-メチルオクタン、iso-オクタン、tert-オクタン、シクロプロパン、シクロブタン、シクロペンタン、シクロヘキサン、シクロヘプタン、2,4-ジメチルシクロブタン、4-メチルシクロヘキサン等の基が、Z及びZで置換された二価の基、シクロオクチル、シクロデカニル、1-アダマンチル、2-アダマンチル、ノルアダマンチル、2-メチルアダマンチル、ノルボルニル、イソノルボルニル、パーヒドロナフチル、パーヒドロアントラセニル、ビシクロ[1.1.0]ブチル、ビシクロ[1.1.1]ペンチル、ビシクロ[2.1.0]ペンチル、ビシクロ[3.1.0]ヘキシル、ビシクロ[2.1.1]ヘキシル、ビシクロ[2.2.0]ヘキシル、ビシクロ[4.1.0]ヘプチル、ビシクロ[3.2.0]ヘプチル、ビシクロ[3.1.1]ヘプチル、ビシクロ[2.2.1]ヘプチル、ビシクロ[5.1.0]オクチル、ビシクロ[4.2.0]オクチル、ビシクロ[4.1.1]オクチル、ビシクロ[3.3.0]オクチル、ビシクロ[3.2.1]オクチル、ビシクロ[2.2.2]オクチル、スピロ〔4,4〕ノナニル、スピロ〔4,5〕デカニル、デカリン、トリシクロデカニル、テトラシクロドデカニル、セドロール、シクロドデカニル等の基が、Z及びZで置換された二価の基、及びこれらの組み合わせが挙げられ、脂肪族炭化水素基中のメチレン基は、-O-、-S-、-CO-、-COO-、-OCO-、-NH-又はこれらを組み合わせた基で置き換わっていてもよく、これらを組み合わせた基とは、例えば、-COO-O-、-COO-S-、-O-OCO-、-S-OCO-、-CO-NH-、-NH-CO-等を表し、中でも、-COO-、-O-、-OCO-、-NHCO-、-NH-、-CONH-、-O-CONH-又は-NHCO-O-で置き換わっているものが好ましい。
 Qで表される二価の炭素原子数6~35の芳香環含有炭化水素基としては、フェニル、ナフチル、ビフェニル等の基が、Z及びZで置換された二価の基等が挙げられる。
 Qで表される二価の炭素原子数2~35の複素環含有基としては、ピリジン、ピラジン、ピペリジン、ピペラジン、ピリミジン、ピリダジン、トリアジン、ヘキサヒドロトリアジン、フラン、テトラヒドロフラン、クロマン、キサンテン、チオフェン、チオラン等の基が、Z及びZで置換された二価の基が挙げられる。
 これらの基はハロゲン原子、シアノ基、ニトロ基又は炭素原子数1~8のアルコキシ基でさらに置換されていてもよい。
 R32及びR33で表される炭素原子数1~8のアルキル基としては、R及びRで表される炭素原子数1~40のアルキル基として例示した基のうち、所定の炭素数を満たす基が挙げられる。
 R32及びR33で表される炭素原子数6~20のアリール基としては、R、R及びRで表される炭素原子数6~20のアリール基として例示した基が挙げられる。
 R32及びR33で表される炭素原子数7~20のアリールアルキル基としては、R、R及びRで表される炭素原子数7~20のアリールアルキル基として例示した基が挙げられる。
 また、R32及びR33で表されるアルキル基、アリール基及びアリールアルキル基を置換していてもよいハロゲン原子としては、R及びRで表されるハロゲン原子として例示した基が挙げられる。
Examples of the divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 35 carbon atoms represented by Q 1 in the general formula (3) include methane, ethane, propane, iso-propane, butane, sec-butane, and tert-butane. , Iso-butane, hexane, 2-methylhexane, 3-methylhexane, heptane, 2-methylheptane, 3-methylheptane, iso-heptane, tert-heptane, 1-methyloctane, iso-octane, tert-octane, A divalent group in which a group such as cyclopropane, cyclobutane, cyclopentane, cyclohexane, cycloheptane, 2,4-dimethylcyclobutane, 4-methylcyclohexane, etc. is substituted with Z 1 and Z 2 , cyclooctyl, cyclodecanyl, 1- Adamantyl, 2-adamantyl, noradamantyl, 2-methyladam Nthyl, norbornyl, isonorbornyl, perhydronaphthyl, perhydroanthracenyl, bicyclo [1.1.0] butyl, bicyclo [1.1.1] pentyl, bicyclo [2.1.0] pentyl, bicyclo [3. 1.0] hexyl, bicyclo [2.1.1] hexyl, bicyclo [2.2.0] hexyl, bicyclo [4.1.0] heptyl, bicyclo [3.2.0] heptyl, bicyclo [3. 1.1] heptyl, bicyclo [2.2.1] heptyl, bicyclo [5.1.0] octyl, bicyclo [4.2.0] octyl, bicyclo [4.1.1] octyl, bicyclo [3. 3.0] octyl, bicyclo [3.2.1] octyl, bicyclo [2.2.2] octyl, spiro [4,4] nonanyl, spiro [4,5] decanyl, decalin, trisi Rodekaniru, tetracyclododecanyl, cedrol, group such cyclododecanyl is a divalent group which is substituted by Z 1 and Z 2, and combinations thereof, the methylene group in the aliphatic hydrocarbon group, —O—, —S—, —CO—, —COO—, —OCO—, —NH— or a combination thereof may be substituted. Examples of the combination thereof include —COO—O —, —COO—S—, —O—OCO—, —S—OCO—, —CO—NH—, —NH—CO—, etc., among others, —COO—, —O—, —OCO—, — Those substituted with NHCO-, -NH-, -CONH-, -O-CONH- or -NHCO-O- are preferred.
Examples of the divalent aromatic ring-containing hydrocarbon group having 6 to 35 carbon atoms represented by Q 1 include divalent groups in which groups such as phenyl, naphthyl, and biphenyl are substituted with Z 1 and Z 2. Can be mentioned.
The divalent heterocyclic ring-containing group having a carbon number of 2 to 35 represented by Q 1, pyridine, pyrazine, piperidine, piperazine, pyrimidine, pyridazine, triazine, hexahydrotriazine, furan, tetrahydrofuran, chroman, xanthene, thiophene And divalent groups in which a group such as thiolane is substituted with Z 1 and Z 2 .
These groups may be further substituted with a halogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group or an alkoxy group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms.
As the alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms represented by R 32 and R 33 , among the groups exemplified as the alkyl group having 1 to 40 carbon atoms represented by R 1 and R 2 , a predetermined carbon number The group which satisfy | fills is mentioned.
Examples of the aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms represented by R 32 and R 33 include groups exemplified as the aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms represented by R 1 , R 2 and R 4 .
Examples of the arylalkyl group having 7 to 20 carbon atoms represented by R 32 and R 33 include groups exemplified as the arylalkyl group having 7 to 20 carbon atoms represented by R 1 , R 2 and R 4. It is done.
Examples of the halogen atom that may be substituted for the alkyl group, aryl group, and arylalkyl group represented by R 32 and R 33 include the groups exemplified as the halogen atom represented by R 1 and R 2. .
 上記(3-1)で表される置換基において、R34で表されるフェニル基及び炭素原子数3~10のシクロアルキル基を置換してもよい炭素原子数1~10のアルキル基並びにR35で表される炭素原子数1~10のアルキル基としては、R及びRで表される炭素原子数1~40のアルキル基として例示した基のうち、所定の炭素数を満たす基等が挙げられる。R34で表されるフェニル基及び炭素原子数3~10のシクロアルキル基を置換してもよい炭素原子数1~10のアルコキシ基並びにR35で表される。炭素原子数1~10のアルコキシ基としては、例えば、メトキシ、エトキシ、プロピルオキシ、イソプロピルオキシ、ブチルオキシ、s-ブチルオキシ、t-ブチルオキシ、イソブチルオキシ、ペンチルオキシ、イソアミルオキシ、t-アミルオキシ、ヘキシルオキシ、シクロヘキシルオキシ、シクロヘキシルメチルオキシ、テトラヒドロフラニルオキシ、テトラヒドロピラニルオキシ等が挙げられる。
 R34で表される炭素原子数3~10のシクロアルキル基としては、シクロプロピル、シクロブチル、シクロペンチル、シクロへブチル、シクロオクチル等及びこれらの基が上記炭素原子数1~10のアルキル基若しくは炭素原子数1~10のアルコキシ基で置換された基等が挙げられる。
 R35で表される炭素原子数2~10のアルケニル基としては、ビニル、アリル、1-プロペニル、イソプロペニル、2-ブテニル、1,3-ブタジエニル、2-ペンテニル、2-オクテニル等が挙げられる。
 R35で表されるハロゲン原子、並びにR34及びR35で表されるアルキル基、アルコキシ基及びアルケニル基を置換してもよいハロゲン原子としては、R及びRで表されるハロゲン原子として例示した基が挙げられる。
 尚、R35で表されるアルキル基、アルコキシ基及びアルケニル基を置換してもよいハロゲン原子の置換位置は制限されない。
In the substituent represented by (3-1) above, the phenyl group represented by R 34 and the alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms which may be substituted with the cycloalkyl group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms, and R Examples of the alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms represented by 35 include groups satisfying a predetermined carbon number among the groups exemplified as the alkyl groups having 1 to 40 carbon atoms represented by R 1 and R 2 , etc. Is mentioned. The phenyl group represented by R 34 and the alkoxy group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms which may be substituted with the cycloalkyl group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms and R 35 are also represented. Examples of the alkoxy group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms include methoxy, ethoxy, propyloxy, isopropyloxy, butyloxy, s-butyloxy, t-butyloxy, isobutyloxy, pentyloxy, isoamyloxy, t-amyloxy, hexyloxy, Examples include cyclohexyloxy, cyclohexylmethyloxy, tetrahydrofuranyloxy, tetrahydropyranyloxy and the like.
Examples of the cycloalkyl group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms represented by R 34 include cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cyclooctyl and the like, and these groups are the above alkyl groups having 1 to 10 carbon atoms or carbon atoms. And a group substituted with an alkoxy group having 1 to 10 atoms.
Examples of the alkenyl group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms represented by R 35 include vinyl, allyl, 1-propenyl, isopropenyl, 2-butenyl, 1,3-butadienyl, 2-pentenyl, 2-octenyl and the like. .
The halogen atom represented by R 35 and the halogen atom that may substitute the alkyl group, alkoxy group and alkenyl group represented by R 34 and R 35 are the halogen atom represented by R 1 and R 2. The exemplified groups are mentioned.
Incidentally, the substitution position of alkyl group, halogen atom be substituted alkoxy group and alkenyl group represented by R 35, it is not limited.
 上記(3-3)で表される置換基において、R36及びR37で表される炭素原子数1~10のアルキル基としては、R及びRで表される炭素原子数1~40のアルキル基として例示した基のうち、所定の炭素数を満たす基等が挙げられる。
 R36及びR37で表される炭素原子数6~20のアリール基としては、R、R及びRで表される炭素原子数6~20のアリール基として例示した基等が挙げられる。
 R36及びR37で表される炭素原子数6~20のアリールオキシ基としては、フェニルオキシ、ナフチルオキシ、2-メチルフェニルオキシ、3-メチルフェニルオキシ、4-メチルフェニルオキシ、4-ビニルフェニル二オキシ、3-iso-プロピルフェニルオキシ、4-iso-プロピルフェニルオキシ、4-ブチルフェニルオキシ、4-tert-ブチルフェニルオキシ、4-へキシルフェニルオキシ、4-シクロヘキシルフェニルオキシ、4-オクチルフェニルオキシ、4-(2-エチルヘキシル)フェニルオキシ、2,3-ジメチルフェニルオキシ、2,4-ジメチルフェニルオキシ、2,5-ジメチルフェニルオキシ、2.6-ジメチルフェニルオキシ、3.4-ジメチルフェニルオキシ、3.5-ジメチルフェニルオキシ、2,4-ジーtert-ブチルフェニルオキシ、2,5-ジーtert-ブチルフェニルオキシ、2,6-ジーtert-ブチルフェニルオキシ、2.4-ジーtert-ペンチルフェニルオキシ、2,5-tert-アミルフェニルオキシ、4-シクロへキシルフェニルオキシ、2,4,5-トリメチルフェニルオキシ、フェロセニルオキシ等の基及びこれらの基がハロゲン原子で置換された基等が奉げられる。
 R36及びR37で表される炭素原子数6~20のアリールチオ基としては、上記ハロゲン原子で置換されていてもよい炭素原子数6~20のアリールオキシ基の酸素原子を硫黄原子に置換した基等が奉げられる。
 R36及びR37で表される炭素原子数8~20のアリールアルケニル基としては、上記ハロゲン原子で置換されていてもよい炭素原子数6-20のアリールオキシ基の酸素原子をビニル、アリル、1-プロペニル、イソプロペニル、2-ブテニル、1,3-ブタジエニル、2-ペンテニル、2-オクテニル等のアルケニル基で置換した基等が挙げられる。
 R36及びR37で表される炭素原子数7~20のアリールアルキル基としては、R、R及びRで表される炭素原子数7~20のアリールアルキル基として例示した基等が挙げられる。
 R36及びR37で表される炭素原子数2~20の複素環含有基としては、ピリジン、ピラジン、ピペリジン、ピペラジン、ピリミジン、ピリダジン、トリアジン、ヘキサヒドロトリアジン、フラン、テトラヒドロフラン、クロマン、キサンテン、チオフェン、チオフラン等の基及びこれらの基がハロゲン原子で置換された基等が挙げられる。
 R36及びR37で表されるアルキル基、アリール基、アリールオキシ基、アリールチオ基、アリールアルケニル基、アリールアルキル基及び複素環含有基を置換していてもよいハロゲン原子としては、R及びRで表されるハロゲン原子として例示した基が挙げられる。
In the substituent represented by the above (3-3), the alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms represented by R 36 and R 37 may have 1 to 40 carbon atoms represented by R 1 and R 2. Among the groups exemplified as the alkyl group, a group satisfying a predetermined carbon number and the like can be mentioned.
Examples of the aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms represented by R 36 and R 37 include groups exemplified as the aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms represented by R 1 , R 2 and R 4. .
Examples of the aryloxy group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms represented by R 36 and R 37 include phenyloxy, naphthyloxy, 2-methylphenyloxy, 3-methylphenyloxy, 4-methylphenyloxy, 4-vinylphenyl 2-oxy, 3-iso-propylphenyloxy, 4-iso-propylphenyloxy, 4-butylphenyloxy, 4-tert-butylphenyloxy, 4-hexylphenyloxy, 4-cyclohexylphenyloxy, 4-octylphenyl Oxy, 4- (2-ethylhexyl) phenyloxy, 2,3-dimethylphenyloxy, 2,4-dimethylphenyloxy, 2,5-dimethylphenyloxy, 2.6-dimethylphenyloxy, 3.4-dimethylphenyl Oxy, 3.5-dimethylphenyloxy 2,4-di-tert-butylphenyloxy, 2,5-di-tert-butylphenyloxy, 2,6-di-tert-butylphenyloxy, 2.4-di-tert-pentylphenyloxy, 2,5-tert -Groups such as amylphenyloxy, 4-cyclohexylphenyloxy, 2,4,5-trimethylphenyloxy, ferrocenyloxy, etc., and groups in which these groups are substituted with halogen atoms, etc. are used.
As the arylthio group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms represented by R 36 and R 37 , the oxygen atom of the aryloxy group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may be substituted with the above halogen atom is substituted with a sulfur atom. The foundation etc. are offered.
As the arylalkenyl group having 8 to 20 carbon atoms represented by R 36 and R 37 , the oxygen atom of the aryloxy group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may be substituted with the above halogen atom may be vinyl, allyl, Examples include groups substituted with alkenyl groups such as 1-propenyl, isopropenyl, 2-butenyl, 1,3-butadienyl, 2-pentenyl, 2-octenyl and the like.
Examples of the arylalkyl group having 7 to 20 carbon atoms represented by R 36 and R 37 include groups exemplified as the arylalkyl group having 7 to 20 carbon atoms represented by R 1 , R 2 and R 4. Can be mentioned.
Examples of the heterocyclic group containing 2 to 20 carbon atoms represented by R 36 and R 37 include pyridine, pyrazine, piperidine, piperazine, pyrimidine, pyridazine, triazine, hexahydrotriazine, furan, tetrahydrofuran, chroman, xanthene, thiophene. And groups such as thiofuran and groups in which these groups are substituted with a halogen atom.
As the halogen atom which may be substituted for the alkyl group, aryl group, aryloxy group, arylthio group, arylalkenyl group, arylalkyl group and heterocyclic group represented by R 36 and R 37 , R 1 and R The group illustrated as a halogen atom represented by 2 is mentioned.
 上記一般式(4)におけるQで表される三価の炭素原子数1~35の脂肪族炭化水素基、三価の炭素原子数6~35の芳香環含有炭化水素基又は三価の炭素原子数2~35の複素環含有基としてはそれぞれ、上記一般式(3)におけるQの説明で例示した脂肪族炭化水素基、芳香環含有炭化水素基、複素環含有基がそれぞれ、Z、Z及びZで置換された三価の基等が挙げられる。
 また、R38で表される炭素原子数1~8のアルキル基、炭素原子数6~20のアリール基又は炭素原子数7~20のアリールアルキル基としては、R32及びR33で表される炭素原子数1~8のアルキル基、炭素原子数6~20のアリール基又は炭素原子数7~20のアリールアルキル基と同様の基等が挙げられる。
The trivalent aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 35 carbon atoms represented by Q 2 in the general formula (4), the aromatic hydrocarbon group containing 6 to 35 carbon atoms having a trivalent carbon atom, or trivalent carbon. As the heterocyclic group having 2 to 35 atoms, the aliphatic hydrocarbon group, aromatic ring-containing hydrocarbon group and heterocyclic group-containing group exemplified in the description of Q 1 in the general formula (3) are each Z 1. , Z 2 and Z 3 substituted trivalent groups and the like.
Further, the alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, the aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, or the arylalkyl group having 7 to 20 carbon atoms represented by R 38 is represented by R 32 and R 33. Examples thereof include a group similar to an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, or an arylalkyl group having 7 to 20 carbon atoms.
 上記一般式(5)におけるQで表される四価の炭素原子数1~35の脂肪族炭化水素基、四価の炭素原子数6~35の芳香環含有炭化水素基又は四価の炭素原子数2~35の複素環含有基としてはそれぞれ、上記一般式(3)におけるQの説明で例示した脂肪族炭化水素基、芳香環含有炭化水素基、複素環含有基がそれぞれ、Z、Z、Z及びZで置換された四価の基等が挙げられる。 The general formula tetravalent aliphatic hydrocarbon group having a carbon number of 1 to 35 in (5) represented by Q 3, tetravalent aromatic ring-containing hydrocarbon group or a tetravalent carbon carbon atoms 6-35 As the heterocyclic group having 2 to 35 atoms, the aliphatic hydrocarbon group, aromatic ring-containing hydrocarbon group and heterocyclic group-containing group exemplified in the description of Q 1 in the general formula (3) are each Z 1. , Z 2 , Z 3, and a tetravalent group substituted with Z 4 .
 上記一般式(6)におけるQで表される五価の炭素原子数2~35の脂肪族炭化水素基、五価の炭素原子数6~35の芳香環含有炭化水素基又は五価の炭素原子数2~35の複素環含有基としてはそれぞれ、上記一般式(3)におけるQの説明で例示した脂肪族炭化水素基、芳香環含有炭化水素基、複素環含有基がそれぞれ、Z、Z、Z、Z及びZで置換された五価の基等が挙げられる。 The pentavalent aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 2 to 35 carbon atoms represented by Q 4 in the general formula (6), the aromatic hydrocarbon group containing 5 to 35 carbon atoms, or the pentavalent carbon. As the heterocyclic group having 2 to 35 atoms, the aliphatic hydrocarbon group, aromatic ring-containing hydrocarbon group and heterocyclic group-containing group exemplified in the description of Q 1 in the general formula (3) are each Z 1. , Z 2 , Z 3 , Z 4 and Z 5 , and the like.
 上記一般式(7)におけるQで表される六価の炭素原子数2~35の脂肪族炭化水素基、六価の炭素原子数6~35の芳香環含有炭化水素基又は六価の炭素原子数2~35の複素環含有基としてはそれぞれ、上記一般式(3)におけるXの説明で例示した脂肪族炭化水素基、芳香環含有炭化水素基、複素環含有基がそれぞれ、Z、Z、Z、Z、Z及びZで置換された六価の基等が挙げられる。 The hexavalent aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 2 to 35 carbon atoms represented by Q 5 in the general formula (7), the aromatic hydrocarbon group containing 6 to 35 carbon atoms having 6 to 35 carbon atoms or hexavalent carbon. As the heterocyclic group having 2 to 35 atoms, each of the aliphatic hydrocarbon group, the aromatic ring-containing hydrocarbon group, and the heterocyclic group-containing group exemplified in the description of X 1 in the general formula (3) is Z 1. , Z 2 , Z 3 , Z 4 , Z 5 and Z 6 and the like.
 本発明において好適に用いられる潜在性酸化防止剤の具体例としては、ヒンダードフェノール系酸化防止剤のフェノール基の水素をt-ブトキシカルボニル基のようなカルバメート系保護基で置換した構造が挙げられ、例えば、下記化学式(A)~(C)等が挙げられるが、これらに限定されるものではない。 Specific examples of the latent antioxidant suitably used in the present invention include a structure in which the hydrogen of the phenol group of the hindered phenol antioxidant is substituted with a carbamate protecting group such as a t-butoxycarbonyl group. Examples thereof include the following chemical formulas (A) to (C), but are not limited thereto.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
 一般式(1)で表される化合物の製造方法は特に限定されないが、例えば、特開昭57-111375、特開平3-173843、特開平6-128195、特開平7-206771、特開平7-252191、特表2004-501128の各公報に記載された方法により製造されたフェノール系化合物と、酸無水物、酸塩化物、Boc化試薬、アルキルハライド化合物、シリルクロライド化合物、アリルエーテル化合物等を反応させて得ることができる。また、市販品を用いてもよい。 The method for producing the compound represented by the general formula (1) is not particularly limited. For example, JP-A-57-111375, JP-A-3-173843, JP-A-6-128195, JP-A-7-206771, JP-A-7- Reaction of phenolic compounds produced by the methods described in each publication of Japanese Patent No. 252191 and Special Tables 2004-501128 with acid anhydrides, acid chlorides, Boc reagents, alkyl halide compounds, silyl chloride compounds, allyl ether compounds, etc. Can be obtained. Moreover, you may use a commercial item.
[色材]
 本発明において、色材は、カラーフィルタの着色層を形成した際に所望の発色が可能なものであればよく、特に限定されず、種々の有機顔料、無機顔料、染料等を、単独で又は2種以上混合して用いることができる。染料は、溶剤に溶解させて用いるもののほか、分散可能な染料であってもよい。分散可能な染料は、後述する分散剤と組み合わせることにより、耐熱性や耐光性に優れている。
[Color material]
In the present invention, the color material is not particularly limited as long as it can form a desired color when forming a colored layer of a color filter, and various organic pigments, inorganic pigments, dyes, and the like can be used alone or Two or more kinds can be mixed and used. The dye may be a dye that can be dispersed in addition to a dye that is dissolved in a solvent. Dispersible dyes are excellent in heat resistance and light resistance when combined with a dispersant described later.
 発色性が高く、耐熱性が高い点からは、有機顔料が好適に用いられる。有機顔料としては、例えばカラーインデックス(C.I.;The Society of Dyers and Colourists 社発行)においてピグメント(Pigment)に分類されている化合物、具体的には、下記のようなカラーインデックス(C.I.)番号が付されているものを挙げることができる。 Organic pigments are preferably used because of their high color developability and high heat resistance. Examples of the organic pigment include compounds classified as pigments in the color index (CI; issued by The Society of Dyers and Colorists), specifically, the following color index (C.I. .) Can be listed with numbers.
 C.I.ピグメントイエロー1、3、12、13、14、15、16、17、20、24、31、55、60、61、65、71、73、74、81、83、93、95、97、98、100、101、104、106、108、109、110、113、114、116、117、119、120、126、127、128、129、138、139、150、151、152、153、154、155、156、166、168、175、185、及びC.I.ピグメントイエロー150の誘導体顔料;
 C.I.ピグメントオレンジ1、5、13、14、16、17、24、34、36、38、40、43、46、49、51、61、63、64、71、73;
 C.I.ピグメントバイオレット1、19、23、29、32、36、38;
 C.I.ピグメントレッド1、2、3、4、5、6、7、8、9、10、11、12、14、15、16、17、18、19、21、22、23、30、31、32、37、38、40、41、42、48:1、48:2、48:3、48:4、49:1、49:2、50:1、52:1、53:1、57、57:1、57:2、58:2、58:4、60:1、63:1、63:2、64:1、81:1、83、88、90:1、97、101、102、104、105、106、108、112、113、114、122、123、144、146、149、150、151、166、168、170、171、172、174、175、176、177、178、179、180、185、187、188、190、193、194、202、206、207、208、209、215、216、220、224、226、242、243、245、254、255、264、265;
 C.I.ピグメントブルー15、15:3、15:4、15:6、60;
 C.I.ピグメントグリーン7、36、58、59;
 C.I.ピグメントブラウン23、25;
 C.I.ピグメントブラック1、7。
C. I. Pigment Yellow 1, 3, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 20, 24, 31, 55, 60, 61, 65, 71, 73, 74, 81, 83, 93, 95, 97, 98, 100, 101, 104, 106, 108, 109, 110, 113, 114, 116, 117, 119, 120, 126, 127, 128, 129, 138, 139, 150, 151, 152, 153, 154, 155, 156, 166, 168, 175, 185, and C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 150 derivative pigment;
C. I. Pigment Orange 1, 5, 13, 14, 16, 17, 24, 34, 36, 38, 40, 43, 46, 49, 51, 61, 63, 64, 71, 73;
C. I. Pigment violet 1, 19, 23, 29, 32, 36, 38;
C. I. Pigment Red 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 21, 22, 23, 30, 31, 32, 37, 38, 40, 41, 42, 48: 1, 48: 2, 48: 3, 48: 4, 49: 1, 49: 2, 50: 1, 52: 1, 53: 1, 57, 57: 1, 57: 2, 58: 2, 58: 4, 60: 1, 63: 1, 63: 2, 64: 1, 81: 1, 83, 88, 90: 1, 97, 101, 102, 104, 105, 106, 108, 112, 113, 114, 122, 123, 144, 146, 149, 150, 151, 166, 168, 170, 171, 172, 174, 175, 176, 177, 178, 179, 180, 185, 187, 188, 190, 193, 194, 202, 06,207,208,209,215,216,220,224,226,242,243,245,254,255,264,265;
C. I. Pigment blue 15, 15: 3, 15: 4, 15: 6, 60;
C. I. Pigment green 7, 36, 58, 59;
C. I. Pigment brown 23, 25;
C. I. Pigment Black 1 and 7.
 また、前記無機顔料の具体例としては、酸化チタン、硫酸バリウム、炭酸カルシウム、亜鉛華、硫酸鉛、黄色鉛、亜鉛黄、べんがら(赤色酸化鉄(III))、カドミウム赤、群青、紺青、酸化クロム緑、コバルト緑、アンバー、チタンブラック、合成鉄黒、カーボンブラック等を挙げることができる。 Specific examples of the inorganic pigment include titanium oxide, barium sulfate, calcium carbonate, zinc white, lead sulfate, yellow lead, zinc yellow, red bean (red iron (III) oxide), cadmium red, ultramarine blue, bitumen, and oxidation. Examples thereof include chrome green, cobalt green, amber, titanium black, synthetic iron black, and carbon black.
 例えば、カラーフィルタの基板上に、本発明に係る感光性着色樹脂組成物を用いて遮光層のパターンを形成する場合には、インク中に遮光性の高い黒色顔料を配合する。遮光性の高い黒色顔料としては、例えば、カーボンブラックや四三酸化鉄などの無機顔料、或いは、シアニンブラックなどの有機顔料を使用できる。 For example, when forming the pattern of the light shielding layer on the substrate of the color filter using the photosensitive colored resin composition according to the present invention, a black pigment having a high light shielding property is blended in the ink. As the black pigment having a high light shielding property, for example, an inorganic pigment such as carbon black or iron trioxide or an organic pigment such as cyanine black can be used.
 上記分散可能な染料としては、染料に各種置換基を付与して溶剤に不溶化することにより分散可能となった染料や、溶解度の低い溶剤と組み合わせて用いることにより分散可能となった染料や、溶剤に可溶性の染料をカウンターイオンと塩形成して不溶化(レーキ化)したレーキ色材が挙げられる。このような分散可能な染料と、分散剤とを組み合わせて用いることにより当該染料の分散性や分散安定性を向上することができる。
 なお、目安として、10gの溶剤(又は混合溶剤)に対して染料の溶解量が10mg以下であれば、当該溶剤(又は混合溶剤)において、当該染料が分散可能であると判定することができる。
Examples of the dispersible dye include dyes that can be dispersed by adding various substituents to the dye and insolubilizing the solvent, dyes that can be dispersed by using in combination with a solvent having low solubility, and solvents And a lake color material obtained by forming a salt with a counter ion to form an insoluble (rake) salt. By using a combination of such a dispersible dye and a dispersant, the dispersibility and dispersion stability of the dye can be improved.
As a guide, if the amount of dye dissolved in 10 g of solvent (or mixed solvent) is 10 mg or less, it can be determined that the dye can be dispersed in the solvent (or mixed solvent).
 本発明においては、中でも、前記レーキ色材を用いることが、輝度及びコントラストを向上する点から好ましい。レーキ色材は、通常、溶剤に可溶性の染料と、後述するレーキ化剤とを溶剤中で混合することにより得ることができる。上記溶剤に可溶性の染料としては、カラーフィルタの高輝度化の点から、透過率の高い染料を用いることが好ましい。当該染料は、所望の色調に応じて適宜選択すればよく、アゾ系染料、金属錯塩アゾ染料、アントラキノン系染料、トリアリールメタン系染料、キサンテン系染料、シアニン系染料、インジゴ系染料、ナフトキノン染料、キノンイミン染料、メチン染料、フタロシアニン染料等、いずれの基本骨格(発色部位)を有する染料であってもよい。また、上記染料は、アニオン性置換基を有する酸性染料や、カチオン性置換基を有する塩基性染料等、いずれに分類される染料であってもよい。
 青色着色層を形成する場合には、高輝度化の点から、中でも、トリアリールメタン系染料、キサンテン系染料、及びシアニン系染料の少なくとも1種が好ましく、トリアリールメタン系染料であることがより好ましい。
In the present invention, it is particularly preferable to use the rake color material from the viewpoint of improving luminance and contrast. The rake colorant can be usually obtained by mixing a dye soluble in a solvent and a rake agent described later in a solvent. As the dye soluble in the solvent, a dye having a high transmittance is preferably used from the viewpoint of increasing the brightness of the color filter. What is necessary is just to select the said dye suitably according to a desired color tone, an azo dye, a metal complex azo dye, an anthraquinone dye, a triarylmethane dye, a xanthene dye, a cyanine dye, an indigo dye, a naphthoquinone dye, It may be a dye having any basic skeleton (coloring portion) such as a quinoneimine dye, a methine dye, or a phthalocyanine dye. The dye may be a dye classified into any one of an acidic dye having an anionic substituent and a basic dye having a cationic substituent.
In the case of forming a blue colored layer, from the viewpoint of increasing the brightness, among them, at least one of a triarylmethane dye, a xanthene dye, and a cyanine dye is preferable, and a triarylmethane dye is more preferable. preferable.
 酸性染料としては、例えば、C.I.アシッドバイオレット29,31,33,34,36,36:1,39,41,42,43,47,51,63,76,103,118,126、C.I.アシッドブルー2,8,14,25,27,35,37,40,41,41:1,41:2,43,45,46,47,49,50,51,51,53,54,55,56,57,58,62,62:1,63,64,65,68,69,70,78,79,80,81,96,111,124,127,127:1,129,137,138,143,145,150,175,176,183,198,203,204,205,208,215,220,221,225,226,227,230,231,232,233,235,239,245,247,253,257,258,260,261,264,266,270,271,272,273,274,277,277:1,278,280,281,282,286,287,288,289,290,291,292,293,294,295,298,301,302,304,305,306,307,313,316,318,322,324,327,331,333,336,339,340,343,344,350、C.I.アシッドグリーン10,17,25,25:1,27,36,37,38,40,41,42,44,54,59,69,71,81,84,95,101,110,117等のアントラキノン系酸性染料;C.I.アシッドバイオレット15,16,17,19,21,23,24,25,38,49,72、C.I.アシッドブルー1、3、5、7、9、19、22、83、90、93、100、103、104、109、C.I.アシッドグリーン3,5,6,7,8,9,11,13,14,15,16,18,22,50,50:1等のトリアリールメタン系酸性染料;C.I.アシッドレッド50,51,52,87,92,94,289,388、C.I.アシッドバイオレット9,30,102、スルホローダミンG、スルホローダミンB、スルホローダミン101、スルホローダミン640等のキサンテン系酸性染料などが挙げられる。キサンテン系酸性染料は、中でも、C.I.アシッドレッド50、C.I.アシッドレッド52、C.I.アシッドレッド289、C.I.アシッドバイオレット9、C.I.アシッドバイオレット30、C.I.アシッドブルー19等のローダミン系酸性染料であることが好ましい。
 また、市販の塩基性染料としては、例えば、C.I.ベーシックバイオレット1,3,14、C.I.ベーシックブルー1,5,7,8,11,26、C.I.ベーシックグリーン1,4等のトリアリールメタン系塩基性染料;C.I.ベーシックイエロー13、C.I.ベーシックレッド14等のシアニン系塩基性染料;C.I.ベーシックレッド29等のアゾ系塩基性染料;C.I.ベーシックバイオレット11等のキサンテン系塩基性染料等が挙げられる。トリアリールメタン系塩基性染料は、中でもC.I.ベーシックブルー1,5,7,8,11,26が好ましい。また、本発明においてトリアリールメタン系塩基性染料としては、後述する一般式(I’)で表される色材のカチオンを有する染料も好適なものとして挙げられる。
 これらの染料は、1種単独で又は2種以上を組み合わせて用いることができる。
Examples of the acid dye include C.I. I. Acid Violet 29, 31, 33, 34, 36, 36: 1, 39, 41, 42, 43, 47, 51, 63, 76, 103, 118, 126, C.I. I. Acid Blue 2, 8, 14, 25, 27, 35, 37, 40, 41, 41: 1, 41: 2, 43, 45, 46, 47, 49, 50, 51, 51, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 62, 62: 1, 63, 64, 65, 68, 69, 70, 78, 79, 80, 81, 96, 111, 124, 127, 127: 1, 129, 137, 138, 143,145,150,175,176,183,198,203,204,205,208,215,220,221,225,226,227,230,231,232,233,235,239,245,247, 253, 257, 258, 260, 261, 264, 266, 270, 271, 272, 273, 274, 277, 277: 1, 278, 280, 281, 282, 286 87,288,289,290,291,292,293,294,295,298, 301,302,304,305,306,307,313,316,318,322,324,327,331,333,336 339, 340, 343, 344, 350, C.I. I. Acid Green 10, 17, 25, 25: 1, 27, 36, 37, 38, 40, 41, 42, 44, 54, 59, 69, 71, 81, 84, 95, 101, 110, 117, etc. System acid dyes; C.I. I. Acid Violet 15, 16, 17, 19, 21, 21, 24, 25, 38, 49, 72, C.I. I. Acid Blue 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 19, 22, 83, 90, 93, 100, 103, 104, 109, C.I. I. Acid Green 3, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 11, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 22, 50, 50: 1, etc. triarylmethane acid dyes; I. Acid Red 50, 51, 52, 87, 92, 94, 289, 388, C.I. I. Acid violet 9, 30, 102, sulforhodamine G, sulforhodamine B, sulforhodamine 101, xanthene acid dyes such as sulforhodamine 640 and the like. Among the xanthene acid dyes, C.I. I. Acid Red 50, C.I. I. Acid Red 52, C.I. I. Acid Red 289, C.I. I. Acid Violet 9, C.I. I. Acid Violet 30, C.I. I. A rhodamine acid dye such as Acid Blue 19 is preferred.
Examples of commercially available basic dyes include C.I. I. Basic violet 1, 3, 14, C.I. I. Basic Blue 1, 5, 7, 8, 11, 26, C.I. I. Triarylmethane basic dyes such as Basic Green 1, 4; I. Basic Yellow 13, C.I. I. Cyanine basic dyes such as Basic Red 14; C.I. I. Azo basic dyes such as Basic Red 29; I. And xanthene-based basic dyes such as Basic Violet 11. Triarylmethane basic dyes are C.I. I. Basic blue 1, 5, 7, 8, 11, 26 are preferred. Moreover, as a triarylmethane type | system | group basic dye in this invention, the dye which has the cation of the coloring material represented by general formula (I ') mentioned later is also mentioned as a suitable thing.
These dyes can be used alone or in combination of two or more.
 レーキ色材においてカウンターイオンは、上記染料の種類に応じて異なり、酸性染料のカウンターイオンはカチオンであり、塩基性染料のカウンターイオンはアニオンである。そのため上記レーキ化剤は、上記染料に応じて適宜選択して用いられる。即ち、上記酸性染料を不溶化する場合には、レーキ化剤として当該染料のカウンターカチオンを生じる化合物が用いられ、上記塩基性染料を不溶化する場合には、レーキ化剤として当該染料のカウンターアニオンを生じる化合物が用いられる。 In the rake color material, the counter ion differs depending on the type of the dye, the counter ion of the acid dye is a cation, and the counter ion of the basic dye is an anion. Therefore, the rake agent is appropriately selected and used depending on the dye. That is, when the acid dye is insolubilized, a compound that generates a counter cation of the dye is used as a rake agent. When the basic dye is insolubilized, a counter anion of the dye is generated as a rake agent. A compound is used.
 酸性染料のカウンターカチオンとしては、アンモニウムカチオンの他、金属カチオンや、無機ポリマー等が挙げられる。
 アンモニウムイオンを発生するレーキ化剤としては、例えば、1級アミン化合物、2級アミン化合物、3級アミン化合物等が好適なものとして挙げられ、中でも、耐熱性及び耐光性に優れる点から、2級アミン化合物又は3級アミン化合物を用いることが好ましい。
 また金属カチオンを発生するレーキ化剤としては、所望の金属イオンを有する金属塩の中から適宜選択すればよい。
 酸性染料のカウンターカチオンは、1種単独で、又は2種以上を組み合わせて用いることができる。
Examples of the counter cation of the acid dye include an ammonium cation, a metal cation, and an inorganic polymer.
As a rake agent that generates ammonium ions, for example, primary amine compounds, secondary amine compounds, tertiary amine compounds, and the like are preferable. Among them, secondary amines are preferred because of their excellent heat resistance and light resistance. It is preferable to use an amine compound or a tertiary amine compound.
Moreover, what is necessary is just to select suitably from the metal salt which has a desired metal ion as a lake agent which generate | occur | produces a metal cation.
The counter cation of the acid dye can be used alone or in combination of two or more.
 酸性染料を含むレーキ色材としては、高輝度を達成可能となる点から、中でも、キサンテン系染料を含むレーキ色材であることが好ましい。
 当該レーキ色材におけるキサンテン系酸性染料としては、中でも、下記一般式(II)で表される化合物、即ち、ローダミン系酸性染料を有することが好ましい。
The rake color material containing an acid dye is preferably a rake color material containing a xanthene-based dye from the viewpoint that high luminance can be achieved.
As the xanthene acid dye in the lake color material, it is preferable to have a compound represented by the following general formula (II), that is, a rhodamine acid dye.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016
(一般式(II)中、R~RIVは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基、又はヘテロアリール基を表し、RとRIII、RIIとRIVが結合して環構造を形成してもよい。Rは、酸性基、Xは、ハロゲン原子を表す。mは0~5の整数を表す。一般式(II)は酸性基を1個以上有するものであり、nは0以上の整数である。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016
(In the general formula (II), R I to R IV each independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group, and R I and R III , R II and R IV are bonded to each other. R V represents an acidic group, X represents a halogen atom, m represents an integer of 0 to 5. The general formula (II) has one or more acidic groups. , N is an integer of 0 or more.)
 R~RIVにおけるアルキル基は、特に限定されない。例えば、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20の直鎖又は分岐状アルキル基等が挙げられ、中でも、炭素数が1~8の直鎖又は分岐のアルキル基であることが好ましく、炭素数が1~5の直鎖又は分岐のアルキル基であることがより好ましい。アルキル基が有してもよい置換基としては、特に限定されないが、例えば、アリール基、ハロゲン原子、水酸基等が挙げられ、置換されたアルキル基としては、ベンジル基等が挙げられ、更に置換基としてハロゲン原子や、酸性基を有していてもよい。
 R~RIVにおけるアリール基は、特に限定されない。例えば、炭素数6~20の置換基を有していてもよいアリール基が挙げられ、中でも、フェニル基、ナフチル基等を有する基が好ましい。R~RIVにおけるヘテロアリール基は、炭素数5~20の置換基を有していてもよいヘテロアリール基が挙げられ、ヘテロ原子として、窒素原子、酸素原子、硫黄原子を含むものが好ましい。
 アリール基又はヘテロアリール基が有してもよい置換基としては、例えば、炭素数1~5のアルキル基、ハロゲン原子、酸性基、水酸基、アルコキシ基、カルバモイル基、カルボン酸エステル基等が挙げられる。
 なお、R~RIVは、同一であっても異なっていてもよい。
The alkyl group in R I to R IV is not particularly limited. Examples thereof include a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent. Among them, a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms is preferable. More preferably, it is a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms. The substituent that the alkyl group may have is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include an aryl group, a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, and the like, and the substituted alkyl group includes a benzyl group, and further, a substituent. May have a halogen atom or an acidic group.
The aryl group in R I to R IV is not particularly limited. For example, an aryl group which may have a substituent having 6 to 20 carbon atoms is exemplified, and among them, a group having a phenyl group, a naphthyl group or the like is preferable. Examples of the heteroaryl group in R I to R IV include heteroaryl groups which may have a substituent having 5 to 20 carbon atoms, and those containing a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom as the hetero atom are preferable. .
Examples of the substituent that the aryl group or heteroaryl group may have include an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, a halogen atom, an acidic group, a hydroxyl group, an alkoxy group, a carbamoyl group, and a carboxylic acid ester group. .
R I to R IV may be the same or different.
 酸性基又はその塩の具体例としては、カルボキシ基(-COOH)、カルボキシラト基(-COO)、カルボン酸塩基(-COOM、ここでMは金属原子を表す。)、スルホナト基(-SO )、スルホ基(-SOH)、スルホン酸塩基(-SOM、ここでMは金属原子を表す。)等が挙げられ、中でも、スルホナト基(-SO )、スルホ基(-SOH)、又はスルホン酸塩基(-SOM)の少なくとも1種を有することが好ましい。なお金属原子Mとしては、ナトリウム原子、カリウム原子等が挙げられる。 Specific examples of the acidic group or a salt thereof include a carboxy group (—COOH), a carboxylate group (—COO ), a carboxylate group (—COOM, where M represents a metal atom), a sulfonate group (—SOO). 3 -), a sulfo group (-SO 3 H), sulfonate (-SO 3 M, wherein M represents a metal atom), and among them, a sulfonato group (-SO 3 -.), a sulfo group It is preferable to have at least one of (—SO 3 H) or a sulfonate group (—SO 3 M). Examples of the metal atom M include a sodium atom and a potassium atom.
 一般式(II)で表される化合物としては、高輝度化の点から、中でも、アシッドレッド50、アシッドレッド52、アシッドレッド289、アシッドバイオレット9、アシッドバイオレット30、アシッドブルー19等が好ましい。
 また、耐熱性の点からは、一般式(II)において、m=1、且つn=0であるベタイン構造を有する化合物が好ましい。
 また、中でも、m=1、且つn=0であって、R及びRIIは各々独立にアルキル基又はアリール基であり、RIII及びRIVは各々独立にアリール基又はヘテロアリール基であることが、輝度及び耐光性に優れた着色層を形成可能になる点から好ましい。
 上記一般式(II)で表される化合物の製造方法は、特に限定されないが、例えば、特開2010-211198号公報を参考に得ることができる。
As the compound represented by the general formula (II), Acid Red 50, Acid Red 52, Acid Red 289, Acid Violet 9, Acid Violet 30, Acid Blue 19 and the like are preferable from the viewpoint of increasing brightness.
From the viewpoint of heat resistance, a compound having a betaine structure in which m = 1 and n = 0 in general formula (II) is preferable.
Moreover, among them, m = 1 and n = 0, R I and R II are each independently an alkyl group or an aryl group, and R III and R IV are each independently an aryl group or a heteroaryl group. It is preferable from the viewpoint that a colored layer excellent in luminance and light resistance can be formed.
The method for producing the compound represented by the general formula (II) is not particularly limited, and can be obtained by referring to, for example, JP2010-211198A.
 上記キサンテン系酸性染料の金属レーキ色材は、レーキ化剤として、金属原子を含むものが用いられる。金属原子を含むレーキ化剤を用いることにより、色材の耐熱性が高くなる。このようなレーキ化剤としては、2価以上の金属カチオンとなる金属原子を含むレーキ化剤が好ましい。 The metal lake color material of the xanthene acid dye includes a metal atom-containing material as a lake agent. By using a rake agent containing a metal atom, the heat resistance of the coloring material is increased. As such a rake agent, a rake agent containing a metal atom that becomes a divalent or higher valent metal cation is preferable.
 一方、塩基性染料のカウンターアニオンとしては、有機アニオンであっても、無機アニオンであってもよい。当該有機アニオンとしては、アニオン性基を置換基として有する有機化合物が挙げられる。 On the other hand, the counter anion of the basic dye may be an organic anion or an inorganic anion. Examples of the organic anion include organic compounds having an anionic group as a substituent.
 また、有機アニオンとして公知の酸性染料を用いてもよい。この場合、レーキ色材は、酸性染料と塩基性染料とがイオン対となって存在する。
 これらの有機アニオンを発生するレーキ化剤としては、上記の有機アニオンのアルカリ金属塩やアルカリ土類金属塩等が挙げられる。
Moreover, you may use a well-known acidic dye as an organic anion. In this case, the lake color material is an acid dye and a basic dye present as an ion pair.
Examples of rake agents that generate these organic anions include alkali metal salts and alkaline earth metal salts of the above organic anions.
 一方、無機アニオンとしては、例えば、オキソ酸のアニオン(リン酸イオン、硫酸イオン、クロム酸イオン、タングステン酸イオン(WO 2-)、モリブデン酸イオン(MoO 2-)等)や、複数のオキソ酸が縮合したポリ酸アニオン等の無機アニオンやその混合物を挙げることができる。
 上記ポリ酸としては、イソポリ酸アニオン(Mc-であってもヘテロポリ酸アニオン(Xc-であってもよい。上記イオン式中、Mはポリ原子、Xはヘテロ原子、mはポリ原子の組成比、nは酸素原子の組成比を表す。ポリ原子Mとしては、例えば、Mo、W、V、Ti、Nb等が挙げられる。またヘテロ原子Xとしては、例えば、Si、P、As、S、Fe、Co等が挙げられる。
 中でも、耐熱性の点から、モリブデン(Mo)及びタングステン(W)のうち少なくとも一方を含むポリ酸アニオンであることが好ましく、少なくともタングステンを含むc価のポリ酸アニオンであることがより好ましい。
On the other hand, as the inorganic anion, for example, an anion of oxo acid (phosphate ion, sulfate ion, chromate ion, tungstate ion (WO 4 2− ), molybdate ion (MoO 4 2− ), etc.) Mention may be made of inorganic anions such as polyacid anions condensed with oxo acids and mixtures thereof.
The polyacid may be an isopolyacid anion (M m O n ) c- or a heteropoly acid anion (X l M m O n ) c- . In the above ionic formula, M represents a poly atom, X represents a hetero atom, m represents a composition ratio of poly atoms, and n represents a composition ratio of oxygen atoms. Examples of the poly atom M include Mo, W, V, Ti, and Nb. Examples of the hetero atom X include Si, P, As, S, Fe, and Co.
Among these, from the viewpoint of heat resistance, a polyacid anion containing at least one of molybdenum (Mo) and tungsten (W) is preferable, and a c-valent polyacid anion containing at least tungsten is more preferable.
 無機アニオンを発生するレーキ化剤としては、上記無機アニオンのアルカリ塩やアルカリ金属塩等が挙げられる。
 レーキ色材における塩基性染料のカウンターアニオンは、1種単独で又は2種以上を組み合わせて用いることができる。
 本発明においてレーキ色材は、耐熱性及び耐光性の点から、中でも塩基性染料と無機アニオンとからなるレーキ色材であることが好ましく、更に、塩基性染料とポリ酸アニオンであることより好ましい。ポリ酸アニオンを含むレーキ色材の場合には、シランカップリング剤が経時で変化を受けやすいが、本発明においては、当該シランカップリング剤の含有割合が着色樹脂組成物中の全固形分に対して1質量%以下であるため、当該経時変化の影響が小さい一方、耐熱性及び耐光性が高いため、本願のレーキ色材として特に好適に用いられる。
Examples of rake agents that generate inorganic anions include alkali salts and alkali metal salts of the above inorganic anions.
The counter anion of the basic dye in the lake color material can be used alone or in combination of two or more.
In the present invention, the rake color material is preferably a rake color material composed of a basic dye and an inorganic anion, more preferably a basic dye and a polyacid anion, from the viewpoint of heat resistance and light resistance. . In the case of a lake color material containing a polyacid anion, the silane coupling agent is easily changed over time, but in the present invention, the content of the silane coupling agent is the total solid content in the colored resin composition On the other hand, since it is 1% by mass or less, the influence of the change with time is small, while the heat resistance and light resistance are high, so that it is particularly suitably used as a rake color material of the present application.
 本発明においては、前記レーキ色材が、カラーフィルタの輝度を向上できる点から、トリアリールメタン系染料を有するレーキ色材を含むことが好ましく、中でも、トリアリールメタン系塩基性染料と、ポリ酸アニオンとを含むことが好ましい。 In the present invention, it is preferable that the lake color material includes a lake color material having a triarylmethane dye from the viewpoint that the brightness of the color filter can be improved. Among them, a triarylmethane basic dye, a polyacid, It preferably contains an anion.
 本発明において、前記レーキ色材は、耐熱性及び耐光性に優れ、カラーフィルタの高輝度化を達成する点から、中でも、下記一般式(I)で表される色材であることが、分子会合状態を形成しており、より優れた耐熱性を示す点で好ましい。 In the present invention, the rake colorant is excellent in heat resistance and light resistance, and achieves high brightness of the color filter. Among them, the rake colorant is preferably a colorant represented by the following general formula (I): An association state is formed, which is preferable in that it exhibits superior heat resistance.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
(一般式(I)中、Aは、Nと直接結合する炭素原子がπ結合を有しないa価の有機基であって、当該有機基は、少なくともNと直接結合する末端に飽和脂肪族炭化水素基を有する脂肪族炭化水素基、又は当該脂肪族炭化水素基を有する芳香族基を表し、炭素鎖中にO、S、Nが含まれていてもよい。Bc-は少なくともタングステンを含むc価のポリ酸アニオンを表す。R~Rは各々独立に水素原子、置換基を有していてもよいアルキル基又は置換基を有していてもよいアリール基を表し、RiiとRiii、RivとRが結合して環構造を形成してもよい。Arは置換基を有していてもよい2価の芳香族基を表す。複数あるR~R及びArはそれぞれ同一であっても異なっていてもよい。
 a及びcは2以上の整数、b及びdは1以上の整数を表す。eは0又は1であり、eが0のとき結合は存在しない。複数あるeは同一であっても異なっていてもよい。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
(In general formula (I), A is an a-valent organic group in which the carbon atom directly bonded to N has no π bond, and the organic group is saturated aliphatic carbonized at least at the terminal directly bonded to N. Represents an aliphatic hydrocarbon group having a hydrogen group or an aromatic group having the aliphatic hydrocarbon group, and may contain O, S, and N in the carbon chain, and B c- includes at least tungsten. c-valent polyacid anion R i to R v each independently represents a hydrogen atom, an optionally substituted alkyl group or an optionally substituted aryl group, and R ii and R iii , R iv and R v may combine to form a ring structure, Ar 1 represents a divalent aromatic group which may have a substituent, a plurality of R i to R v and Ar 1 may be the same or different.
a and c represent an integer of 2 or more, and b and d represent an integer of 1 or more. e is 0 or 1, and when e is 0, there is no bond. A plurality of e may be the same or different. )
 上記一般式(I)で表される色材は、図4に示すように、2価以上のアニオン202と、2価以上のカチオン201とを含むため、当該色材の凝集体においては、アニオンとカチオンが単に1分子対1分子でイオン結合しているのではなく、イオン結合203を介して複数の分子が会合する分子会合体210を形成するものと推定される。そのため、一般式(I)で表される色材の見かけの分子量は、従来のレーキ色材の分子量に比べて格段に増大する。このような分子会合体の形成により固体状態での凝集力がより高まり、熱運動を低下させ、イオン対の解離やカチオン部の分解を抑制でき、耐熱性が向上すると推定される。 As shown in FIG. 4, the color material represented by the general formula (I) includes a divalent or higher valent anion 202 and a divalent or higher cation 201. It is presumed that the cation and the cation are not simply ion-bonded by one molecule to one molecule but form a molecular aggregate 210 in which a plurality of molecules are associated through the ion bond 203. Therefore, the apparent molecular weight of the color material represented by the general formula (I) is remarkably increased as compared with the molecular weight of the conventional lake color material. It is presumed that the formation of such molecular aggregates increases the cohesive force in the solid state, lowers the thermal motion, suppresses dissociation of ion pairs and decomposition of the cation part, and improves heat resistance.
 一般式(I)におけるAは、N(窒素原子)と直接結合する炭素原子がπ結合を有しないa価の有機基であって、当該有機基は、少なくともNと直接結合する末端に飽和脂肪族炭化水素基を有する脂肪族炭化水素基、又は当該脂肪族炭化水素基を有する芳香族基を表し、炭素鎖中にO(酸素原子)、S(硫黄原子)、N(窒素原子)が含まれていてもよいものである。Nと直接結合する炭素原子がπ結合を有しないため、カチオン性の発色部位が有する色調や透過率等の色特性は、連結基Aや他の発色部位の影響を受けず、単量体と同様の色を保持することができる。なお、耐熱性の点からは、Aがシロキサン結合を有しないことが好ましく、Si(ケイ素原子)を有しないことがより好ましい。
 Aにおいて、少なくともNと直接結合する末端に飽和脂肪族炭化水素基を有する脂肪族炭化水素基は、Nと直接結合する末端の炭素原子がπ結合を有しなければ、直鎖、分岐又は環状のいずれであってもよく、末端以外の炭素原子が不飽和結合を有していてもよく、置換基を有していてもよく、炭素鎖中に、O、S、Nが含まれていてもよい。例えば、カルボニル基、カルボキシ基、オキシカルボニル基、アミド基等が含まれていてもよく、水素原子が更にハロゲン原子等に置換されていてもよい。
 また、Aにおいて上記脂肪族炭化水素基を有する芳香族基は、少なくともNと直接結合する末端に飽和脂肪族炭化水素基を有する脂肪族炭化水素基を有する、単環又は多環芳香族基が挙げられ、置換基を有していてもよく、O、S、Nが含まれる複素環であってもよい。
 中でも、骨格の堅牢性の点から、Aは、環状の脂肪族炭化水素基又は芳香族基を含むことが好ましい。
 環状の脂肪族炭化水素基としては、中でも、有橋脂環式炭化水素基が、骨格の堅牢性の点から好ましい。有橋脂環式炭化水素基とは、脂肪族環内に橋かけ構造を有し、多環構造を有する多環状脂肪族炭化水素基をいい、例えば、ノルボルナン、ビシクロ[2,2,2]オクタン、アダマンタン等が挙げられる。有橋脂環式炭化水素基の中でも、ノルボルナンが好ましい。また、芳香族基としては、例えば、ベンゼン環、ナフタレン環を含む基が挙げられ、中でも、ベンゼン環を含む基が好ましい。例えば、Aが2価の有機基の場合、炭素数1~20の直鎖、分岐、又は環状のアルキレン基や、キシリレン基等の炭素数1~20のアルキレン基を2個置換した芳香族基等が挙げられる。
A in the general formula (I) is an a-valent organic group in which the carbon atom directly bonded to N (nitrogen atom) does not have a π bond, and the organic group is saturated at least at the terminal directly bonded to N. Represents an aliphatic hydrocarbon group having an aromatic hydrocarbon group, or an aromatic group having the aliphatic hydrocarbon group, and includes O (oxygen atom), S (sulfur atom), and N (nitrogen atom) in the carbon chain It may be. Since the carbon atom directly bonded to N does not have a π bond, the color characteristics such as the color tone and transmittance of the cationic coloring portion are not affected by the linking group A and other coloring portions, Similar colors can be retained. From the viewpoint of heat resistance, A preferably does not have a siloxane bond, and more preferably does not have Si (silicon atom).
In A, an aliphatic hydrocarbon group having a saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group at the terminal directly bonded to N is linear, branched or cyclic unless the terminal carbon atom directly bonded to N has a π bond. The carbon atom other than the terminal may have an unsaturated bond, may have a substituent, and the carbon chain contains O, S, and N. Also good. For example, a carbonyl group, a carboxy group, an oxycarbonyl group, an amide group or the like may be contained, and a hydrogen atom may be further substituted with a halogen atom or the like.
The aromatic group having an aliphatic hydrocarbon group in A is a monocyclic or polycyclic aromatic group having an aliphatic hydrocarbon group having a saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group at the terminal directly bonded to N. And may have a substituent, and may be a heterocyclic ring containing O, S, and N.
Especially, it is preferable that A contains a cyclic | annular aliphatic hydrocarbon group or an aromatic group from the point of the robustness of frame | skeleton.
Among the cyclic aliphatic hydrocarbon groups, a bridged alicyclic hydrocarbon group is preferable from the viewpoint of skeleton fastness. The bridged alicyclic hydrocarbon group means a polycyclic aliphatic hydrocarbon group having a bridged structure in the aliphatic ring and having a polycyclic structure, for example, norbornane, bicyclo [2,2,2]. Examples include octane and adamantane. Among the bridged alicyclic hydrocarbon groups, norbornane is preferable. Moreover, as an aromatic group, the group containing a benzene ring and a naphthalene ring is mentioned, for example, Among these, the group containing a benzene ring is preferable. For example, when A is a divalent organic group, a linear, branched or cyclic alkylene group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or an aromatic group substituted with two alkylene groups having 1 to 20 carbon atoms such as a xylylene group Etc.
 一般式(I)における価数aは、カチオンを構成する発色性カチオン部位の数であり、aは2以上の整数である。本発明の色材においては、カチオンの価数aが2以上であるため、耐熱性に優れている。aの上限は特に限定されないが、製造の容易性の点から、aが4以下であることが好ましく、3以下であることがより好ましい。 The valence a in the general formula (I) is the number of chromogenic cation sites constituting the cation, and a is an integer of 2 or more. In the color material of the present invention, since the valence a of the cation is 2 or more, it has excellent heat resistance. The upper limit of a is not particularly limited, but a is preferably 4 or less, and more preferably 3 or less, from the viewpoint of ease of production.
 R~Rにおけるアルキル基は、特に限定されない。例えば、炭素数1~20の直鎖又は分岐状アルキル基等が挙げられ、中でも、炭素数が1~8の直鎖又は分岐のアルキル基であることが好ましく、炭素数が1~5の直鎖又は分岐のアルキル基であることが、輝度及び耐熱性の点から、より好ましい。中でも、R~Rにおけるアルキル基がエチル基又はメチル基であることが特に好ましい。アルキル基が有してもよい置換基としては、特に限定されないが、例えば、アリール基、ハロゲン原子、水酸基等が挙げられ、置換されたアルキル基としては、ベンジル基等が挙げられる。
 R~Rにおけるアリール基は、特に限定されない。例えば、フェニル基、ナフチル基等が挙げられる。アリール基が有してもよい置換基としては、例えばアルキル基、ハロゲン原子等が挙げられる。
 中でも化学的安定性の点からR~Rとしては、各々独立に、水素原子、炭素数1~5のアルキル基、フェニル基、又は、RiiとRiii、RivとRが結合してピロリジン環、ピペリジン環、モルホリン環を形成していることが好ましい。
The alkyl group for R i to R v is not particularly limited. Examples thereof include straight-chain or branched alkyl groups having 1 to 20 carbon atoms. Among them, straight-chain or branched alkyl groups having 1 to 8 carbon atoms are preferable, and straight chain having 1 to 5 carbon atoms. A chain or branched alkyl group is more preferable from the viewpoint of luminance and heat resistance. Of these, the alkyl group in R i to R v is particularly preferably an ethyl group or a methyl group. The substituent that the alkyl group may have is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include an aryl group, a halogen atom, and a hydroxyl group, and examples of the substituted alkyl group include a benzyl group.
The aryl group in R i to R v is not particularly limited. For example, a phenyl group, a naphthyl group, etc. are mentioned. Examples of the substituent that the aryl group may have include an alkyl group and a halogen atom.
Among these, from the viewpoint of chemical stability, R i to R v are each independently a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, a phenyl group, or R ii and R iii , or R iv and R v. Thus, it is preferable to form a pyrrolidine ring, a piperidine ring, or a morpholine ring.
 R~Rはそれぞれ独立に上記構造をとることができるが、中でも、色純度の点からRが水素原子であることが好ましく、さらに製造および原料調達の容易さの点からRii~Rがすべて同一であることがより好ましい。 R i to R v can each independently have the above-described structure, and among these, R i is preferably a hydrogen atom from the viewpoint of color purity, and R ii to R ii from the viewpoint of ease of production and raw material procurement. More preferably, R v are all the same.
 Arにおける2価の芳香族基は特に限定されない。Arにおける芳香族基としては、Aにおける芳香族基に挙げられたものと同様のものとすることができる。
 Arは炭素数が6~20の芳香族基であることが好ましく、炭素数が10~14の縮合多環式炭素環からなる芳香族基がより好ましい。中でも、構造が単純で原料が安価である点からフェニレン基やナフチレン基であることがより好ましい。
The divalent aromatic group in Ar 1 is not particularly limited. As the aromatic group for Ar 1, the same aromatic groups as those described for the aromatic group for A can be used.
Ar 1 is preferably an aromatic group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably an aromatic group composed of a condensed polycyclic carbocycle having 10 to 14 carbon atoms. Among these, a phenylene group or a naphthylene group is more preferable because the structure is simple and the raw material is inexpensive.
 1分子内に複数あるR~R及びArは、同一であっても異なっていてもよい。R~R及びArの組み合わせにより、所望の色に調整することができる。 A plurality of R i to R v and Ar 1 in one molecule may be the same or different. The combination of R i to R v and Ar 1 can be adjusted to a desired color.
 一般式(I)で表される色材において、アニオン部(Bc-)は、少なくともタングステンを含み、モリブデンを含んでいてもよいc価のポリ酸アニオンを表す。 In the coloring material represented by the general formula (I), the anion portion (B c− ) represents a c-valent polyacid anion containing at least tungsten and optionally containing molybdenum.
 一般式(I)で表される色材におけるポリ酸アニオンは、上記のアニオンを1種単独で、又は2種以上組み合わせて用いることができ、2種以上組み合わせて用いる場合には、ポリ酸アニオン全体におけるタングステンとモリブデンとの比が90:10~100:0であることが耐熱性と耐光性の点から好ましい。 The polyacid anion in the colorant represented by the general formula (I) can be used alone or in combination of two or more of the above-mentioned anions. The overall ratio of tungsten to molybdenum is preferably 90:10 to 100: 0 from the viewpoint of heat resistance and light resistance.
 一般式(I)におけるbはカチオンの数を、dは分子会合体中のアニオンの数を示し、b及びdは1以上の整数を表す。bが2以上の場合、分子会合体中に複数あるカチオンは、1種単独であっても、2種以上が組み合わされていてもよい。また、dが2以上の場合、分子会合体中に複数あるアニオンは、1種単独であっても、2種以上が組み合わされていてもよく、有機アニオンと無機アニオンを組み合わせて用いることもできる。 In general formula (I), b represents the number of cations, d represents the number of anions in the molecular aggregate, and b and d represent an integer of 1 or more. When b is 2 or more, a plurality of cations in the molecular aggregate may be one kind alone, or two or more kinds may be combined. When d is 2 or more, the anion present in the molecular aggregate may be a single anion or a combination of two or more, and an organic anion and an inorganic anion may be used in combination. .
 一般式(I)におけるeは、0又は1の整数である。e=0はトリアリールメタン骨格を表し、e=1はキサンテン骨格を表す。複数あるeは同一であっても異なっていてもよい。すなわち、例えば、トリアリールメタン骨格のみ、又は、キサンテン骨格のみを複数有するカチオン部であってもよく、1分子内に、トリアリールメタン骨格とキサンテン骨格の両方を含むカチオン部であってもよい。色純度の点からは、同一骨格のみを有するアニオン部であることが好ましい。一方、トリアリールメタン骨格とキサンテン骨格の両方を含むカチオン部とすることにより、一般式(I)で表される色材は、所望の色に調整することができる。 E in the general formula (I) is an integer of 0 or 1. e = 0 represents a triarylmethane skeleton, and e = 1 represents a xanthene skeleton. A plurality of e may be the same or different. That is, for example, it may be a cation moiety having only a triarylmethane skeleton or a plurality of xanthene skeletons, or may be a cation moiety containing both a triarylmethane skeleton and a xanthene skeleton in one molecule. From the viewpoint of color purity, an anion portion having only the same skeleton is preferable. On the other hand, the color material represented by the general formula (I) can be adjusted to a desired color by using a cation portion including both a triarylmethane skeleton and a xanthene skeleton.
 本発明においては、一般式(I)で表される色材におけるeが0、即ち、下記一般式(I’)で表される色材を用いることが、所望の色に調整しやすい点からより好ましい。 In the present invention, e in the color material represented by the general formula (I) is 0, that is, the use of the color material represented by the following general formula (I ′) is easy to adjust to a desired color. More preferred.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018
(一般式(I’)中の各符号は、前記一般式(I)と同様である。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018
(The symbols in general formula (I ′) are the same as those in general formula (I).)
 一般式(I)で表される色材の製造方法は、特に限定されない。例えば、国際公開第2012/144520号パンフレットに記載の製造方法により得ることができる。 The method for producing the color material represented by the general formula (I) is not particularly limited. For example, it can be obtained by the production method described in International Publication No. 2012/144520 pamphlet.
 本発明において色材は、1種単独で又は2種以上を組み合わせて用いることができる。
本発明において色材は、輝度及びコントラストを向上する点から、キサンテン骨格を有するレーキ色材、トリアリールメタン骨格を有するレーキ色材、及び、キサンテン骨格を有する染料より選択される1種以上を含むことが好ましく、前記一般式(I)で表されるレーキ色材、前記キサンテン系染料を含むレーキ色材、及びこれらの組み合わせより選択される1種以上が、特に好適に用いられる。
In the present invention, the color materials can be used singly or in combination of two or more.
In the present invention, the color material includes at least one selected from a lake color material having a xanthene skeleton, a lake color material having a triarylmethane skeleton, and a dye having a xanthene skeleton from the viewpoint of improving luminance and contrast. It is preferable that at least one selected from a lake color material represented by the general formula (I), a lake color material containing the xanthene dye, and a combination thereof is particularly preferably used.
 本発明に用いられる色材の平均一次粒径としては、カラーフィルタの着色層とした場合に、所望の発色が可能なものであればよく、特に限定されず、用いる色材の種類によっても異なるが、10nm以上200nm以下の範囲内であることが好ましく、15nm以上150nm以下であることがより好ましい。色材の平均一次粒径が上記範囲であることにより、本発明に係る色材分散液を用いて製造されたカラーフィルタを備えた表示装置を高コントラストで、かつ高品質なものとすることができる。 The average primary particle size of the color material used in the present invention is not particularly limited as long as it can produce a desired color when it is used as a color layer of a color filter, and varies depending on the type of color material used. Is preferably in the range of 10 nm to 200 nm, more preferably 15 nm to 150 nm. When the average primary particle diameter of the color material is in the above range, the display device including the color filter manufactured using the color material dispersion according to the present invention has high contrast and high quality. it can.
 本発明に用いられる、色材は、再結晶法、ソルベントソルトミリング法等の公知の方法にて製造することができる。また、市販の色材を微細化処理して用いても良い。 The color material used in the present invention can be produced by a known method such as a recrystallization method or a solvent salt milling method. Further, a commercially available color material may be used after being refined.
[光重合性化合物]
 本発明の感光性着色樹脂組成物において用いられる光重合性化合物は、従来公知のもの中から適宜選択すればよく、特に限定されず、通常、エチレン性不飽和二重結合を2つ以上有する化合物が好適に用いられ、特にアクリロイル基又はメタクリロイル基を2つ以上有する、多官能(メタ)アクリレートであることが好ましい。
 このような多官能(メタ)アクリレートとしては、従来公知のものの中から適宜選択して用いればよい。具体例としては、例えば、特開2013-029832号公報に記載のもの等が挙げられる。
[Photopolymerizable compound]
The photopolymerizable compound used in the photosensitive colored resin composition of the present invention may be appropriately selected from conventionally known compounds, and is not particularly limited. Usually, a compound having two or more ethylenically unsaturated double bonds Is preferably used, and is particularly preferably a polyfunctional (meth) acrylate having two or more acryloyl groups or methacryloyl groups.
Such polyfunctional (meth) acrylate may be appropriately selected from conventionally known ones. Specific examples include those described in JP2013-029832A.
 これらの多官能(メタ)アクリレートは1種を単独で用いてもよく、2種以上を組み合わせて用いてもよい。また、本発明のカラーフィルタ用感光性着色樹脂組成物に優れた光硬化性(高感度)が要求される場合には、多官能モノマーが、重合可能な二重結合を3つ(三官能)以上有するものであるものが好ましく、3価以上の多価アルコールのポリ(メタ)アクリレート類やそれらのジカルボン酸変性物が好ましく、具体的には、トリメチロールプロパントリ(メタ)アクリレート、ペンタエリスリトールトリ(メタ)アクリレート、ペンタエリスリトールトリ(メタ)アクリレートのコハク酸変性物、ペンタエリスリトールテトラ(メタ)アクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールテトラ(メタ)アクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールペンタ(メタ)アクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールペンタ(メタ)アクリレートのコハク酸変性物、ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサ(メタ)アクリレート等が好ましい。 These polyfunctional (meth) acrylates may be used alone or in combination of two or more. When the photosensitive colored resin composition for color filter of the present invention requires excellent photocurability (high sensitivity), the polyfunctional monomer has three polymerizable double bonds (trifunctional). Preferred are poly (meth) acrylates of polyhydric alcohols having three or more valences and their dicarboxylic acid-modified products, specifically, trimethylolpropane tri (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol tris. (Meth) acrylate, succinic acid modified product of pentaerythritol tri (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol tetra (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol tetra (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol penta (meth) ) Succinic acid modified product of acrylate, dipen Hexa (meth) acrylate are preferable.
[開始剤]
 本発明の感光性着色樹脂組成物において用いられる開始剤としては、特に制限はなく、従来知られている各種開始剤の中から、1種又は2種以上を組み合わせて用いることができる。
[Initiator]
There is no restriction | limiting in particular as an initiator used in the photosensitive coloring resin composition of this invention, From the conventionally known various initiators, it can be used 1 type or in combination of 2 or more types.
 開始剤としては、芳香族ケトン類、ベンゾインエーテル類、ハロメチルオキサジアゾール化合物、α-アミノケトン、ビイミダゾール類、N,N-ジメチルアミノベンゾフェノン、ハロメチル-S-トリアジン系化合物、チオキサントン等を挙げることができる。開始剤の具体例としては、ベンゾフェノン、4,4’-ビスジエチルアミノベンゾフェノン、4-メトキシ-4’-ジメチルアミノベンゾフェノン等の芳香族ケトン類、ベンゾインメチルエーテル等のベンゾインエーテル類、エチルベンゾイン等のベンゾイン、2-(o-クロロフェニル)-4,5-フェニルイミダゾール2量体等のビイミダゾール類、2-トリクロロメチル-5-(p-メトキシスチリル)-1,3,4-オキサジアゾール等のハロメチルオキサジアゾール化合物、2-(4-ブトキシ-ナフト-1-イル)-4,6-ビス-トリクロロメチル-S-トリアジン等のハロメチル-S-トリアジン系化合物、2,2-ジメトキシ-1,2-ジフェニルエタン-1-オン、2-メチル-1-〔4-(メチルチオ)フェニル〕-2-モルフォリノプロパノン、1,2-ベンジル-2-ジメチルアミノ-1-(4-モルフォリノフェニル)-ブタノン-1,1-ヒドロキシ-シクロヘキシル-フェニルケトン、ベンジル、ベンゾイル安息香酸、ベンゾイル安息香酸メチル、4-ベンゾイル-4’-メチルジフェニルサルファイド、ベンジルメチルケタール、ジメチルアミノベンゾエート、p-ジメチルアミノ安息香酸イソアミル、2-n-ブトキシエチル-4-ジメチルアミノベンゾエート、2-クロロチオキサントン、2,4-ジエチルチオキサントン、2,4-ジメチルチオキサントン、イソプロピルチオキサントン、4-ベンゾイル-メチルジフェニルサルファイド、1-ヒドロキシ-シクロヘキシル-フェニルケトン、2-ベンジル-2-(ジメチルアミノ)-1-[4-(4-モルフォリニル)フェニル]-1-ブタノン、2-(ジメチルアミノ)-2-[(4-メチルフェニル)メチル]-1-[4-(4-モルフォリニル)フェニル]-1-ブタノン、α-ジメトキシ-α-フェニルアセトフェノン、フェニルビス(2,4,6-トリメチルベンゾイル)フォスフィンオキサイド、2-メチル-1-[4-(メチルチオ)フェニル]-2-(4-モルフォリニル)-1-プロパノンなどが挙げられる。
 中でも、2-メチル-1-[4-(メチルチオ)フェニル]-2-モルフォリノプロパン-1-オン、2-ベンジル-2-(ジメチルアミノ)-1-(4-モルフォリノフェニル)-1-ブタノン、4,4’-ビス(ジエチルアミノ)ベンゾフェノン、ジエチルチオキサントンが好ましく用いられる。更に2-メチル-1-[4-(メチルチオ)フェニル]-2-モルフォリノプロパン-1-オンのようなα-アミノアセトフェノン系開始剤とジエチルチオキサントンのようなチオキサン系開始剤を組み合わせることが感度調整、水染みを抑制し、現像耐性が向上する点から好ましい。
 α-アミノアセトフェノン系開始剤とチオキサン系開始剤を用いる場合のこれらの合計含有量は、感光性着色樹脂組成物の固形分全量に対して、5質量%以上15質量%以下が好ましい。開始剤量が15質量%以下であれば製造プロセス中の昇華物が低減するため好ましい。開始剤量が5質量%以上であると現像耐性が向上する。
Initiators include aromatic ketones, benzoin ethers, halomethyl oxadiazole compounds, α-amino ketones, biimidazoles, N, N-dimethylaminobenzophenone, halomethyl-S-triazine compounds, thioxanthone, etc. Can do. Specific examples of the initiator include aromatic ketones such as benzophenone, 4,4′-bisdiethylaminobenzophenone and 4-methoxy-4′-dimethylaminobenzophenone, benzoin ethers such as benzoin methyl ether, and benzoin such as ethylbenzoin. , Biimidazoles such as 2- (o-chlorophenyl) -4,5-phenylimidazole dimer, halo such as 2-trichloromethyl-5- (p-methoxystyryl) -1,3,4-oxadiazole Methyloxadiazole compounds, halomethyl-S-triazine compounds such as 2- (4-butoxy-naphth-1-yl) -4,6-bis-trichloromethyl-S-triazine, 2,2-dimethoxy-1, 2-diphenylethane-1-one, 2-methyl-1- [4- (methylthio) phenyl] -2 Morpholinopropanone, 1,2-benzyl-2-dimethylamino-1- (4-morpholinophenyl) -butanone-1,1-hydroxy-cyclohexyl-phenyl ketone, benzyl, benzoylbenzoic acid, methyl benzoylbenzoate, 4 -Benzoyl-4'-methyldiphenyl sulfide, benzylmethyl ketal, dimethylaminobenzoate, isoamyl p-dimethylaminobenzoate, 2-n-butoxyethyl-4-dimethylaminobenzoate, 2-chlorothioxanthone, 2,4-diethylthioxanthone 2,4-dimethylthioxanthone, isopropylthioxanthone, 4-benzoyl-methyldiphenyl sulfide, 1-hydroxy-cyclohexyl-phenyl ketone, 2-benzyl-2- (dimethylamino) -1- 4- (4-morpholinyl) phenyl] -1-butanone, 2- (dimethylamino) -2-[(4-methylphenyl) methyl] -1- [4- (4-morpholinyl) phenyl] -1-butanone, α-dimethoxy-α-phenylacetophenone, phenylbis (2,4,6-trimethylbenzoyl) phosphine oxide, 2-methyl-1- [4- (methylthio) phenyl] -2- (4-morpholinyl) -1- For example, propanone.
Among them, 2-methyl-1- [4- (methylthio) phenyl] -2-morpholinopropan-1-one, 2-benzyl-2- (dimethylamino) -1- (4-morpholinophenyl) -1- Butanone, 4,4′-bis (diethylamino) benzophenone, and diethylthioxanthone are preferably used. Further, the sensitivity is obtained by combining an α-aminoacetophenone initiator such as 2-methyl-1- [4- (methylthio) phenyl] -2-morpholinopropan-1-one with a thioxan initiator such as diethylthioxanthone. It is preferable from the viewpoint of suppressing adjustment and water stain and improving development resistance.
When the α-aminoacetophenone initiator and the thioxan initiator are used, the total content thereof is preferably 5% by mass or more and 15% by mass or less based on the total solid content of the photosensitive colored resin composition. An initiator amount of 15% by mass or less is preferable because sublimates during the production process are reduced. When the initiator amount is 5% by mass or more, development resistance is improved.
 本発明において、開始剤は、線幅調整のマージンを確保できる点から、オキシム系開始剤を含むことが好ましく、オキシムエステル系光開始剤を含むことがより好ましい。
 当該オキシムエステル系光開始剤としては、分解物によるカラーフィルタ用着色樹脂組成物の汚染や装置の汚染を低減する点から、中でも、芳香環を有するものが好ましく、芳香環を含む縮合環を有するものがより好ましく、ベンゼン環とヘテロ環を含む縮合環を有することがさらに好ましい。
 オキシムエステル系光開始剤としては、特開2000-80068号公報、特開2001-233842号公報、特表2010-527339、特表2010-527338、特開2013-041153等に記載のオキシムエステル系光開始剤等が挙げられる。
In the present invention, the initiator preferably contains an oxime-based initiator, and more preferably contains an oxime ester-based photoinitiator, from the viewpoint that a margin for adjusting the line width can be secured.
As the oxime ester-based photoinitiator, those having an aromatic ring are preferable from the viewpoint of reducing contamination of the colored resin composition for color filters and degradation of the apparatus due to decomposition products, and having condensed rings including aromatic rings. More preferred are those having a condensed ring containing a benzene ring and a heterocycle.
Examples of the oxime ester photoinitiator include oxime ester light described in JP-A No. 2000-80068, JP-A No. 2001-233842, JP-T 2010-527339, JP-T 2010-527338, JP-A 2013-041153, and the like. An initiator etc. are mentioned.
 本発明に用いられる当該オキシムエステル系光開始剤としては、中でもアリールラジカル、特にフェニルラジカルを発生するオキシムエステル系光開始剤を用いることが好ましく、更にアルキルラジカル、特にメチルラジカルを発生するオキシムエステル系光開始剤を用いることが、感度が高く、潜在性酸化防止剤と組み合わせることで線幅の減少が小さく、耐溶剤性、現像耐性、が優れる点から好ましい。アルキルラジカルは、フェニルラジカルと比べてラジカル移動が活性化し易いことが推定される。アルキルラジカルを発生するオキシムエステル系光開始剤としては、エタノン,1-[9-エチル-6-(2-メチルベンゾイル)-9H-カルバゾール-3-イル]-,1-(o-アセチルオキシム)(商品名:イルガキュアOXE-02、BASF製)、メタノン,[8-[[(アセチルオキシ)イミノ][2-(2,2,3,3-テトラフルオロプロポキシ)フェニル]メチル]-11-(2-エチルヘキシル)-11H-ベンゾ[a]カルバゾール-5-イル]-,(2,4,6-トリメチルフェニル)(商品名:イルガキュアOXE-03、BASF製)、エタノン,1-[9-エチル-6-(1,3-ジオキソラン,4-(2-メトキシフェノキシ)-9H-カルバゾール-3-イル]-,1-(o-アセチルオキシム)(商品名ADEKA OPT-N-1919、ADEKA社製)、メタノン,(9-エチル-6-ニトロ-9H-カルバゾール-3-イル)[4-(2-メトキシ-1-メチルエトキシ-2-メチルフェニル]-,o-アセチルオキシム(商品名アデカアークルズNCI-831、ADEKA社製)、1-プロパノン,3-シクロペンチル-1-[9-エチル-6-(2-メチルベンゾイル)-9H-カルバゾール-3-イル]-,1-(o-アセチルオキシム)(商品名TR-PBG-304、常州強力電子新材料社製)、1-プロパノン,3-シクロペンチル-1-[2-(2-ピリミジニルチオ)-9H-カルバゾール-3-イル]-,1-(o-アセチルオキシム)(商品名TR-PBG-314、常州強力電子新材料社製)、エタノン,2-シクロヘキシル-1-[2-(2-ピリミジニルオキシ)-9H-カルバゾール-3-イル]-,1-(o-アセチルオキシム)(商品名TR-PBG-326、常州強力電子新材料社製)、エタノン,2-シクロヘキシル-1-[2-(2-ピリミジニルチオ)-9H-カルバゾール-3-イル]-,1-(o-アセチルオキシム)(商品名TR-PBG-331、常州強力電子新材料社製)、1-オクタノン,1-[4-[3-[1-[(アセチルオキシ)イミノ]エチル]-6-[4-[(4,6-ジメチル-2-ピリミジニル)チオ]-2-メチルベンゾイル]-9H-カルバゾール-9-イル]フェニル]-,1-(o-アセチルオキシム)(商品名:EXTA-9、ユニオンケミカル製);更に、ジフェニルスルフィド骨格を有するオキシムエステル系光開始剤として、アデカアークルズNCI-930(ADEKA社製)、TR-PBG-3057(常州強力電子新材料社製)等が挙げられる。
 また、フェニルラジカルを発生する開始剤として、具体例としては、イルガキュアOXE-01(BASF製)等が挙げられる。
The oxime ester photoinitiator used in the present invention is preferably an oxime ester photoinitiator that generates an aryl radical, particularly a phenyl radical, and more preferably an oxime ester type that generates an alkyl radical, particularly a methyl radical. It is preferable to use a photoinitiator because it has high sensitivity, and when combined with a latent antioxidant, the reduction in line width is small, and solvent resistance and development resistance are excellent. It is presumed that the alkyl radical is more easily activated by radical movement than the phenyl radical. Examples of oxime ester photoinitiators that generate alkyl radicals include ethanone, 1- [9-ethyl-6- (2-methylbenzoyl) -9H-carbazol-3-yl]-, 1- (o-acetyloxime) (Product name: Irgacure OXE-02, manufactured by BASF), Methanone, [8-[[(Acetyloxy) imino] [2- (2,2,3,3-tetrafluoropropoxy) phenyl] methyl] -11- ( 2-ethylhexyl) -11H-benzo [a] carbazol-5-yl]-, (2,4,6-trimethylphenyl) (trade name: Irgacure OXE-03, manufactured by BASF), ethanone, 1- [9-ethyl -6- (1,3-Dioxolane, 4- (2-methoxyphenoxy) -9H-carbazol-3-yl]-, 1- (o-acetyloxime) ADEKA OPT-N-1919, manufactured by ADEKA), methanone, (9-ethyl-6-nitro-9H-carbazol-3-yl) [4- (2-methoxy-1-methylethoxy-2-methylphenyl]- , O-acetyloxime (trade name Adeka Arcles NCI-831, manufactured by ADEKA), 1-propanone, 3-cyclopentyl-1- [9-ethyl-6- (2-methylbenzoyl) -9H-carbazole-3- Yl]-, 1- (o-acetyloxime) (trade name TR-PBG-304, manufactured by Changzhou Power Electronics New Materials), 1-propanone, 3-cyclopentyl-1- [2- (2-pyrimidinylthio)- 9H-carbazol-3-yl]-, 1- (o-acetyloxime) (trade name TR-PBG-314, manufactured by Changzhou Power Electronics New Materials Co., Ltd.), Ethanone, 2 Cyclohexyl-1- [2- (2-pyrimidinyloxy) -9H-carbazol-3-yl]-, 1- (o-acetyloxime) (trade name TR-PBG-326, manufactured by Changzhou Power Electronics New Materials Co., Ltd.), Etanone, 2-cyclohexyl-1- [2- (2-pyrimidinylthio) -9H-carbazol-3-yl]-, 1- (o-acetyloxime) (trade name TR-PBG-331, Changzhou Power Electronics New Material 1) -octanone, 1- [4- [3- [1-[(acetyloxy) imino] ethyl] -6- [4-[(4,6-dimethyl-2-pyrimidinyl) thio] -2 -Methylbenzoyl] -9H-carbazol-9-yl] phenyl]-, 1- (o-acetyloxime) (trade name: EXTA-9, manufactured by Union Chemical); Oxime ester-based photoinitiator, (manufactured by ADEKA Corporation), ADEKA arc LUZ NCI-930, and the like TR-PBG-3057 (Changzhou made strong electron new materials Co.).
Specific examples of the initiator that generates a phenyl radical include Irgacure OXE-01 (manufactured by BASF).
 当該オキシムエステル光開始剤としては、中でも、ジフェニルスルフィド骨格を有するオキシムエステル系光開始剤を用いることが、カルバゾール骨格を有する場合に比べて輝度が向上する点から好ましい。
 また、オキシム系開始剤を少なくとも2種含むことは、感度が向上する点から好ましい。また、オキシム系開始剤を少なくとも2種含むことは、現像耐性を向上し、水染み発生抑制効果を高くする点で好ましい。オキシム系開始剤を少なくとも2種含むと、それぞれの開始剤の吸収する波長が異なるために、露光時の光をそれぞれの吸収波長において効果的に使えるためだからと推定される。
 なお、水染みとは、アルカリ現像性を高くする成分を用いると、アルカリ現像後、純水でリンスした後に、水が染みたような跡が発生することをいう。このような水染みは、ポストベーク後に消えるので製品としては問題がないが、現像後にパターニング面の外観検査において、ムラ異常として検出されてしまい、正常品と異常品の区別がつかないという問題が生じる。そのため、外観検査において検査装置の検査感度を下げると、結果として最終的なカラーフィルタ製品の歩留まり低下を引き起こし、問題となる。
As the oxime ester photoinitiator, it is preferable to use an oxime ester photoinitiator having a diphenyl sulfide skeleton from the viewpoint of improving luminance as compared with the case having a carbazole skeleton.
Moreover, it is preferable from the point which a sensitivity improves that at least 2 sorts of oxime system initiators are included. Further, the inclusion of at least two oxime-based initiators is preferable in terms of improving the development resistance and enhancing the effect of suppressing the occurrence of water stains. When at least two kinds of oxime initiators are included, the wavelengths absorbed by the respective initiators are different, so that it is presumed that the light at the time of exposure can be used effectively at the respective absorption wavelengths.
In addition, water stain means that, when a component that enhances alkali developability is used, a trace of water stain is generated after rinsing with pure water after alkali development. Such a water stain disappears after post-baking, so there is no problem as a product. Arise. Therefore, if the inspection sensitivity of the inspection apparatus is lowered in the appearance inspection, the yield of the final color filter product is lowered as a result, which becomes a problem.
 また、オキシムエステル系光開始剤に、3級アミン構造を有する光開始剤を組み合わせて用いることが、感度向上の点から、好ましい。3級アミン構造を有する光開始剤は、分子内に酸素クエンチャーである3級アミン構造を有するため、開始剤から発生したラジカルが酸素により失活し難く、感度を向上させることができるからである。上記3級アミン構造を有する光開始剤の市販品としては、例えば、2-メチル-1-(4-メチルチオフェニル)-2-モルフォリノプロパン-1-オン(例えばイルガキュア907、BASF社製)、2-ベンジル-2-(ジメチルアミノ)-1-(4-モルフォリノフェニル)-1-ブタノン(例えばイルガキュア369、BASF社製)、4,4’-ビス(ジエチルアミノ)ベンゾフェノン(例えば、ハイキュアABP、川口薬品製)などが挙げられる。 In addition, it is preferable to use a photoinitiator having a tertiary amine structure in combination with the oxime ester photoinitiator from the viewpoint of improving sensitivity. Since the photoinitiator having a tertiary amine structure has a tertiary amine structure that is an oxygen quencher in the molecule, radicals generated from the initiator are hardly deactivated by oxygen, and sensitivity can be improved. is there. Examples of commercially available photoinitiators having the tertiary amine structure include 2-methyl-1- (4-methylthiophenyl) -2-morpholinopropan-1-one (for example, Irgacure 907, manufactured by BASF), 2-benzyl-2- (dimethylamino) -1- (4-morpholinophenyl) -1-butanone (eg Irgacure 369, manufactured by BASF), 4,4′-bis (diethylamino) benzophenone (eg Hycure ABP, Kawaguchi Pharmaceutical).
 また、感度の調節が容易となる点からは、オキシムエステル系光開始剤に、α-アミノアルキルフェノン系開始剤とを組み合わせることが好ましく、中でもアルキルラジカル系オキシムエステル化合物と、α-アミノアルキルフェノン系開始剤とを組み合せることがより好ましい。 From the viewpoint of easy sensitivity adjustment, it is preferable to combine an oxime ester photoinitiator with an α-aminoalkylphenone initiator, and among them, an alkyl radical oxime ester compound and an α-aminoalkylphenone. It is more preferable to combine with a system initiator.
[溶剤]
 本発明に用いられる溶剤としては、感光性着色樹脂組成物中の各成分とは反応せず、これらを溶解もしくは分散可能な有機溶剤であればよく、特に限定されない。溶剤は単独もしくは2種以上組み合わせて使用することができる。
 溶剤の具体例としては、例えば、メチルアルコール、エチルアルコール、N-プロピルアルコール、i-プロピルアルコール、メトキシアルコール、エトキシアルコールなどのアルコール系溶剤;メトキシエトキシエタノール、エトキシエトキシエタノールなどのカルビトール系溶剤;酢酸エチル、酢酸ブチル、メトキシプロピオン酸メチル、メトキシプロピオン酸エチル、エトキシプロピオン酸エチル、乳酸エチル、ヒドロキシプロピオン酸メチル、ヒドロキシプロピオン酸エチル、n-ブチルアセテート、イソブチルアセテート、酪酸イソブチル、酪酸n-ブチル、乳酸エチル、シクロヘキサノールアセテートなどのエステル系溶剤;アセトン、メチルエチルケトン、メチルイソブチルケトン、シクロヘキサノン、2-ヘプタノンなどのケトン系溶剤;メトキシエチルアセテート、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート、3-メトキシ-3-メチル-1-ブチルアセテート、3-メトキシブチルアセテート、エトキシエチルアセテートなどのグリコールエーテルアセテート系溶剤;メトキシエトキシエチルアセテート、エトキシエトキシエチルアセテート、ブチルカルビトールアセテート(BCA)などのカルビトールアセテート系溶剤;プロピレングリコールジアセテート、1,3-ブチレングリコールジアセテート等のジアセテート類;エチレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、エチレングリコールモノエチルエーテル、エチレングリコールジメチルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールジメチルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールモノエチルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールジエチルエーテル、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、ジプロピレングリコールジメチルエーテルなどのグリコールエーテル系溶剤;N,N-ジメチルホルムアミド、N,N-ジメチルアセトアミド、N-メチルピロリドンなどの非プロトン性アミド溶剤;γ-ブチロラクトンなどのラクトン系溶剤;テトラヒドロフランなどの環状エーテル系溶剤;ベンゼン、トルエン、キシレン、ナフタレンなどの不飽和炭化水素系溶剤;N-ヘプタン、N-ヘキサン、N-オクタンなどの飽和炭化水素系溶剤;トルエン、キシレン等の芳香族炭化水素類などの有機溶剤が挙げられる。これらの溶剤の中ではグリコールエーテルアセテート系溶剤、カルビトールアセテート系溶剤、グリコールエーテル系溶剤、エステル系溶剤が他の成分の溶解性の点で好適に用いられる。中でも、本発明に用いる溶剤としては、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、ブチルカルビトールアセテート(BCA)、3-メトキシ-3-メチル-1-ブチルアセテート、エトキシプロピオン酸エチル、乳酸エチル、及び、3-メトキシブチルアセテートよりなる群から選択される1種以上であることが、他の成分の溶解性や塗布適性の点から好ましい。
[solvent]
The solvent used in the present invention is not particularly limited as long as it is an organic solvent that does not react with each component in the photosensitive colored resin composition and can dissolve or disperse them. A solvent can be used individually or in combination of 2 or more types.
Specific examples of the solvent include alcohol solvents such as methyl alcohol, ethyl alcohol, N-propyl alcohol, i-propyl alcohol, methoxy alcohol, and ethoxy alcohol; carbitol solvents such as methoxyethoxyethanol and ethoxyethoxyethanol; Ethyl acetate, butyl acetate, methyl methoxypropionate, ethyl methoxypropionate, ethyl ethoxypropionate, ethyl lactate, methyl hydroxypropionate, ethyl hydroxypropionate, n-butyl acetate, isobutyl acetate, isobutyl butyrate, n-butyl butyrate, Ester solvents such as ethyl lactate and cyclohexanol acetate; acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, cyclohexanone, 2-heptanone, etc. Tone solvents; glycol ether acetate solvents such as methoxyethyl acetate, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, 3-methoxy-3-methyl-1-butyl acetate, 3-methoxybutyl acetate, ethoxyethyl acetate; methoxyethoxyethyl acetate, ethoxy Carbitol acetate solvents such as ethoxyethyl acetate and butyl carbitol acetate (BCA); diacetates such as propylene glycol diacetate and 1,3-butylene glycol diacetate; ethylene glycol monomethyl ether, ethylene glycol monoethyl ether, ethylene Glycol dimethyl ether, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, diethylene glycol monoethyl ether, diethylene Glycol ether solvents such as glycol diethyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether and dipropylene glycol dimethyl ether; aprotic amide solvents such as N, N-dimethylformamide, N, N-dimethylacetamide and N-methylpyrrolidone; γ-butyrolactone, etc. Lactone solvents; cyclic ether solvents such as tetrahydrofuran; unsaturated hydrocarbon solvents such as benzene, toluene, xylene, and naphthalene; saturated hydrocarbon solvents such as N-heptane, N-hexane, and N-octane; Examples include organic solvents such as aromatic hydrocarbons such as xylene. Among these solvents, glycol ether acetate solvents, carbitol acetate solvents, glycol ether solvents, and ester solvents are preferably used from the viewpoint of solubility of other components. Among them, the solvent used in the present invention includes propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, butyl carbitol acetate (BCA), 3-methoxy-3-methyl-1-butyl acetate, ethyl ethoxypropionate, ethyl lactate, In addition, one or more selected from the group consisting of 3-methoxybutyl acetate is preferable from the viewpoints of solubility of other components and coating suitability.
 本発明においては、他の成分の溶解性と塗布適性の点から、中でも、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテートを含み、更に、ジエチレングリコールエチルメチルエーテル、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、3-メトキシ-3メチル-1-ブタノール、3-メトキシ-3-メチル-1-ブチルアセテート、及び、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテートより選択される1種以上を含む混合溶剤を用いることが好ましい。当該混合溶剤における、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテートの含有割合は、溶剤全量に対して、70質量%以上99質量%以下であることが好ましく、80質量%以上99質量%以下であることがより好ましい。 In the present invention, from the viewpoint of solubility of other components and application suitability, among them, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate is included, and further, diethylene glycol ethyl methyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, 3-methoxy-3-methyl-1-butanol. It is preferable to use a mixed solvent containing one or more selected from 3-methoxy-3-methyl-1-butyl acetate and propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate. The content ratio of propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate in the mixed solvent is preferably 70% by mass to 99% by mass and more preferably 80% by mass to 99% by mass with respect to the total amount of the solvent.
[分散剤]
 本発明の感光性着色樹脂組成物において、前記色材は、分散剤により溶剤中に分散させて用いられることが好ましい。本発明において分散剤は、従来公知の分散剤の中から適宜選択して用いることができる。また分散剤は、1種単独で、又は、2種以上を組み合わせて用いることができる。分散剤としては、例えば、カチオン系、アニオン系、ノニオン系、両性、シリコーン系、フッ素系等の界面活性剤を使用できる。界面活性剤の中でも、均一に、微細に分散し得る点から、高分子分散剤が好ましい。
[Dispersant]
In the photosensitive colored resin composition of the present invention, the colorant is preferably used by being dispersed in a solvent with a dispersant. In the present invention, the dispersant can be appropriately selected from conventionally known dispersants. Moreover, a dispersing agent can be used individually by 1 type or in combination of 2 or more types. Examples of the dispersant that can be used include cationic, anionic, nonionic, amphoteric, silicone, and fluorine surfactants. Among the surfactants, a polymer dispersant is preferable because it can be uniformly and finely dispersed.
 高分子分散剤としては、例えば、ポリアクリル酸エステル等の不飽和カルボン酸エステルの(共)重合体類;ポリアクリル酸等の不飽和カルボン酸の(共)重合体の(部分)アミン塩、(部分)アンモニウム塩や(部分)アルキルアミン塩類;水酸基含有ポリアクリル酸エステル等の水酸基含有不飽和カルボン酸エステルの(共)重合体やそれらの変性物;ポリウレタン類;不飽和ポリアミド類;ポリシロキサン類;長鎖ポリアミノアミドリン酸塩類;ポリエチレンイミン誘導体(ポリ(低級アルキレンイミン)と遊離カルボキシ基含有ポリエステルとの反応により得られるアミドやそれらの塩基);ポリアリルアミン誘導体(ポリアリルアミンと、遊離のカルボキシ基を有するポリエステル、ポリアミド又はエステルとアミドの共縮合物(ポリエステルアミド)の3種の化合物の中から選ばれる1種以上の化合物とを反応させて得られる反応生成物)等が挙げられる。 Examples of the polymer dispersant include (co) polymers of unsaturated carboxylic acid esters such as polyacrylic acid esters; (partial) amine salts of (co) polymers of unsaturated carboxylic acid such as polyacrylic acid; (Partial) ammonium salts and (partial) alkylamine salts; (co) polymers of hydroxyl group-containing unsaturated carboxylic acid esters such as hydroxyl group-containing polyacrylates and their modified products; polyurethanes; unsaturated polyamides; polysiloxanes Long chain polyaminoamide phosphates; polyethyleneimine derivatives (amides and their bases obtained by reaction of poly (lower alkylene imines) with free carboxy group-containing polyesters); polyallylamine derivatives (polyallylamine and free carboxy) Polyester, polyamide or ester-amide co-condensate having a group The reaction product obtained by reacting one or more compound selected from among the three compounds of the polyesteramide)) or the like.
 高分子分散剤としては、中でも、前記色材を好適に分散でき、分散安定性が良好である点から、主鎖又は側鎖に窒素原子を含み、アミン価を有する高分子分散剤が好ましく、中でも、3級アミンを有する繰り返し単位を含む重合体からなる高分子分散剤であることが、分散性が良好で塗膜形成時に異物を析出せず、輝度及びコントラストを向上する点から好ましい。
 3級アミンを有する繰り返し単位は、前記色材と親和性を有する部位である。3級アミンを有する繰り返し単位を含む重合体は、通常、溶剤と親和性を有する部位となる繰り返し単位を含む。3級アミンを有する繰り返し単位を含む重合体としては、中でも、3級アミンを有する繰り返し単位からなるブロック部と、溶剤親和性を有するブロック部とを有するブロック共重合体であることが、耐熱性に優れ、高輝度となる塗膜を形成可能となる点で好ましい。
As the polymer dispersant, among them, a polymer dispersant containing a nitrogen atom in the main chain or side chain and having an amine value is preferable from the viewpoint that the colorant can be suitably dispersed and the dispersion stability is good. Among these, a polymer dispersant composed of a polymer containing a repeating unit having a tertiary amine is preferable from the viewpoint of good dispersibility, no precipitation of foreign matters when forming a coating film, and improvement of luminance and contrast.
The repeating unit having a tertiary amine is a site having an affinity for the colorant. The polymer containing a repeating unit having a tertiary amine usually contains a repeating unit that becomes a site having an affinity for a solvent. As a polymer containing a repeating unit having a tertiary amine, a block copolymer having a block part composed of a repeating unit having a tertiary amine and a block part having a solvent affinity is particularly preferable. It is preferable at the point which can form the coating film which is excellent in it and becomes high-intensity.
 3級アミンを有する繰り返し単位は、3級アミンを有していれば良く、該3級アミンは、ブロックポリマーの側鎖に含まれていても、主鎖を構成するものであっても良い。
 中でも、側鎖に3級アミンを有する繰り返し単位であることが好ましく、中でも、主鎖骨格が熱分解し難く、耐熱性が高い点から、下記一般式(2)で表される繰り返し単位(a)を含むことが、より好ましい。
The repeating unit having a tertiary amine only needs to have a tertiary amine, and the tertiary amine may be contained in the side chain of the block polymer or may constitute the main chain.
Among them, a repeating unit having a tertiary amine in the side chain is preferable, and among them, the repeating unit (a) represented by the following general formula (2) is preferable because the main chain skeleton is hardly thermally decomposed and has high heat resistance. ) Is more preferable.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
(一般式(2)中、R41は、水素原子又はメチル基、Lは、2価の連結基、R42は、炭素数1~8のアルキレン基、-[CH(R45)-CH(R46)-O]-CH(R45)-CH(R46)-又は-[(CH-O]-(CH-で示される2価の有機基、R43及びR44は、それぞれ独立に、置換されていてもよい鎖状又は環状の炭化水素基を表すか、R43及びR44が互いに結合して環状構造を形成する。R45及びR46は、それぞれ独立に水素原子又はメチル基である。
 xは1~18の整数、yは1~5の整数、zは1~18の整数を示す。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
(In the general formula (2), R 41 is a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, L is a divalent linking group, R 42 is an alkylene group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, — [CH (R 45 ) —CH ( A divalent organic group represented by R 46 ) —O] x —CH (R 45 ) —CH (R 46 ) — or — [(CH 2 ) y —O] z — (CH 2 ) y —, R 43 and R 44, each independently, represent a substituted optionally also be a chain or cyclic hydrocarbon group, .R 45 and R 46 R 43 and R 44 form a ring structure by bonding with each other is, Each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
x represents an integer of 1 to 18, y represents an integer of 1 to 5, and z represents an integer of 1 to 18. )
 上記一般式(2)の2価の連結基Lとしては、例えば、炭素数1~10のアルキレン基、アリーレン基、-CONH-基、-COO-基、炭素数1~10のエーテル基(-R’-OR”-:R’及びR”は、各々独立にアルキレン基)及びこれらの組み合わせ等が挙げられる。中でも、得られたポリマーの耐熱性や溶剤として好適に用いられるプロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート(PGMEA)に対する溶解性、また比較的安価な材料である点から、Lは、-COO-基又は-CONH-基であることが好ましい。 Examples of the divalent linking group L in the general formula (2) include, for example, an alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, an arylene group, a —CONH— group, a —COO— group, an ether group having a carbon number of 1 to 10 (— R′—OR ″ —: R ′ and R ″ are each independently an alkylene group) and combinations thereof. Among them, L is a —COO— group or a —CONH— group because of the heat resistance of the polymer obtained, solubility in propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (PGMEA) which is suitably used as a solvent, and a relatively inexpensive material. It is preferably a group.
 上記一般式(2)の2価の有機基R42は、炭素数1~8のアルキレン基、-[CH(R45)-CH(R46)-O]-CH(R45)-CH(R46)-又は-[(CH-O]-(CH-である。上記炭素数1~8のアルキレン基は、直鎖状、分岐状のいずれであってもよい。
 R45及びR46は、それぞれ独立に水素原子又はメチル基である。
 上記R42としては、分散性の点から、炭素数1~8のアルキレン基が好ましく、中でも、R42がメチレン基、エチレン基、プロピレン基、ブチレン基であることが更に好ましく、メチレン基及びエチレン基がより好ましい。
The divalent organic group R 42 in the general formula (2) is an alkylene group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, — [CH (R 45 ) —CH (R 46 ) —O] x —CH (R 45 ) —CH (R 46 ) — or — [(CH 2 ) y —O] z — (CH 2 ) y —. The alkylene group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms may be linear or branched.
R 45 and R 46 are each independently a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
R 42 is preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms from the viewpoint of dispersibility, and among them, R 42 is more preferably a methylene group, an ethylene group, a propylene group, or a butylene group. Groups are more preferred.
 上記一般式(2)のR43、R44が互いに結合して形成する環状構造としては、例えば5~7員環の含窒素複素環単環又はこれらが2個縮合してなる縮合環が挙げられる。該含窒素複素環は芳香性を有さないものが好ましく、飽和環であればより好ましい。 Examples of the cyclic structure formed by combining R 43 and R 44 in the general formula (2) with each other include a 5- to 7-membered nitrogen-containing heterocyclic monocycle or a condensed ring formed by condensing two of these. It is done. The nitrogen-containing heterocycle preferably has no aromaticity, more preferably a saturated ring.
 上記一般式(2)で表される繰り返し単位としては、ジメチルアミノエチル(メタ)アクリレート、ジメチルアミノプロピル(メタ)アクリレート、ジエチルアミノエチル(メタ)アクリレート、ジエチルアミノプロピル(メタ)アクリレート等のアルキル基置換アミノ基含有(メタ)アクリレート等、ジメチルアミノエチル(メタ)アクリルアミド、ジメチルアミノプロピル(メタ)アクリルアミドなどのアルキル基置換アミノ基含有(メタ)アクリルアミド等が挙げられる。中でも分散性、及び分散安定性が向上する点でジメチルアミノエチル(メタ)アクリレート、ジエチルアミノエチル(メタ)アクリレート、ジメチルアミノプロピル(メタ)アクリルアミドを好ましく用いることができる。 Examples of the repeating unit represented by the general formula (2) include alkyl group-substituted amino such as dimethylaminoethyl (meth) acrylate, dimethylaminopropyl (meth) acrylate, diethylaminoethyl (meth) acrylate, and diethylaminopropyl (meth) acrylate. Examples include group-containing (meth) acrylates, alkyl group-substituted amino group-containing (meth) acrylamides such as dimethylaminoethyl (meth) acrylamide, dimethylaminopropyl (meth) acrylamide, and the like. Of these, dimethylaminoethyl (meth) acrylate, diethylaminoethyl (meth) acrylate, and dimethylaminopropyl (meth) acrylamide can be preferably used in terms of improving dispersibility and dispersion stability.
 前記3級アミンを有する繰り返し単位からなるブロック部において、一般式(2)で表される構成単位は、3個以上含まれることが好ましい。中でも、分散性、及び分散安定性を向上する点から、3~100個含むことが好ましく、3~50個含むことがより好ましく、更に3~30個含むことがより好ましい。 In the block part composed of repeating units having a tertiary amine, it is preferable that three or more structural units represented by the general formula (2) are included. Among these, from the viewpoint of improving dispersibility and dispersion stability, it is preferably 3 to 100, more preferably 3 to 50, and even more preferably 3 to 30.
 前記3級アミンを有する繰り返し単位からなるブロック部(以下、Aブロックと記載することがある。)と溶剤親和性を有するブロック部(以下、Bブロックと記載することがある。)を有するブロック共重合体における、溶剤親和性を有するブロック部としては、溶剤親和性を良好にし、分散性を向上する点から、前記一般式(2)で表される構成単位を有さず、前記一般式(2)と共重合可能な構成単位を有する溶剤親和性ブロック部を有する。本発明においてブロック共重合体の各ブロックの配置は特に限定されず、例えば、ABブロック共重合体、ABAブロック共重合体、BABブロック共重合体等とすることができる。中でも、分散性に優れる点で、ABブロック共重合体、又はABAブロック共重合体が好ましい。
 前記一般式(2)と共重合可能な構成単位としては、色材の分散性及び分散安定性を向上させながら、耐熱性も向上する点から、下記一般式(8)で表される構成単位であることが好ましい。
A block having a block part (hereinafter sometimes referred to as A block) composed of a repeating unit having a tertiary amine and a block part having solvent affinity (hereinafter sometimes referred to as B block). As a block part having solvent affinity in the polymer, from the point of improving solvent affinity and improving dispersibility, the polymer does not have the structural unit represented by the general formula (2), and the general formula ( 2) It has a solvent-affinity block part having a structural unit copolymerizable with. In the present invention, the arrangement of each block of the block copolymer is not particularly limited, and for example, an AB block copolymer, an ABA block copolymer, a BAB block copolymer, and the like can be used. Among these, an AB block copolymer or an ABA block copolymer is preferable in terms of excellent dispersibility.
The structural unit copolymerizable with the general formula (2) is a structural unit represented by the following general formula (8) from the viewpoint of improving the heat resistance while improving the dispersibility and dispersion stability of the coloring material. It is preferable that
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020
(一般式(8)中、R47は、水素原子又はメチル基、Aは、直接結合又は2価の連結基、R48は、炭素数1~18のアルキル基、炭素数2~18のアルケニル基、アラルキル基、アリール基、-[CH(R49)-CH(R50)-O]-R51又は-[(CH-O]-R51で示される1価の基である。R49及びR50は、それぞれ独立に水素原子又はメチル基であり、R51は、水素原子、あるいは炭素数1~18のアルキル基、炭素数2~18のアルケニル基、アラルキル基、アリール基、-CHO、-CHCHO、又は-CHCOOR52で示される1価の基であり、R52は水素原子又は炭素数1~5の直鎖状、分岐状、又は環状のアルキル基である。xは1~18の整数、yは1~5の整数、zは1~18の整数を示す。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020
(In the general formula (8), R 47 is a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, A is a direct bond or a divalent linking group, R 48 is an alkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms, and an alkenyl group having 2 to 18 carbon atoms. Group, an aralkyl group, an aryl group, a monovalent group represented by — [CH (R 49 ) —CH (R 50 ) —O] x —R 51 or — [(CH 2 ) y —O] z —R 51 R 49 and R 50 are each independently a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and R 51 is a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms, an alkenyl group having 2 to 18 carbon atoms, an aralkyl group, A monovalent group represented by an aryl group, —CHO, —CH 2 CHO, or —CH 2 COOR 52 , wherein R 52 is a hydrogen atom or a linear, branched, or cyclic alkyl having 1 to 5 carbon atoms. X is an integer from 1 to 18, and y is an integer from 1 to 5. The number z represents an integer of 1-18.
 上記一般式(8)の2価の連結基Aとしては、前記一般式(2)におけるLと同様のものとすることができ、得られたポリマーの耐熱性や溶剤として好適に用いられるプロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセタート(PGMEA)に対する溶解性、また比較的安価な材料である点から、Aは、-COO-基であることが好ましい。 The divalent linking group A in the general formula (8) can be the same as L in the general formula (2), and propylene glycol which is suitably used as the heat resistance and solvent of the obtained polymer. From the viewpoint of solubility in monomethyl ether acetate (PGMEA) and relatively inexpensive material, A is preferably a —COO— group.
 R48において、上記炭素数1~18のアルキル基は、直鎖状、分岐状、環状のいずれであってもよい。
 上記炭素数2~18のアルケニル基は、直鎖状、分岐状、環状のいずれであってもよい。
 中でも、分散性、基板密着性の点からR48はメチル基、各種ブチル基、各種ヘキシル基、ベンジル基、シクロヘキシル基、ヒドロキシエチル基が好ましい。
In R 48 , the alkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms may be linear, branched or cyclic.
The alkenyl group having 2 to 18 carbon atoms may be linear, branched or cyclic.
Among these, R 48 is preferably a methyl group, various butyl groups, various hexyl groups, benzyl groups, cyclohexyl groups, or hydroxyethyl groups from the viewpoint of dispersibility and substrate adhesion.
 置換基を有していてもよいアリール基としては、フェニル基、ビフェニル基、ナフチル基、トリル基、キシリル基等が挙げられる。アリール基の炭素数は、6~24が好ましく、更に6~12が好ましい。
 置換基を有していてもよいアラルキル基としては、ベンジル基、フェネチル基、ナフチルメチル基、ビフェニルメチル基等が挙げられる。アラルキル基の炭素数は、7~20が好ましく、更に7~14が好ましい。
 アリール基やアラルキル基等の芳香環の置換基としては、炭素数1~4の直鎖状、分岐状のアルキル基の他、アルケニル基、ニトロ基、ハロゲン原子などを挙げることができる。
Examples of the aryl group which may have a substituent include a phenyl group, a biphenyl group, a naphthyl group, a tolyl group, and a xylyl group. The aryl group preferably has 6 to 24 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms.
Examples of the aralkyl group which may have a substituent include a benzyl group, a phenethyl group, a naphthylmethyl group, and a biphenylmethyl group. The aralkyl group preferably has 7 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 7 to 14 carbon atoms.
Examples of the substituent of the aromatic ring such as an aryl group and an aralkyl group include an alkenyl group, a nitro group, and a halogen atom in addition to a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
 また、上記R51は水素原子、あるいは置換基を有してもよい、炭素数1~18のアルキル基、炭素数2~18のアルケニル基、アラルキル基、アリール基、-CHO、-CHCHO、又は-CHCOOR52で示される1価の基であり、R52は水素原子又は炭素数1~5の直鎖状、分岐状、又は環状のアルキル基である。
 上記R51で示される1価の基において、有してもよい置換基としては、例えば炭素数1~4の直鎖状、分岐状又は環状のアルキル基、F、Cl、Brなどのハロゲン原子などを挙げることができる。
 上記R51のうちの炭素数1~18のアルキル基、及び炭素数2~18のアルケニル基、アラルキル基、アリール基は、前記R48で示したとおりである。
 上記R48において、x、y及びzは、前記一般式(2)におけるR42と同様である。
R 51 may be a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms, alkenyl group having 2 to 18 carbon atoms, aralkyl group, aryl group, —CHO, —CH 2 CHO. Or a monovalent group represented by —CH 2 COOR 52 , wherein R 52 is a hydrogen atom or a linear, branched or cyclic alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms.
In the monovalent group represented by R 51 , examples of the substituent that may be included include linear, branched or cyclic alkyl groups having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and halogen atoms such as F, Cl and Br. And so on.
The alkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms and the alkenyl group, aralkyl group and aryl group having 2 to 18 carbon atoms in R 51 are the same as those described for R 48 above.
In the R 48 , x, y and z are the same as R 42 in the general formula (2).
 溶剤親和性のブロック部を構成する構成単位の数は、色材分散性が向上する範囲で適宜調整すればよい。中でも、溶剤親和性部位と色材親和性部位が効果的に作用し、色材の分散性を向上する点から、溶剤親和性のブロック部を構成する構成単位の数は、10以上200以下であることが好ましく、10以上100以下であることがより好ましく、更に10以上70以下であることがより好ましい。 The number of structural units constituting the solvent affinity block may be appropriately adjusted within a range where the colorant dispersibility is improved. Among them, the number of structural units constituting the solvent-affinity block part is 10 or more and 200 or less from the viewpoint that the solvent-affinity part and the colorant affinity part act effectively and improve the dispersibility of the colorant. Preferably, it is 10 or more and 100 or less, more preferably 10 or more and 70 or less.
 溶剤親和性のブロック部は、溶剤親和性部位として機能するように選択されれば良く、溶剤親和性のブロック部を構成する繰り返し単位は1種からなるものであっても良いし、2種以上の繰り返し単位を含んでいてもよい。
 本発明の分散剤として用いられるブロック共重合体において、一般式(2)で表される構成単位のユニット数mと、溶剤親和性のブロック部を構成する他の構成単位のユニット数nの比率m/nとしては、0.01以上1以下の範囲内であることが好ましく、0.05以上0.7以下の範囲内であることが、色材の分散性、分散安定性の点からより好ましい。  
The solvent-affinity block part may be selected so as to function as a solvent-affinity site, and the repeating unit constituting the solvent-affinity block part may be composed of one kind, or two or more kinds. The repeating unit may be included.
In the block copolymer used as the dispersant of the present invention, the ratio between the number m of the structural unit represented by the general formula (2) and the number n of other structural units constituting the solvent-affinity block unit m / n is preferably in the range of 0.01 to 1 and more preferably in the range of 0.05 to 0.7 from the viewpoint of the dispersibility and dispersion stability of the color material. preferable.
 また、中でも、本発明において分散剤は、前記一般式(2)で表される構造を含みアミン価が40mgKOH/g以上120mgKOH/g以下である重合体が、分散性が良好で塗膜形成時に異物を析出せず、輝度及びコントラストを向上する点から好ましい。
 アミン価が上記範囲内であることにより、粘度の経時安定性や耐熱性に優れると共に、アルカリ現像性や、溶剤再溶解性にも優れている。本発明において、分散剤のアミン価は、分散性および分散安定性の点から、中でも、アミン価が80mgKOH/g以上であることが好ましく、90mgKOH/g以上であることがより好ましい。一方、溶剤再溶解性の点から、分散剤のアミン価は、110mgKOH/g以下であることが好ましく、105mgKOH/g以下であることがより好ましい。
 アミン価は、試料1g中に含まれるアミン成分を中和するのに要する過塩素酸と当量の水酸化カリウムのmg数をいい、JIS-K7237:1995に定義された方法により測定することができる。当該方法により測定した場合には、分散剤中の有機酸化合物と塩形成しているアミノ基であっても、通常、当該有機酸化合物が解離するため、分散剤として用いられるブロック共重合体そのもののアミン価を測定することができる。
In particular, in the present invention, the dispersant is a polymer having a structure represented by the general formula (2) and having an amine value of 40 mgKOH / g or more and 120 mgKOH / g or less. It is preferable from the viewpoint of improving luminance and contrast without depositing foreign matters.
When the amine value is within the above range, the viscosity is excellent in stability over time and heat resistance, and is also excellent in alkali developability and solvent resolubility. In the present invention, the amine value of the dispersant is preferably 80 mgKOH / g or more, more preferably 90 mgKOH / g or more, from the viewpoint of dispersibility and dispersion stability. On the other hand, from the viewpoint of solvent resolubility, the amine value of the dispersant is preferably 110 mgKOH / g or less, more preferably 105 mgKOH / g or less.
The amine value is the number of mg of potassium hydroxide equivalent to perchloric acid required to neutralize the amine component contained in 1 g of a sample, and can be measured by the method defined in JIS-K7237: 1995. . When measured by this method, even if it is an amino group that forms a salt with the organic acid compound in the dispersant, the organic acid compound usually dissociates, so that the block copolymer itself used as the dispersant is itself The amine value of can be measured.
 本発明に用いられる分散剤の酸価は、現像残渣の抑制効果の点から、下限としては、1mgKOH/g以上であることが好ましい。中でも、現像残渣の抑制効果がより優れる点から、分散剤の酸価は2mgKOH/g以上であることがより好ましい。また、本発明に用いられる分散剤の酸価は、現像密着性の悪化や溶剤再溶解性の悪化を防止できる点から、分散剤の酸価の上限としては、18mgKOH/g以下であることが好ましい。中でも、現像密着性、及び溶剤再溶解性が良好になる点から、分散剤の酸価は、16mgKOH/g以下であることがより好ましく、14mgKOH/g以下であることがさらにより好ましく、12mgKOH/g以下であることが特に好ましい。
 本発明に用いられる分散剤においては、塩形成前のブロック共重合体の酸価が1mgKOH/g以上であることが好ましく、2mgKOH/g以上であることがさらに好ましい。現像残渣の抑制効果が向上するからである。また、塩形成前のブロック共重合体の酸価の上限としては18mgKOH/g以下であることが好ましいが、16mgKOH/g以下であることがより好ましく、14mgKOH/g以下であることがさらにより好ましく、12mgKOH/g以下であることが特に好ましい。現像密着性、及び溶剤再溶解性が良好になるからである。
The acid value of the dispersant used in the present invention is preferably 1 mgKOH / g or more as a lower limit from the viewpoint of the effect of suppressing development residue. Among them, the acid value of the dispersant is more preferably 2 mgKOH / g or more from the viewpoint of more excellent development residue suppression effect. In addition, the acid value of the dispersant used in the present invention is 18 mgKOH / g or less as the upper limit of the acid value of the dispersant from the viewpoint of preventing deterioration in development adhesion and solvent resolubility. preferable. Among them, the acid value of the dispersant is more preferably 16 mgKOH / g or less, even more preferably 14 mgKOH / g or less, from the viewpoint that the development adhesiveness and the solvent re-solubility are good. It is particularly preferred that it is g or less.
In the dispersant used in the present invention, the acid value of the block copolymer before salt formation is preferably 1 mgKOH / g or more, and more preferably 2 mgKOH / g or more. This is because the effect of suppressing development residue is improved. The upper limit of the acid value of the block copolymer before salt formation is preferably 18 mgKOH / g or less, more preferably 16 mgKOH / g or less, and still more preferably 14 mgKOH / g or less. , 12 mgKOH / g or less is particularly preferable. This is because the development adhesiveness and the solvent resolubility are improved.
 色材濃度を高め、分散剤含有量が増加すると、相対的にバインダー量が減少することから、着色樹脂層が現像時に下地基板から剥離し易くなる。分散剤がカルボキシ基含有モノマー由来の構成単位を含むBブロックを含み、前記特定の酸価及びガラス転移温度を有することにより、現像密着性が向上する。酸価が高すぎると、現像性に優れるものの、極性が高すぎて却って現像時に剥離が生じ易くなると推定される。 When the colorant concentration is increased and the dispersant content is increased, the amount of the binder is relatively decreased, so that the colored resin layer is easily peeled off from the base substrate during development. When the dispersant contains a B block containing a structural unit derived from a carboxy group-containing monomer and has the specific acid value and glass transition temperature, the development adhesion is improved. If the acid value is too high, the developability is excellent, but it is presumed that the polarity is too high and peeling easily occurs during development.
 以上のことから、本発明において前記分散剤は、前記一般式(2)で表される構造を含みアミン価が40mgKOH/g以上120mgKOH/g以下である重合体であって、且つ、酸価が1mgKOH/g以上18mgKOH/g以下で、ガラス転移温度が30℃以上であることが、色材分散安定性に優れてコントラストを向上し、着色樹脂組成物とした際に、現像残渣の発生が抑制されながら、溶剤再溶解性に優れ、更に、高い現像密着性を有する点から好ましい。 From the above, in the present invention, the dispersant is a polymer having a structure represented by the general formula (2) and having an amine value of 40 mgKOH / g or more and 120 mgKOH / g or less, and an acid value. 1 mgKOH / g or more and 18 mgKOH / g or less and a glass transition temperature of 30 ° C. or more is excellent in colorant dispersion stability, improves contrast, and suppresses generation of development residue when a colored resin composition is obtained. However, it is preferable from the viewpoint of excellent solvent resolubility and high development adhesion.
 前記カルボキシ基含有モノマーとしては、一般式(2)で表される構成単位を有するモノマーと共重合可能で、不飽和二重結合とカルボキシ基を含有するモノマーを用いることができる。このようなモノマーとしては、例えば、(メタ)アクリル酸、ビニル安息香酸、マレイン酸、マレイン酸モノアルキルエステル、フマル酸、イタコン酸、クロトン酸、桂皮酸、アクリル酸ダイマーなどが挙げられる。また、2-ヒドロキシエチル(メタ)アクリレートなどの水酸基を有する単量体と無水マレイン酸や無水フタル酸、シクロヘキサンジカルボン酸無水物のような環状無水物との付加反応物、ω-カルボキシ-ポリカプロラクトンモノ(メタ)アクリレートなども利用できる。また、カルボキシ基の前駆体として無水マレイン酸、無水イタコン酸、無水シトラコン酸などの酸無水物基含有モノマーを用いてもよい。中でも、共重合性やコスト、溶解性、ガラス転移温度などの点から(メタ)アクリル酸が特に好ましい。 As the carboxy group-containing monomer, a monomer that can be copolymerized with a monomer having a structural unit represented by the general formula (2) and contains an unsaturated double bond and a carboxy group can be used. Examples of such monomers include (meth) acrylic acid, vinyl benzoic acid, maleic acid, maleic acid monoalkyl ester, fumaric acid, itaconic acid, crotonic acid, cinnamic acid, acrylic acid dimer, and the like. Also, an addition reaction product of a monomer having a hydroxyl group such as 2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate and a cyclic anhydride such as maleic anhydride, phthalic anhydride, or cyclohexanedicarboxylic anhydride, ω-carboxy-polycaprolactone Mono (meth) acrylates can also be used. Moreover, you may use acid anhydride group containing monomers, such as maleic anhydride, itaconic anhydride, and citraconic anhydride, as a precursor of a carboxy group. Among these, (meth) acrylic acid is particularly preferable from the viewpoints of copolymerizability, cost, solubility, glass transition temperature, and the like.
 塩形成前のブロック共重合体中、カルボキシ基含有モノマー由来の構成単位の含有割合は、ブロック共重合体の酸価が前記特定の酸価の範囲内になるように適宜設定すればよく、特に限定されないが、ブロック共重合体の全構成単位の合計質量に対して、0.05質量%以上4.5質量%以下であることが好ましく、0.07質量%以上3.7質量%以下であることがより好ましい。
 カルボキシ基含有モノマー由来の構成単位の含有割合が、前記下限値以上であることより、現像残渣の抑制効果が発現され、前記上限値以下であることより現像密着性の悪化や溶剤再溶解性の悪化を防止できる。
 なお、カルボキシ基含有モノマー由来の構成単位は、上記特定の酸価となればよく、1種からなるものであっても良いし、2種以上の構成単位を含んでいてもよい。
In the block copolymer before salt formation, the content ratio of the structural unit derived from the carboxy group-containing monomer may be appropriately set so that the acid value of the block copolymer is within the range of the specific acid value. Although it is not limited, it is preferable that it is 0.05 mass% or more and 4.5 mass% or less with respect to the total mass of all the structural units of a block copolymer, and is 0.07 mass% or more and 3.7 mass% or less. More preferably.
Since the content ratio of the structural unit derived from the carboxy group-containing monomer is not less than the lower limit value, the effect of suppressing the development residue is expressed, and since it is not more than the upper limit value, the development adhesiveness is deteriorated and the solvent resolubility is reduced. Deterioration can be prevented.
In addition, the structural unit derived from a carboxy group containing monomer should just become said specific acid value, may consist of 1 type, and may contain 2 or more types of structural units.
 前記ブロック共重合体において、前記Aブロックの構成単位のユニット数mと、前記Bブロックの構成単位のユニット数nの比率m/nとしては、0.05以上1.5以下の範囲内であることが好ましく、0.1以上1.0以下の範囲内であることが、色材の分散性、分散安定性の点からより好ましい。 In the block copolymer, the ratio m / n of the unit number m of the structural unit of the A block and the unit number n of the structural unit of the B block is in the range of 0.05 to 1.5. In view of the dispersibility and dispersion stability of the coloring material, it is more preferably within the range of 0.1 to 1.0.
 前記ブロック共重合体の重量平均分子量Mwは、特に限定されないが、色材分散性及び分散安定性を良好なものとする点から、1000以上20000以下であることが好ましく、2000以上15000以下であることがより好ましく、更に3000以上12000以下であることがより好ましい。
 ここで、重量平均分子量は(Mw)、ゲル・パーミエーション・クロマトグラフィー(GPC)により、標準ポリスチレン換算値として求める。なお、ブロック共重合体の原料となるマクロモノマーや塩型ブロック共重合体、グラフト共重合体についても、上記条件で行う。
The weight average molecular weight Mw of the block copolymer is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1000 or more and 20000 or less, and preferably 2000 or more and 15000 or less, from the viewpoint of improving the colorant dispersibility and dispersion stability. More preferably, it is more preferably 3000 or more and 12000 or less.
Here, the weight average molecular weight is determined as a standard polystyrene conversion value by (Mw) and gel permeation chromatography (GPC). The macromonomer, salt-type block copolymer, and graft copolymer that are the raw materials for the block copolymer are also subjected to the above conditions.
 上記ブロック共重合体の製造方法は、特に限定されない。公知の方法によってブロック共重合体を製造することができるが、中でもリビング重合法で製造することが好ましい。 The method for producing the block copolymer is not particularly limited. Although a block copolymer can be produced by a known method, it is preferable to produce it by a living polymerization method.
 このような3級アミンを有する繰り返し単位からなるブロック部と溶剤親和性を有するブロック部とを有するブロック共重合体の具体例としては、例えば、特許第4911253号公報に記載のブロック共重合体を好適なものとして挙げることができる。 As a specific example of a block copolymer having a block part composed of a repeating unit having a tertiary amine and a block part having a solvent affinity, for example, a block copolymer described in Japanese Patent No. 4911253 is used. It can be mentioned as a suitable thing.
 上記3級アミンを有する繰り返し単位を含む重合体を分散剤として用いて、前記色材を分散する場合には、色材100質量部に対して、当該3級アミンを有する繰り返し単位を含む重合体の含有量が15質量部以上300質量部以下であることが好ましく、20質量部以上250質量部以下であることがより好ましい。上記範囲内であれば分散性及び分散安定性に優れ、コントラストを向上する効果が高くなる。 In the case of dispersing the colorant using a polymer containing a repeating unit having a tertiary amine as a dispersant, the polymer containing a repeating unit having the tertiary amine with respect to 100 parts by mass of the coloring material. Is preferably 15 parts by mass or more and 300 parts by mass or less, and more preferably 20 parts by mass or more and 250 parts by mass or less. If it is in the said range, it is excellent in the dispersibility and dispersion stability, and the effect which improves a contrast becomes high.
 本発明においては、色材の分散性や分散安定性の点から、前記3級アミンを有する繰り返し単位を含む重合体中のアミノ基のうちの少なくとも一部と、有機酸化合物やハロゲン化炭化水素とが塩を形成したものを分散剤として用いても好ましい(以下、このような重合体を、塩型重合体と称することがある)。
 中でも、3級アミンを有する繰り返し単位を含む重合体がブロック共重合体であって、前記有機酸化合物がフェニルホスホン酸やフェニルホスフィン酸等の酸性有機リン化合物であることが、色材の分散性及び分散安定性に優れる点から好ましい。このような分散剤に用いられる有機酸化合物の具体例としては、例えば、特開2012-236882号公報等に記載の有機酸化合物が好適なものとして挙げられる。
 また、前記ハロゲン化炭化水素としては、臭化アリル、塩化ベンジル等のハロゲン化アリル及びハロゲン化アラルキルの少なくとも1種であることが、色材の分散性及び分散安定性に優れる点から好ましい。
In the present invention, from the viewpoint of dispersibility and dispersion stability of the coloring material, at least a part of the amino group in the polymer containing the repeating unit having the tertiary amine, an organic acid compound, and a halogenated hydrocarbon. It is also preferable to use a salt forming a salt as a dispersant (hereinafter, such a polymer may be referred to as a salt-type polymer).
Among them, the polymer containing a repeating unit having a tertiary amine is a block copolymer, and the organic acid compound is an acidic organic phosphorus compound such as phenylphosphonic acid or phenylphosphinic acid. And preferred from the viewpoint of excellent dispersion stability. Specific examples of the organic acid compound used for such a dispersant include, for example, organic acid compounds described in JP 2012-236882 A and the like.
The halogenated hydrocarbon is preferably at least one of allyl halides such as allyl bromide and benzyl chloride and aralkyl halides from the viewpoint of excellent dispersibility and dispersion stability of the coloring material.
[アルカリ可溶性樹脂]
 本発明におけるアルカリ可溶性樹脂は酸性基を有するものであり、バインダー樹脂として作用し、かつパターン形成する際に用いられるアルカリ現像液に可溶性であるものの中から、適宜選択して使用することができ、1種単独で、又は2種以上を組み合わせて用いることができる。
 本発明において、アルカリ可溶性樹脂とは、酸価が40mgKOH/g以上であることを目安にすることができる。
 本発明における好ましいアルカリ可溶性樹脂は、酸性基、通常カルボキシ基を有する樹脂であり、具体的には、カルボキシ基を有するアクリル系共重合体及びカルボキシ基を有するスチレン-アクリル系共重合体等のアクリル系樹脂、カルボキシ基を有するエポキシ(メタ)アクリレート樹脂等が挙げられる。これらの中で特に好ましいものは、側鎖にカルボキシ基を有するとともに、さらに側鎖にエチレン性不飽和基等の光重合性官能基を有するものである。光重合性官能基を含有することにより形成される硬化膜の膜強度が向上するからである。また、これらアクリル系共重合体及びスチレン-アクリル系共重合体等のアクリル系樹脂、並びにエポキシアクリレート樹脂は、2種以上混合して使用してもよい。
[Alkali-soluble resin]
The alkali-soluble resin in the present invention has an acidic group, can act as a binder resin, and can be used by appropriately selecting from those that are soluble in an alkali developer used when forming a pattern. One kind can be used alone, or two or more kinds can be used in combination.
In the present invention, the alkali-soluble resin can be based on an acid value of 40 mgKOH / g or more.
A preferred alkali-soluble resin in the present invention is a resin having an acidic group, usually a carboxy group, and specifically, acrylic resins such as an acrylic copolymer having a carboxy group and a styrene-acrylic copolymer having a carboxy group. And epoxy (meth) acrylate resins having a carboxy group. Among these, particularly preferred are those having a carboxy group in the side chain and further having a photopolymerizable functional group such as an ethylenically unsaturated group in the side chain. This is because the film strength of the cured film formed by containing the photopolymerizable functional group is improved. In addition, acrylic resins such as acrylic copolymers and styrene-acrylic copolymers, and epoxy acrylate resins may be used in combination.
 カルボキシ基を有する構成単位を有するアクリル系共重合体、及びカルボキシ基を有するスチレン-アクリル系共重合体等のアクリル系樹脂は、例えば、カルボキシ基含有エチレン性不飽和モノマー、及び必要に応じて共重合可能なその他のモノマーを、公知の方法により(共)重合して得られた(共)重合体である。
 カルボキシ基含有エチレン性不飽和モノマーとしては、例えば、(メタ)アクリル酸、ビニル安息香酸、マレイン酸、マレイン酸モノアルキルエステル、フマル酸、イタコン酸、クロトン酸、桂皮酸、アクリル酸ダイマーなどが挙げられる。また、2-ヒドロキシエチル(メタ)アクリレートなどの水酸基を有する単量体と無水マレイン酸や無水フタル酸、シクロヘキサンジカルボン酸無水物のような環状無水物との付加反応物、ω-カルボキシ-ポリカプロラクトンモノ(メタ)アクリレートなども利用できる。また、カルボキシ基の前駆体として無水マレイン酸、無水イタコン酸、無水シトラコン酸などの無水物含有モノマーを用いてもよい。中でも、共重合性やコスト、溶解性、ガラス転移温度などの点から(メタ)アクリル酸が特に好ましい。
An acrylic resin such as an acrylic copolymer having a constitutional unit having a carboxy group and a styrene-acrylic copolymer having a carboxy group includes, for example, a carboxy group-containing ethylenically unsaturated monomer and, if necessary, a copolymer. It is a (co) polymer obtained by (co) polymerizing other polymerizable monomers by a known method.
Examples of the carboxy group-containing ethylenically unsaturated monomer include (meth) acrylic acid, vinyl benzoic acid, maleic acid, maleic acid monoalkyl ester, fumaric acid, itaconic acid, crotonic acid, cinnamic acid, and acrylic acid dimer. It is done. Also, an addition reaction product of a monomer having a hydroxyl group such as 2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate and a cyclic anhydride such as maleic anhydride, phthalic anhydride, or cyclohexanedicarboxylic anhydride, ω-carboxy-polycaprolactone Mono (meth) acrylates can also be used. Moreover, you may use anhydride containing monomers, such as maleic anhydride, itaconic anhydride, and citraconic anhydride, as a precursor of a carboxy group. Among these, (meth) acrylic acid is particularly preferable from the viewpoints of copolymerizability, cost, solubility, glass transition temperature, and the like.
 アルカリ可溶性樹脂は、着色層の耐熱性、耐光性が優れる点から、更に炭化水素環を有することが好ましい。炭化水素環を有するアルカリ可溶性樹脂を用いることにより、得られた着色層の耐溶剤性、耐熱性、耐光性が向上し、特に着色層の膨潤が抑制されるとの知見を得た。作用については未解明であるが、着色層内に嵩高い炭化水素環が含まれることにより、着色層内における分子の動きが抑制される結果、塗膜の強度が高くなり溶剤による膨潤が抑制されるものと推定される。
 このような炭化水素環としては、置換基を有していてもよい環状の脂肪族炭化水素環、置換基を有していてもよい芳香族環、及びこれらの組み合わせが挙げられ、炭化水素環がカルボニル基、カルボキシ基、オキシカルボニル基、アミド基等の置換基を有していてもよい。中でも、脂肪族環を含む場合には、着色層の耐熱性や密着性が向上すると共に、得られた着色層の輝度が向上する。
 炭化水素環の具体例としては、シクロプロパン、シクロブタン、シクロペンタン、シクロヘキサン、ノルボルナン、トリシクロ[5.2.1.0(2,6)]デカン(ジシクロペンタン)、アダマンタン等の脂肪族炭化水素環;ベンゼン、ナフタレン、アントラセン、フェナントレン、フルオレン等の芳香族環;ビフェニル、ターフェニル、ジフェニルメタン、トリフェニルメタン、スチルベン等の鎖状多環や、下記化学式(9)に示されるカルド構造等が挙げられる。
The alkali-soluble resin preferably further has a hydrocarbon ring from the viewpoint of excellent heat resistance and light resistance of the colored layer. It was found that by using an alkali-soluble resin having a hydrocarbon ring, the solvent resistance, heat resistance, and light resistance of the obtained colored layer were improved, and in particular, swelling of the colored layer was suppressed. Although the action is unclear, the bulky hydrocarbon ring in the colored layer suppresses the movement of molecules in the colored layer, resulting in an increase in the strength of the coating and suppression of swelling by the solvent. It is estimated that.
Examples of such a hydrocarbon ring include a cyclic aliphatic hydrocarbon ring which may have a substituent, an aromatic ring which may have a substituent, and combinations thereof. May have a substituent such as a carbonyl group, a carboxy group, an oxycarbonyl group, or an amide group. Especially, when an aliphatic ring is included, while the heat resistance and adhesiveness of a colored layer improve, the brightness | luminance of the obtained colored layer improves.
Specific examples of the hydrocarbon ring include aliphatic hydrocarbons such as cyclopropane, cyclobutane, cyclopentane, cyclohexane, norbornane, tricyclo [5.2.1.0 (2,6)] decane (dicyclopentane), and adamantane. Rings: aromatic rings such as benzene, naphthalene, anthracene, phenanthrene, fluorene; chain polycycles such as biphenyl, terphenyl, diphenylmethane, triphenylmethane, stilbene, and cardo structures represented by the following chemical formula (9) It is done.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000021
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000021
 炭化水素環として、脂肪族環を含む場合には、着色層の耐熱性や密着性が向上すると共に、得られた着色層の輝度が向上する点から好ましい。
 また、前記化学式(9)に示されるカルド構造を含む場合には、着色層の硬化性が向上し、耐溶剤性(NMP膨潤抑制)が向上する点から特に好ましい。
When an aliphatic ring is included as the hydrocarbon ring, it is preferable from the viewpoint of improving the heat resistance and adhesion of the colored layer and improving the luminance of the obtained colored layer.
Moreover, when the cardo structure shown by the said Chemical formula (9) is included, it is especially preferable from the point which the sclerosis | hardenability of a colored layer improves and solvent resistance (NMP swelling suppression) improves.
 本発明で用いられるアルカリ可溶性樹脂において、カルボキシ基を有する構成単位とは別に、上記炭化水素環を有する構成単位を有するアクリル系共重合体を用いることが、各構成単位量を調整しやすく、上記炭化水素環を有する構成単位量を増加して当該構成単位が有する機能を向上させやすい点から好ましい。
 カルボキシ基を有する構成単位と、上記炭化水素環とを有するアクリル系共重合体は、前述の“共重合可能なその他のモノマー”として炭化水素環を有するエチレン性不飽和モノマーを用いることにより調製することができる。
 潜在性酸化防止剤と組み合わせる炭化水素環を有するエチレン性不飽和モノマーとしては、例えば、シクロヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート、ジシクロペンタニル(メタ)アクリレート、アダマンチル(メタ)アクリレート、イソボルニル(メタ)アクリレート、ベンジル(メタ)アクリレート、フェノキシエチル(メタ)アクリレート、スチレンなどが挙げられ、耐熱性、耐光性が優れる点から、シクロヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート、ジシクロペンタニル(メタ)アクリレート、アダマンチル(メタ)アクリレート、ベンジル(メタ)アクリレート、スチレンが好ましい。
In the alkali-soluble resin used in the present invention, it is easy to adjust the amount of each constituent unit by using an acrylic copolymer having a constituent unit having a hydrocarbon ring separately from the constituent unit having a carboxy group. This is preferable because the amount of the structural unit having a hydrocarbon ring is increased to easily improve the function of the structural unit.
The acrylic copolymer having a structural unit having a carboxy group and the hydrocarbon ring is prepared by using an ethylenically unsaturated monomer having a hydrocarbon ring as the above-mentioned “other monomer capable of copolymerization”. be able to.
Examples of the ethylenically unsaturated monomer having a hydrocarbon ring combined with a latent antioxidant include cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, dicyclopentanyl (meth) acrylate, adamantyl (meth) acrylate, isobornyl (meth) acrylate, benzyl Examples include (meth) acrylate, phenoxyethyl (meth) acrylate, and styrene. From the viewpoint of excellent heat resistance and light resistance, cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, dicyclopentanyl (meth) acrylate, adamantyl (meth) acrylate, benzyl (Meth) acrylate and styrene are preferred.
 本発明で用いられるアルカリ可溶性樹脂はまた、側鎖にエチレン性二重結合を有することが好ましい。エチレン性二重結合を有する場合には、カラーフィルタ製造時における樹脂組成物の硬化工程において、当該アルカリ可溶性樹脂同士、乃至、当該アルカリ可溶性樹脂と多官能モノマー等が架橋結合を形成し得る。
 アルカリ可溶性樹脂中に、エチレン性二重結合を導入する方法は、従来公知の方法から適宜選択すればよい。例えば、アルカリ可溶性樹脂が有するカルボキシ基に、分子内にエポキシ基とエチレン性二重結合とを併せ持つ化合物、例えばグリシジル(メタ)アクリレート等を付加させ、側鎖にエチレン性二重結合を導入する方法や、水酸基を有する構成単位を共重合体に導入しておいて、分子内にイソシアネート基とエチレン性二重結合とを備えた化合物を付加させ、側鎖にエチレン性二重結合を導入する方法などが挙げられる。
The alkali-soluble resin used in the present invention preferably has an ethylenic double bond in the side chain. In the case of having an ethylenic double bond, the alkali-soluble resins, or the alkali-soluble resin and the polyfunctional monomer can form a cross-linked bond in the curing step of the resin composition at the time of producing the color filter.
The method for introducing an ethylenic double bond into the alkali-soluble resin may be appropriately selected from conventionally known methods. For example, a method of introducing an ethylenic double bond into a side chain by adding a compound having both an epoxy group and an ethylenic double bond in the molecule, such as glycidyl (meth) acrylate, to the carboxy group of the alkali-soluble resin Or by introducing a structural unit having a hydroxyl group into a copolymer, adding a compound having an isocyanate group and an ethylenic double bond in the molecule, and introducing an ethylenic double bond into the side chain. Etc.
 本発明のアルカリ可溶性樹脂は、更にメチル(メタ)アクリレート、エチル(メタ)アクリレート等、エステル基を有する構成単位等の他の構成単位を含有していてもよい。エステル基を有する構成単位は、カラーフィルタ用着色樹脂組成物のアルカリ可溶性を抑制する成分として機能するだけでなく、溶剤に対する溶解性、さらには溶剤再溶解性を向上させる成分としても機能する。 The alkali-soluble resin of the present invention may further contain other structural units such as a structural unit having an ester group such as methyl (meth) acrylate and ethyl (meth) acrylate. The structural unit having an ester group not only functions as a component that suppresses alkali solubility of the colored resin composition for a color filter, but also functions as a component that improves the solubility in a solvent and further the solvent resolubility.
 本発明におけるアルカリ可溶性樹脂は、カルボキシ基を有する構成単位と、炭化水素環を有する構成単位とを有するアクリル系共重合体及びスチレン-アクリル系共重合体等のアクリル系樹脂であることが好ましく、カルボキシ基を有する構成単位と、炭化水素環を有する構成単位と、エチレン性二重結合を有する構成単位とを有するアクリル系共重合体及びスチレン-アクリル系共重合体等のアクリル系樹脂であることがより好ましい。 The alkali-soluble resin in the present invention is preferably an acrylic resin such as an acrylic copolymer and a styrene-acrylic copolymer having a structural unit having a carboxy group and a structural unit having a hydrocarbon ring, It is an acrylic resin such as an acrylic copolymer and a styrene-acrylic copolymer having a structural unit having a carboxy group, a structural unit having a hydrocarbon ring, and a structural unit having an ethylenic double bond. Is more preferable.
 アルカリ可溶性樹脂は、各構成単位の仕込み量を適宜調整することにより、所望の性能を有するアルカリ可溶性樹脂とすることができる。 The alkali-soluble resin can be made into an alkali-soluble resin having desired performance by appropriately adjusting the charged amount of each structural unit.
 カルボキシ基含有エチレン性不飽和モノマーの仕込み量は、良好なパターンが得られる点から、モノマー全量に対して5質量%以上であることが好ましく、10質量%以上であることがより好ましい。一方、現像後のパターン表面の膜荒れ等を抑制する点から、カルボキシ基含有エチレン性不飽和モノマーの仕込み量は、モノマー全量に対して50質量%以下であることが好ましく、40質量%以下であることがより好ましい。
 カルボキシ基含有エチレン性不飽和モノマーの割合が5質量%以上であれば、得られる塗膜のアルカリ現像液に対する溶解性が十分である。また、カルボキシ基含有エチレン性不飽和モノマーの割合が50質量%以下であれば、アルカリ現像液による現像時に、形成されたパターンの基板からの脱落やパターン表面の膜荒れを抑制できることが出来る。
The charging amount of the carboxy group-containing ethylenically unsaturated monomer is preferably 5% by mass or more and more preferably 10% by mass or more with respect to the total amount of the monomer from the viewpoint of obtaining a good pattern. On the other hand, from the viewpoint of suppressing film roughness on the pattern surface after development, the amount of the carboxy group-containing ethylenically unsaturated monomer is preferably 50% by mass or less, and 40% by mass or less, based on the total amount of monomers. More preferably.
When the proportion of the carboxy group-containing ethylenically unsaturated monomer is 5% by mass or more, the resulting coating film has sufficient solubility in an alkaline developer. Further, when the ratio of the carboxy group-containing ethylenically unsaturated monomer is 50% by mass or less, dropping of the formed pattern from the substrate and film roughness on the pattern surface can be suppressed during development with an alkali developer.
 また、アルカリ可溶性樹脂としてより好ましく用いられる、エチレン性二重結合を有する構成単位とを有するアクリル系共重合体及びスチレン-アクリル系共重合体等のアクリル系樹脂において、エポキシ基とエチレン性二重結合とを併せ持つ化合物はカルボキシ基含有エチレン性不飽和モノマーの仕込み量に対して、10質量%以上95質量%以下であることが好ましく、15質量%以上90質量%以下であることがより好ましい。 In addition, in an acrylic resin such as an acrylic copolymer having a structural unit having an ethylenic double bond and a styrene-acrylic copolymer, which is more preferably used as an alkali-soluble resin, an epoxy group and an ethylenic double bond are used. The compound having a bond is preferably 10% by mass or more and 95% by mass or less, and more preferably 15% by mass or more and 90% by mass or less, based on the charged amount of the carboxy group-containing ethylenically unsaturated monomer.
 カルボキシ基含有共重合体の好ましい重量平均分子量(Mw)は、好ましくは1,000以上50,000以下の範囲であり、さらに好ましくは3,000以上~20,000以下である。重量平均分子量(Mw)が1,000以上では硬化後のバインダー機能が優れ、また、50,000以内であるとアルカリ現像液による現像時にパターン形成が容易となる。
 なお、カルボキシ基含有共重合体の上記重量平均分子量(Mw)は、ポリスチレンを標準物質とし、THFを溶離液としてショウデックスGPCシステム-21H(Shodex GPC System-21H)により測定することができる。
The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the carboxy group-containing copolymer is preferably in the range of 1,000 to 50,000, and more preferably 3,000 to 20,000. When the weight average molecular weight (Mw) is 1,000 or more, the binder function after curing is excellent, and when the weight average molecular weight (Mw) is within 50,000, pattern formation is facilitated during development with an alkaline developer.
The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the carboxy group-containing copolymer can be measured by a Shodex GPC System-21H using polystyrene as a standard substance and THF as an eluent.
 カルボキシ基を有するエポキシ(メタ)アクリレート樹脂としては、特に限定されるものではないが、エポキシ化合物と不飽和基含有モノカルボン酸との反応物を酸無水物と反応させて得られるエポキシ(メタ)アクリレート化合物が適している。
 エポキシ化合物、不飽和基含有モノカルボン酸、及び酸無水物は、公知のものの中から適宜選択して用いることができる。カルボキシ基を有するエポキシ(メタ)アクリレート樹脂は、それぞれ1種単独で使用してもよいし、2種以上を併用してもよい。
Although it does not specifically limit as an epoxy (meth) acrylate resin which has a carboxy group, Epoxy (meth) obtained by making the reaction product of an epoxy compound and unsaturated group containing monocarboxylic acid react with an acid anhydride. Acrylate compounds are suitable.
The epoxy compound, unsaturated group-containing monocarboxylic acid, and acid anhydride can be appropriately selected from known ones. The epoxy (meth) acrylate resin having a carboxy group may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
 アルカリ可溶性樹脂は、現像液に用いるアルカリ水溶液に対する現像性(溶解性)の点から、酸価が50mgKOH/g以上のものを選択して用いることが好ましい。アルカリ可溶性樹脂は、現像液に用いるアルカリ水溶液に対する現像性(溶解性)の点、及び基板への密着性の点から、酸価が70mgKOH/g以上300mgKOH/g以下であることが好ましく、中でも、70mgKOH/g以上280mgKOH/g以下であることが好ましい。
 なお、本発明において酸価はJIS K 0070:1992に従って測定することができる。
The alkali-soluble resin is preferably selected from those having an acid value of 50 mgKOH / g or more from the viewpoint of developability (solubility) with respect to an alkaline aqueous solution used for the developer. The alkali-soluble resin preferably has an acid value of 70 mgKOH / g or more and 300 mgKOH / g or less from the viewpoint of developability (solubility) with respect to an aqueous alkali solution used for the developer and adhesion to the substrate. It is preferable that they are 70 mgKOH / g or more and 280 mgKOH / g or less.
In the present invention, the acid value can be measured according to JIS K 0070: 1992.
 アルカリ可溶性樹脂の側鎖にエチレン性不飽和基を有する場合のエチレン性不飽和結合当量は、100~2000の範囲であることが好ましく、特に、140以上1500以下の範囲であることが好ましい。該エチレン性不飽和結合当量が、2000以下であれば現像耐性や密着性に優れている。また、100以上であれば、前記カルボキシ基を有する構成単位や、炭化水素環を有する構成単位などの他の構成単位の割合を相対的に増やすことができるため、現像性や耐熱性に優れている。
 ここで、エチレン性不飽和結合当量とは、上記アルカリ可溶性樹脂におけるエチレン性不飽和結合1モル当りの重量平均分子量のことであり、下記数式(1)で表される。
In the case where the side chain of the alkali-soluble resin has an ethylenically unsaturated group, the ethylenically unsaturated bond equivalent is preferably in the range of 100 to 2000, and particularly preferably in the range of 140 to 1500. When the ethylenically unsaturated bond equivalent is 2000 or less, the development resistance and adhesion are excellent. Moreover, since the ratio of other structural units, such as the structural unit which has the said carboxy group, and the structural unit which has a hydrocarbon ring, can be relatively increased if it is 100 or more, it is excellent in developability and heat resistance. Yes.
Here, the ethylenically unsaturated bond equivalent is a weight average molecular weight per mole of the ethylenically unsaturated bond in the alkali-soluble resin, and is represented by the following formula (1).
数式(1)
  エチレン性不飽和結合当量(g/mol)=W(g)/M(mol)
(数式(1)中、Wは、アルカリ可溶性樹脂の質量(g)を表し、Mはアルカリ可溶性樹脂W(g)中に含まれるエチレン性二重結合のモル数(mol)を表す。)
Formula (1)
Ethylenically unsaturated bond equivalent (g / mol) = W (g) / M (mol)
(In Formula (1), W represents the mass (g) of the alkali-soluble resin, and M represents the number of moles (mol) of the ethylenic double bond contained in the alkali-soluble resin W (g).)
 上記エチレン性不飽和結合当量は、例えば、JIS K 0070:1992に記載のよう素価の試験方法に準拠して、アルカリ可溶性樹脂1gあたりに含まれるエチレン性二重結合の数を測定することにより算出してもよい。 The ethylenically unsaturated bond equivalent is determined, for example, by measuring the number of ethylenic double bonds contained in 1 g of the alkali-soluble resin in accordance with the test method for the iodine value described in JIS K 0070: 1992. It may be calculated.
[酸化防止剤]
 本発明の感光性着色樹脂組成物は、更に酸化防止剤を含有することが好ましい。前記一般式(1)で表される潜在性酸化防止剤と、公知の酸化防止剤とを組み合わせることにより、潜在性酸化防止剤単独で用いた場合よりも、特に耐光性に優れ、紫外線照射による着色層の輝度の低下を抑制することができると共に、酸化防止剤及び潜在性酸化防止剤が順次酸化防止機能を発現することにより、カラーフィルタ製造の全工程において、色材等の退色を抑制することができる。
[Antioxidant]
It is preferable that the photosensitive colored resin composition of the present invention further contains an antioxidant. By combining the latent antioxidant represented by the general formula (1) and a known antioxidant, the light resistance is particularly superior to that obtained when the latent antioxidant is used alone. In addition to suppressing the decrease in luminance of the colored layer, the antioxidant and the latent antioxidant sequentially exhibit the antioxidant function, thereby suppressing the fading of color materials and the like in all the steps of manufacturing the color filter. be able to.
 酸化防止剤は従来公知のものの中から適宜選択して用いることができる。酸化防止剤は1種単独で、又は2種以上を組み合わせて用いることができる。酸化防止剤の具体例としては、例えば、ヒンダードフェノール系酸化防止剤、アミン系酸化防止剤、リン系酸化防止剤、硫黄系酸化防止剤、ヒドラジン系酸化防止剤等が挙げられ、耐熱性の点から、ヒンダードフェノール系酸化防止剤を用いることが好ましい。 The antioxidant can be appropriately selected from conventionally known ones. An antioxidant can be used individually by 1 type or in combination of 2 or more types. Specific examples of antioxidants include, for example, hindered phenol antioxidants, amine antioxidants, phosphorus antioxidants, sulfur antioxidants, hydrazine antioxidants, and the like. From the viewpoint, it is preferable to use a hindered phenol-based antioxidant.
 ヒンダードフェノール系酸化防止剤とは、少なくとも1つのフェノール構造を含有し、当該フェノール構造の水酸基の2位と6位の少なくとも1つに炭素原子数4以上の置換基が置換されている構造を有する酸化防止剤を意味する。
 ヒンダードフェノール系酸化防止剤の具体例としては、例えば、ペンタエリトリトールテトラキス[3-(3,5-ジ-tert-ブチル-4-ヒドロキシフェニル)プロピオナート](商品名:イルガノックス1010、BASF製)、1,3,5-トリス(3,5-ジ-tert-ブチル-4-ヒドロキシベンジル)イソシアヌレート(商品名:イルガノックス3114、BASF製)、2,4,6-トリス(4-ヒドロキシ-3,5-ジ-tert-ブチルベンジル)メシチレン(商品名:イルガノックス1330、BASF製)、6-(4-ヒドロキシ-3,5-ジ-tert-ブチルアニリノ)-2,4-ビス(オクチルチオ)-1,3,5-トリアジン(商品名:イルガノックス565、BASF製)、2,2’-チオジエチルビス[3-(3,5-ジ-tert-ブチル-4-ヒドロキシフェニル)プロピオナート](商品名:イルガノックス1035、BASF製)、1,2-ビス[3-(4-ヒドロキシ-3,5-ジ-tert-ブチルフェニル)プロピオニル]ヒドラジン(商品名:イルガノックスMD1024、BASF製)、3-(4-ヒドロキシ-3,5-ジイソプロピルフェニル)プロピオン酸オクチル(商品名:イルガノックス1135、BASF製)、4,6-ビス(オクチルチオメチル)-o-クレゾール(商品名:イルガノックス1520L、BASF製)、N,N’-ヘキサメチレンビス[3-(3,5-ジ-tert-ブチル-4-ヒドロキシフェニル)プロパンアミド](商品名:イルガノックス1098、BASF製)、1,6-ヘキサンジオールビス[3-(3,5-ジ-tert-ブチル-4-ヒドロキシフェニル)プロピオナート](商品名:イルガノックス259、BASF製)、1-ジメチル-2-[(3-t-ブチル-4-ヒドロキシ-5-メチルフェニル)プロピオニルオキシ]エチル]2,4,8,10-テトラオキサスピロ[5.5]ウンデカン(商品名:ADK STAB AO-80、アデカ製)、ビス(3-tert-ブチル-4-ヒドロキシ-5-メチルベンゼンプロピオン酸)エチレンビス(オキシエチレン)(商品名:イルガノックス245、BASF製)、1,3,5-トリス[[4-(1,1-ジメチルエチル)-3-ヒドロキシ-2,6-ジメチルフェニル]メチル]-1,3,5-トリアジン-2,4,6(1H,3H,5H)-トリオン(商品名:イルガノックス1790、BASF製)、2,2’-メチレンビス(6-tert-ブチル-4-メチルフェノール)(商品名:スミライザーMDP-S、住友化学製)、6,6’-チオビス(2-tert-ブチル-4-メチルフェノール)(商品名:イルガノックス1081、BASF製)、3,5-ジ-tert-ブチル-4-ヒドロキシベンジルホスホン酸ジエチル(商品名:イルガモド195、BASF製)、アクリル酸2-tert-ブチル-4-メチル-6-(2-ヒドロキシ-3-tert-ブチル-5-メチルベンジル)フェニル(商品名:スミライザーGM、住友化学製)、4,4’-チオビス(6-tert-ブチル-m-クレゾール) (商品名:スミライザーWX-R、住友化学製)等が挙げられる。その他ヒンダードフェノール構造を有するオリゴマータイプ及びポリマータイプの化合物等も使用することが出来る。
The hindered phenol antioxidant contains at least one phenol structure, and has a structure in which a substituent having 4 or more carbon atoms is substituted on at least one of the 2-position and 6-position of the hydroxyl group of the phenol structure. Means an antioxidant.
Specific examples of the hindered phenol antioxidant include, for example, pentaerythritol tetrakis [3- (3,5-di-tert-butyl-4-hydroxyphenyl) propionate] (trade name: Irganox 1010, manufactured by BASF). 1,3,5-tris (3,5-di-tert-butyl-4-hydroxybenzyl) isocyanurate (trade name: Irganox 3114, manufactured by BASF), 2,4,6-tris (4-hydroxy- 3,5-di-tert-butylbenzyl) mesitylene (trade name: Irganox 1330, manufactured by BASF), 6- (4-hydroxy-3,5-di-tert-butylanilino) -2,4-bis (octylthio) -1,3,5-triazine (trade name: Irganox 565, manufactured by BASF), 2,2′-thiodiethylbi [3- (3,5-di-tert-butyl-4-hydroxyphenyl) propionate] (trade name: Irganox 1035, manufactured by BASF), 1,2-bis [3- (4-hydroxy-3,5 -Di-tert-butylphenyl) propionyl] hydrazine (trade name: Irganox MD1024, manufactured by BASF), octyl 3- (4-hydroxy-3,5-diisopropylphenyl) propionate (trade name: Irganox 1135, manufactured by BASF) ), 4,6-bis (octylthiomethyl) -o-cresol (trade name: Irganox 1520L, manufactured by BASF), N, N′-hexamethylenebis [3- (3,5-di-tert-butyl- 4-hydroxyphenyl) propanamide] (trade name: Irganox 1098, manufactured by BASF), 1,6-hexa Didiol [3- (3,5-di-tert-butyl-4-hydroxyphenyl) propionate] (trade name: Irganox 259, manufactured by BASF), 1-dimethyl-2-[(3-t-butyl-4- Hydroxy-5-methylphenyl) propionyloxy] ethyl] 2,4,8,10-tetraoxaspiro [5.5] undecane (trade name: ADK STAB AO-80, manufactured by Adeka), bis (3-tert-butyl -4-hydroxy-5-methylbenzenepropionic acid) ethylene bis (oxyethylene) (trade name: Irganox 245, manufactured by BASF), 1,3,5-tris [[4- (1,1-dimethylethyl)- 3-hydroxy-2,6-dimethylphenyl] methyl] -1,3,5-triazine-2,4,6 (1H, 3H, 5H) -trio (Trade name: Irganox 1790, manufactured by BASF), 2,2′-methylenebis (6-tert-butyl-4-methylphenol) (trade name: Sumilizer MDP-S, manufactured by Sumitomo Chemical), 6,6′-thiobis (2-tert-butyl-4-methylphenol) (trade name: Irganox 1081, manufactured by BASF), diethyl 3,5-di-tert-butyl-4-hydroxybenzylphosphonate (trade name: Irgamod 195, manufactured by BASF) ), 2-tert-butyl-4-methyl-6- (2-hydroxy-3-tert-butyl-5-methylbenzyl) phenyl acrylate (trade name: Sumilizer GM, manufactured by Sumitomo Chemical), 4,4′- And thiobis (6-tert-butyl-m-cresol) (trade name: Sumilizer WX-R, manufactured by Sumitomo Chemical Co., Ltd.). In addition, oligomer-type and polymer-type compounds having a hindered phenol structure can also be used.
[任意添加成分]
 本発明の感光性着色樹脂組成物は、必要に応じて各種添加剤を含むものであってもよい。
 添加剤としては、例えば、重合停止剤、連鎖移動剤、レベリング剤、可塑剤、界面活性剤、消泡剤、シランカップリング剤、紫外線吸収剤、密着促進剤等などが挙げられる。
[Optional components]
The photosensitive colored resin composition of the present invention may contain various additives as necessary.
Examples of the additive include a polymerization terminator, a chain transfer agent, a leveling agent, a plasticizer, a surfactant, an antifoaming agent, a silane coupling agent, an ultraviolet absorber, and an adhesion promoter.
<感光性着色樹脂組成物の各成分の配合割合>
 本発明の感光性着色樹脂組成物において、各成分の配合割合は特に限定されず、本発明の効果を損なわない範囲で、用途等に応じて適宜調製することができる。
 色材の含有割合は、所望の色味に応じて適宜調整すればよいものであるが、高輝度化の点からは、感光性着色樹脂組成物の固形分全量に対して、10質量%以上60質量%以下であることが好ましく、12質量%以上50質量%以下であることがより好ましい。
 なお本発明において固形分とは、感光性着色樹脂組成物を構成する溶剤以外の全ての成分を表し、例えば、液状の光重合性化合物であっても固形分に含まれるものとする。
<Combination ratio of each component of photosensitive colored resin composition>
In the photosensitive colored resin composition of the present invention, the blending ratio of each component is not particularly limited, and can be appropriately prepared according to the use and the like within a range not impairing the effects of the present invention.
The content ratio of the color material may be appropriately adjusted according to the desired color, but from the viewpoint of increasing the brightness, it is 10% by mass or more with respect to the total solid content of the photosensitive colored resin composition. It is preferably 60% by mass or less, and more preferably 12% by mass or more and 50% by mass or less.
In the present invention, the solid content represents all components other than the solvent constituting the photosensitive colored resin composition. For example, even a liquid photopolymerizable compound is included in the solid content.
 光重合性化合物の含有割合は、感光性着色樹脂組成物の固形分全量に対して、5質量%以上60質量%以下であることが好ましく、10質量%以上40質量%以下であることがより好ましい。光重合性化合物の含有割合が上記下限値より少ないと十分に光硬化が進まず、露光部分が現像時に溶出する場合があり、また、光重合性化合物の含有割合が上記上限値より多いとアルカリ現像性が低下するおそれがある。 The content of the photopolymerizable compound is preferably 5% by mass or more and 60% by mass or less, more preferably 10% by mass or more and 40% by mass or less, based on the total solid content of the photosensitive colored resin composition. preferable. If the content of the photopolymerizable compound is less than the above lower limit, the photocuring may not proceed sufficiently, and the exposed part may be eluted during development, and if the content of the photopolymerizable compound is greater than the above upper limit, There is a possibility that developability may be lowered.
 開始剤の含有割合は、感光性着色樹脂組成物の固形分全量に対し、1質量%以上40質量%以下であることが好ましく、3質量%以上30質量%以下であることがより好ましい。開始剤量が上記上限値未満であれば、マスク開口に対してパターンが太くなり過ぎないため好ましい。開始剤量が上記下限値以上であれば耐溶剤性が良好となる。
 また、開始剤として、オキシム系開始剤を少なくとも2種含む場合のオキシム系開始剤2種以上の合計含有量は、感光性着色樹脂組成物の固形分全量に対して、0.1質量%以上12.0質量%以下、さらに好ましくは1.0質量%以上8.0質量%以下の範囲内であることが、これらの開始剤の併用効果を十分に発揮させる点から好ましい。
The content ratio of the initiator is preferably 1% by mass or more and 40% by mass or less, and more preferably 3% by mass or more and 30% by mass or less with respect to the total solid content of the photosensitive colored resin composition. If the amount of initiator is less than the above upper limit value, it is preferable because the pattern does not become too thick with respect to the mask opening. If the amount of initiator is not less than the above lower limit, the solvent resistance is good.
Moreover, the total content of two or more oxime initiators when containing at least two oxime initiators as the initiator is 0.1% by mass or more based on the total solid content of the photosensitive colored resin composition. It is preferably 12.0% by mass or less, more preferably 1.0% by mass or more and 8.0% by mass or less from the viewpoint of sufficiently exerting the combined effect of these initiators.
 上記一般式(1)で表される潜在性酸化防止剤の含有割合は、高輝度な着色層を形成可能で、かつ、線幅の変化が抑制された感光性着色樹脂組成物が得られる点から、感光性着色樹脂組成物の固形分全量に対して、0.1質量%以上10質量%以下であることが好ましく、0.1質量%以上8質量%以下であることがより好ましい。 The content ratio of the latent antioxidant represented by the general formula (1) is that a highly colored layer can be formed and a photosensitive colored resin composition in which a change in line width is suppressed can be obtained. Therefore, the content is preferably 0.1% by mass or more and 10% by mass or less, and more preferably 0.1% by mass or more and 8% by mass or less, based on the total solid content of the photosensitive colored resin composition.
 アルカリ可溶性樹脂を用いる場合、その含有割合は、現像性の点から、感光性着色樹脂組成物の固形分全量に対して、5質量%以上60質量%以下が好ましく、5質量%以上50質量%以下がより好ましく、10質量%以上40質量%以下が更により好ましい。
アルカリ可溶性樹脂の含有量が上記下限値以上であれば、充分なアルカリ現像性が得られ、また、アルカリ可溶性樹脂の含有量が上記上限値以下であれば、現像時に膜荒れやパターンの欠けを抑制できる。
In the case of using an alkali-soluble resin, the content is preferably 5% by mass or more and 60% by mass or less, and preferably 5% by mass or more and 50% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the photosensitive colored resin composition from the viewpoint of developability. The following is more preferable, and 10 mass% or more and 40 mass% or less are still more preferable.
If the content of the alkali-soluble resin is not less than the above lower limit value, sufficient alkali developability can be obtained, and if the content of the alkali-soluble resin is not more than the above upper limit value, film roughness or pattern chipping may occur during development. Can be suppressed.
 分散剤を用いる場合の含有量としては、色材を均一に分散することができるものであれば特に限定されるものではないが、例えば、感光性着色樹脂組成物の固形分全量に対して1質量%以上40質量%以下で用いることができる。更に、感光性着色樹脂組成物の固形分全量に対して2質量%以上30質量%以下で配合するのが好ましく、特に3質量%以上25質量%以下の割合で配合するのが好ましい。上記下限値以上であれば、色材の分散性及び分散安定性に優れ、感光性着色樹脂組成物の保存安定性により優れている。また、上記上限値以下であれば、現像性が良好なものとなる。特に色材濃度が高い着色層を形成する場合には、分散剤の含有量は、感光性着色樹脂組成物の固形分全量に対して、2質量%以上25質量%以下、より好ましくは3質量%以上20質量%以下の割合で配合することが好ましい。 The content in the case of using the dispersant is not particularly limited as long as it can uniformly disperse the coloring material. For example, the content is 1 with respect to the total solid content of the photosensitive colored resin composition. It can be used in the range of from mass% to 40 mass%. Furthermore, it is preferable to mix | blend in 2 to 30 mass% with respect to the solid content whole quantity of the photosensitive coloring resin composition, and it is preferable to mix | blend especially in the ratio of 3 to 25 mass%. If it is more than the said lower limit, it is excellent in the dispersibility and dispersion stability of a coloring material, and is excellent in the storage stability of the photosensitive coloring resin composition. Moreover, if it is below the said upper limit, developability will become favorable. In particular, when a colored layer having a high colorant concentration is formed, the content of the dispersant is 2% by mass or more and 25% by mass or less, more preferably 3% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the photosensitive colored resin composition. It is preferable to mix | blend in the ratio of% -20 mass%.
 また、更に潜在化されていない酸化防止剤を組み合わせて用いる場合、当該酸化防止剤の含有割合は、高輝度な着色層を形成可能で、かつ、線幅の変化が抑制された感光性着色樹脂組成物が得られる点から、感光性着色樹脂組成物の固形分全量に対して、0.1質量%以上10質量%以下であることが好ましく、0.1質量%以上8質量%以下であることがより好ましく、0.1質量%以上以上5.0質量%以上以下であることが更により好ましい。前記下限値以上であれば、併用効果が発揮され易い。一方、前記上限値以下であれば、高感度の感光性樹脂組成物とすることができる。
 上記一般式(1)で表される潜在性酸化防止剤と当該酸化防止剤の含有割合は、線幅の変化が抑制されつつ、高輝度な着色層を形成し易い点から、上記一般式(1)で表される潜在性酸化防止剤1質量部に対して、0.1質量部以上10質量部以下であることが好ましく、更に0.1質量部以上5.0質量部以下であることが好ましい。
Further, when used in combination with a non-latent antioxidant, the content of the antioxidant is a photosensitive colored resin capable of forming a high-brightness colored layer and suppressing a change in line width. In terms of obtaining the composition, it is preferably 0.1% by mass or more and 10% by mass or less, and preferably 0.1% by mass or more and 8% by mass or less, based on the total solid content of the photosensitive colored resin composition. It is more preferable that the content is 0.1% by mass or more and 5.0% by mass or more. If it is more than the said lower limit, a combined use effect will be easy to be exhibited. On the other hand, if it is below the said upper limit, it can be set as the highly sensitive photosensitive resin composition.
The content ratio between the latent antioxidant represented by the general formula (1) and the antioxidant is that the above general formula ( 1 to 10 parts by mass, preferably 0.1 to 5.0 parts by mass, based on 1 part by mass of the latent antioxidant represented by 1) Is preferred.
 本発明に係る感光性着色樹脂組成物において、溶剤の含有量は、着色層を精度良く形成することができる範囲で適宜設定すればよい。該溶剤を含むカラーフィルタ用感光性着色樹脂組成物の全量に対して、通常、55質量%以上95質量%以下の範囲内であることが好ましく、中でも、65質量%以上88質量%以下の範囲内であることがより好ましい。上記溶剤の含有量が、上記範囲内であることにより、塗布性に優れたものとすることができる。 In the photosensitive colored resin composition according to the present invention, the content of the solvent may be appropriately set within a range in which the colored layer can be formed with high accuracy. The total amount of the photosensitive colored resin composition for color filters containing the solvent is usually preferably in the range of 55% by mass to 95% by mass, and more preferably in the range of 65% by mass to 88% by mass. More preferably, it is within. When the content of the solvent is within the above range, the coating property can be excellent.
<感光性着色樹脂組成物の製造方法>
 本発明の感光性着色樹脂組成物の製造方法は、少なくとも色材と、光重合性化合物と、開始剤と、潜在性酸化防止剤と、溶剤を含有し、更に、好ましくは分散剤と、好ましくは酸化防止剤と、好ましくはアルカリ可溶性樹脂を含有し、色材が溶剤中に均一に分散乃至溶解され得る方法であればよく公知の混合手段を用いて混合することにより、調製することができる。
 当該樹脂組成物の調製方法としては、例えば、(1)まず溶剤中に、色材と、必要に応じて分散剤とを添加して色材分散液を調製し、当該分散液に、光重合性化合物と、開始剤と、潜在性酸化防止剤と、所望により用いられる隔週添加成分を混合する方法;(2)溶剤中に、色材と、光重合性化合物と、開始剤と、潜在性酸化防止剤とを同時に投入し混合する方法などを挙げることができる。
 これらの方法の中で、上記(1)の方法が、色材の凝集を効果的に防ぎ、均一に分散させ得る点から好ましい。
<Method for producing photosensitive colored resin composition>
The method for producing the photosensitive colored resin composition of the present invention comprises at least a colorant, a photopolymerizable compound, an initiator, a latent antioxidant, and a solvent, and more preferably a dispersant, Can be prepared by mixing using a known mixing means as long as it contains an antioxidant and preferably an alkali-soluble resin and the colorant can be uniformly dispersed or dissolved in the solvent. .
As a method for preparing the resin composition, for example, (1) First, a color material and a dispersant as necessary are added to a solvent to prepare a color material dispersion, and photopolymerization is performed on the dispersion. A method of mixing an optional compound, an initiator, a latent antioxidant, and an optional biweekly addition component; (2) a coloring material, a photopolymerizable compound, an initiator, and a latent in a solvent Examples thereof include a method in which an antioxidant is simultaneously added and mixed.
Among these methods, the method (1) is preferable because it can effectively prevent aggregation of the color material and can be uniformly dispersed.
 色材分散液を調製する方法は、従来公知の分散方法の中から適宜選択して用いることができる。例えば、(1)予め、分散剤を溶剤に混合、撹拌し、分散剤溶液を調製し、次いで必要に応じて有機酸化合物を混合して分散剤が有するアミノ基と有機酸化合物とを塩形成させる。これを色材と必要に応じてその他の成分を混合し、公知の攪拌機または分散機を用いて分散させる方法;(2)分散剤を溶剤に混合、撹拌し、分散剤溶液を調製し、次いで、色材及び必要に応じて有機酸化合物と、更に必要に応じてその他の成分を混合し、公知の攪拌機または分散機を用いて分散させる方法;(3)分散剤を溶剤に混合、攪拌し、分散剤溶液を調整し、次いで、色材及び必要に応じてその他の成分を混合し、公知の攪拌機または分散機を用いて分散液としたのちに、必要に応じて有機酸化合物を添加する方法などが挙げられる。 The method for preparing the colorant dispersion can be appropriately selected from conventionally known dispersion methods. For example, (1) A dispersant is mixed and stirred in advance to prepare a dispersant solution, and then an organic acid compound is mixed as necessary to form a salt between the amino group of the dispersant and the organic acid compound. Let A method of mixing this with a coloring material and other components as necessary, and dispersing the mixture using a known stirrer or disperser; (2) Mixing and stirring a dispersant in a solvent to prepare a dispersant solution; A method of mixing a coloring material and, if necessary, an organic acid compound and, if necessary, other components and dispersing the mixture using a known stirrer or disperser; (3) mixing and stirring a dispersant in a solvent. Then, the dispersant solution is prepared, then the colorant and other components are mixed as necessary, and the mixture is made into a dispersion using a known stirrer or disperser, and then an organic acid compound is added as necessary. The method etc. are mentioned.
 分散処理を行うための分散機としては、2本ロール、3本ロール等のロールミル、ボールミル、振動ボールミル等のボールミル、ペイントコンディショナー、連続ディスク型ビーズミル、連続アニュラー型ビーズミル等のビーズミルが挙げられる。ビーズミルの好ましい分散条件として、使用するビーズ径は0.03mm以上2.00mm以下が好ましく、より好ましくは0.10mm以上1.0mm以下である。 Examples of the dispersing machine for performing the dispersion treatment include a roll mill such as a two-roll or a three-roll, a ball mill such as a ball mill or a vibration ball mill, a bead mill such as a paint conditioner, a continuous disk type bead mill, or a continuous annular type bead mill. As a preferable dispersion condition of the bead mill, the bead diameter to be used is preferably 0.03 mm or more and 2.00 mm or less, and more preferably 0.10 mm or more and 1.0 mm or less.
 具体的には、ビーズ径が比較的大きめな2mmジルコニアビーズで予備分散を行い、更にビーズ径が比較的小さめな0.1mmジルコニアビーズで本分散することが挙げられる。また、分散後、0.5μm以上2μm以下のメンブランフィルターで濾過することが好ましい。 Specifically, preliminary dispersion is performed with 2 mm zirconia beads having a relatively large bead diameter, and the main dispersion is further performed with 0.1 mm zirconia beads having a relatively small bead diameter. Moreover, it is preferable to filter with a membrane filter of 0.5 μm or more and 2 μm or less after dispersion.
2.カラーフィルタ
 本発明に係るカラーフィルタは、基板と、当該基板上に設けられた着色層とを少なくとも備えるカラーフィルタであって、当該着色層の少なくとも1つが、前記本発明に係る感光性着色樹脂組成物の硬化物である。
 本発明に係るカラーフィルタの製造方法は、基板と、当該基板上に設けられた着色層とを少なくとも備えるカラーフィルタの製造方法であって、
 当該着色層の少なくとも1つを、前記本発明に係る感光性着色樹脂組成物を用いて形成する工程を有する。
2. Color filter The color filter according to the present invention is a color filter comprising at least a substrate and a colored layer provided on the substrate, wherein at least one of the colored layers is the photosensitive colored resin composition according to the present invention. It is a cured product.
A method for producing a color filter according to the present invention is a method for producing a color filter comprising at least a substrate and a colored layer provided on the substrate,
It has the process of forming at least 1 of the said colored layer using the photosensitive colored resin composition which concerns on the said this invention.
 このような本発明に係るカラーフィルタについて、図を参照しながら説明する。図1は、本発明のカラーフィルタの一例を示す概略断面図である。図1によれば、本発明のカラーフィルタ10は、基板1と、遮光部2と、着色層3とを有している。 Such a color filter according to the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a schematic sectional view showing an example of the color filter of the present invention. According to FIG. 1, the color filter 10 of the present invention has a substrate 1, a light shielding part 2, and a colored layer 3.
(着色層)
 本発明のカラーフィルタに用いられる着色層は、少なくとも1つが、前記本発明に係る感光性着色樹脂組成物の硬化物からなる着色層である。
 着色層は、通常、後述する基板上の遮光部の開口部に形成され、通常3色以上の着色パターンから構成される。
 また、当該着色層の配列としては、特に限定されず、例えば、ストライプ型、モザイク型、トライアングル型、4画素配置型等の一般的な配列とすることができる。また、着色層の幅、面積等は任意に設定することができる。
 当該着色層の厚みは、塗布方法、カラーフィルタ用感光性着色樹脂組成物の固形分濃度や粘度等を調整することにより、適宜制御されるが、通常、1μm以上5μm以下の範囲であることが好ましい。
(Colored layer)
At least one of the colored layers used in the color filter of the present invention is a colored layer made of a cured product of the photosensitive colored resin composition according to the present invention.
The colored layer is usually formed in an opening of a light-shielding part on the substrate to be described later, and is usually composed of a colored pattern of three or more colors.
In addition, the arrangement of the colored layers is not particularly limited, and for example, a general arrangement such as a stripe type, a mosaic type, a triangle type, or a four-pixel arrangement type can be used. Moreover, the width | variety, area, etc. of a colored layer can be set arbitrarily.
The thickness of the colored layer is appropriately controlled by adjusting the coating method, the solid content concentration and viscosity of the photosensitive colored resin composition for a color filter, and is usually in the range of 1 μm to 5 μm. preferable.
 当該着色層は、例えば、下記の方法により形成することができる。
 まず、前述した本発明の感光性着色樹脂組成物を、スプレーコート法、ディップコート法、バーコート法、ロールコート法、スピンコート法、ダイコート法などの塗布手段を用いて後述する基板上に塗布して、ウェット塗膜を形成させる。なかでもスピンコート法、ダイコート法を好ましく用いることができる。
 次いで、ホットプレートやオーブンなどを用いて、該ウェット塗膜を乾燥させたのち、これに、所定のパターンのマスクを介して露光し、アルカリ可溶性樹脂及び多官能モノマー等を光重合反応させて硬化塗膜とする。露光に使用される光源としては、例えば低圧水銀灯、高圧水銀灯、メタルハライドランプなどの紫外線、電子線等が挙げられる。露光量は、使用する光源や塗膜の厚みなどによって適宜調整される。
 また、露光後に重合反応を促進させるために、加熱処理を行ってもよい。加熱条件は、使用する感光性着色樹脂組成物中の各成分の配合割合や、塗膜の厚み等によって適宜選択される。
The colored layer can be formed by the following method, for example.
First, the above-described photosensitive colored resin composition of the present invention is applied onto a substrate to be described later using an application means such as a spray coating method, a dip coating method, a bar coating method, a roll coating method, a spin coating method, or a die coating method. Then, a wet coating film is formed. Of these, spin coating and die coating can be preferably used.
Next, after drying the wet coating film using a hot plate or an oven, it is exposed through a mask having a predetermined pattern and cured by photopolymerization of an alkali-soluble resin and a polyfunctional monomer. Let it be a coating film. Examples of the light source used for exposure include ultraviolet rays such as a low-pressure mercury lamp, a high-pressure mercury lamp, and a metal halide lamp, and an electron beam. The exposure amount is appropriately adjusted depending on the light source used, the thickness of the coating film, and the like.
Further, heat treatment may be performed in order to accelerate the polymerization reaction after exposure. The heating conditions are appropriately selected depending on the blending ratio of each component in the photosensitive colored resin composition to be used, the thickness of the coating film, and the like.
 次に、現像液を用いて現像処理し、未露光部分を溶解、除去することにより、所望のパターンで塗膜が形成される。現像液としては、通常、水や水溶性溶剤にアルカリを溶解させた溶液が用いられる。このアルカリ溶液には、界面活性剤などを適量添加してもよい。また、現像方法は一般的な方法を採用することができる。
 現像処理後は、通常、現像液の洗浄、感光性着色樹脂組成物の硬化塗膜の乾燥が行われ、着色層が形成される。なお、現像処理後に、塗膜を十分に硬化させるために加熱処理を行ってもよい。加熱条件としては特に限定はなく、塗膜の用途に応じて適宜選択される。
Next, it develops using a developing solution, a coating film is formed with a desired pattern by melt | dissolving and removing an unexposed part. As the developer, a solution in which an alkali is dissolved in water or a water-soluble solvent is usually used. An appropriate amount of a surfactant or the like may be added to the alkaline solution. Further, a general method can be adopted as the developing method.
After the development treatment, the developer is usually washed and the cured coating film of the photosensitive colored resin composition is dried to form a colored layer. In addition, you may heat-process in order to fully harden a coating film after image development processing. The heating conditions are not particularly limited and are appropriately selected depending on the application of the coating film.
(遮光部)
 本発明のカラーフィルタにおける遮光部は、後述する基板上にパターン状に形成されるものであって、一般的なカラーフィルタに遮光部として用いられるものと同様とすることができる。
 当該遮光部のパターン形状としては、特に限定されず、例えば、ストライプ状、マトリクス状等の形状が挙げられる。遮光部は、スパッタリング法、真空蒸着法等によるクロム等の金属薄膜であっても良い。或いは、遮光部は、樹脂バインダー中にカーボン微粒子、金属酸化物、無機顔料、有機顔料等の遮光性粒子を含有させた樹脂層であってもよい。遮光性粒子を含有させた樹脂層の場合には、感光性レジストを用いて現像によりパターニングする方法、遮光性粒子を含有するインクジェットインクを用いてパターニングする方法、感光性レジストを熱転写する方法等がある。
(Shading part)
The light shielding part in the color filter of the present invention is formed in a pattern on a substrate to be described later, and can be the same as that used as a light shielding part in a general color filter.
The pattern shape of the light shielding portion is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a stripe shape and a matrix shape. The light shielding part may be a metal thin film such as chromium by sputtering, vacuum deposition or the like. Alternatively, the light shielding part may be a resin layer in which light shielding particles such as carbon fine particles, metal oxides, inorganic pigments, and organic pigments are contained in a resin binder. In the case of a resin layer containing light-shielding particles, a method of patterning by development using a photosensitive resist, a method of patterning using an inkjet ink containing light-shielding particles, a method of thermally transferring the photosensitive resist, etc. is there.
 遮光部の膜厚としては、金属薄膜の場合は0.2μm~0.4μm程度で設定され、黒色顔料をバインダー樹脂中に分散又は溶解させたものである場合は0.5μm~2μm程度で設定される。 The film thickness of the light shielding part is set to about 0.2 μm to 0.4 μm in the case of a metal thin film, and is set to about 0.5 μm to 2 μm in the case where a black pigment is dispersed or dissolved in a binder resin. Is done.
(基板)
 基板としては、後述する透明基板やシリコン基板、前記基板上にアルミニウム、銀、銀/銅/パラジウム合金薄膜などを形成したものが用いられる。これらの基板上には、別のカラーフィルタ層、樹脂層、TFT等のトランジスタ、回路等が形成されていてもよい。
(substrate)
As the substrate, a transparent substrate or a silicon substrate, which will be described later, or an aluminum, silver, or silver / copper / palladium alloy thin film formed on the substrate is used. On these substrates, another color filter layer, a resin layer, a transistor such as a TFT, a circuit, or the like may be formed.
 本発明のカラーフィルタにおける透明基板としては、可視光に対して透明な基材であればよく、特に限定されず、一般的なカラーフィルタに用いられる透明基板を使用することができる。具体的には、石英ガラス、無アルカリガラス、合成石英板等の可撓性のない透明なリジッド材、あるいは、透明樹脂フィルム、光学用樹脂板、フレキシブルガラス等の可撓性を有する透明なフレキシブル材が挙げられる。
 当該透明基板の厚みは、特に限定されるものではないが、本発明のカラーフィルタの用途に応じて、例えば100μm~1mm程度のものを使用することができる。
 なお、本発明のカラーフィルタは、上記基板、遮光部及び着色層以外にも、例えば、オーバーコート層や透明電極層、さらには配向膜や配向突起、柱状スペーサ等が形成されたものであってもよい。
The transparent substrate in the color filter of the present invention is not particularly limited as long as it is a base material transparent to visible light, and a transparent substrate used for a general color filter can be used. Specifically, transparent flexible rigid materials such as quartz glass, alkali-free glass, and synthetic quartz plates, or transparent flexible flexible materials such as transparent resin films, optical resin plates, and flexible glasses. Materials.
The thickness of the transparent substrate is not particularly limited, but for example, a thickness of about 100 μm to 1 mm can be used according to the use of the color filter of the present invention.
The color filter of the present invention includes, for example, an overcoat layer, a transparent electrode layer, an alignment film, an alignment protrusion, a columnar spacer, etc., in addition to the substrate, the light shielding portion, and the colored layer. Also good.
3.表示装置
 本発明に係る表示装置は、前記本発明に係るカラーフィルタを有することを特徴とする。本発明において表示装置の構成は特に限定されず、従来公知の表示装置の中から適宜選択することができ、例えば、液晶表示装置や、有機発光表示装置などが挙げられる。
3. Display Device A display device according to the present invention includes the color filter according to the present invention. In the present invention, the configuration of the display device is not particularly limited, and can be appropriately selected from conventionally known display devices, such as a liquid crystal display device and an organic light emitting display device.
[液晶表示装置]
 液晶表示装置は、前述した本発明に係るカラーフィルタと、対向基板と、前記カラーフィルタと前記対向基板との間に形成された液晶層とを有することを特徴とする。
 このような本発明の液晶表示装置について、図を参照しながら説明する。図2は、本発明の液晶表示装置の一例を示す概略図である。図2に例示するように本発明の液晶表示装置40は、カラーフィルタ10と、TFTアレイ基板等を有する対向基板20と、上記カラーフィルタ10と上記対向基板20との間に形成された液晶層30とを有している。
 なお、本発明の液晶表示装置は、この図2に示される構成に限定されるものではなく、一般的にカラーフィルタが用いられた液晶表示装置として公知の構成とすることができる。
[Liquid Crystal Display]
The liquid crystal display device includes the above-described color filter according to the present invention, a counter substrate, and a liquid crystal layer formed between the color filter and the counter substrate.
Such a liquid crystal display device of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 2 is a schematic view showing an example of the liquid crystal display device of the present invention. As illustrated in FIG. 2, the liquid crystal display device 40 of the present invention includes a color filter 10, a counter substrate 20 having a TFT array substrate and the like, and a liquid crystal layer formed between the color filter 10 and the counter substrate 20. 30.
Note that the liquid crystal display device of the present invention is not limited to the configuration shown in FIG. 2, but can be a configuration generally known as a liquid crystal display device using a color filter.
 本発明の液晶表示装置の駆動方式としては、特に限定はなく一般的に液晶表示装置に用いられている駆動方式を採用することができる。このような駆動方式としては、例えば、TN方式、IPS方式、OCB方式、及びMVA方式等を挙げることができる。本発明においてはこれらのいずれの方式であっても好適に用いることができる。
 また、対向基板としては、本発明の液晶表示装置の駆動方式等に応じて適宜選択して用いることができる。
 さらに、液晶層を構成する液晶としては、本発明の液晶表示装置の駆動方式等に応じて、誘電異方性の異なる各種液晶、及びこれらの混合物を用いることができる。
The driving method of the liquid crystal display device of the present invention is not particularly limited, and a driving method generally used for a liquid crystal display device can be employed. Examples of such a drive method include a TN method, an IPS method, an OCB method, and an MVA method. In the present invention, any of these methods can be preferably used.
Further, the counter substrate can be appropriately selected and used according to the driving method of the liquid crystal display device of the present invention.
Furthermore, as the liquid crystal constituting the liquid crystal layer, various liquid crystals having different dielectric anisotropy and mixtures thereof can be used according to the driving method of the liquid crystal display device of the present invention.
 液晶層の形成方法としては、一般に液晶セルの作製方法として用いられる方法を使用することができ、例えば、真空注入方式や液晶滴下方式等が挙げられる。前記方法によって液晶層を形成後、液晶セルを常温まで徐冷することにより、封入された液晶を配向させることができる。 As a method for forming a liquid crystal layer, a method generally used as a method for producing a liquid crystal cell can be used, and examples thereof include a vacuum injection method and a liquid crystal dropping method. After forming the liquid crystal layer by the above-described method, the sealed liquid crystal can be aligned by slowly cooling the liquid crystal cell to room temperature.
[有機発光表示装置]
 有機発光表示装置は、前述した本発明に係るカラーフィルタと、有機発光体とを有することを特徴とする。
 このような本発明の有機発光表示装置について、図を参照しながら説明する。図3は、本発明の有機発光表示装置の一例を示す概略図である。図3に例示するように本発明の有機発光表示装置100は、カラーフィルタ10と、有機発光体80とを有している。カラーフィルタ10と、有機発光体80との間に、有機保護層50や無機酸化膜60を有していても良い。
[Organic light emitting display]
An organic light emitting display device includes the above-described color filter according to the present invention and an organic light emitter.
Such an organic light emitting display device of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 3 is a schematic view illustrating an example of the organic light emitting display device of the present invention. As illustrated in FIG. 3, the organic light emitting display device 100 of the present invention includes a color filter 10 and an organic light emitter 80. An organic protective layer 50 and an inorganic oxide film 60 may be provided between the color filter 10 and the organic light emitter 80.
 有機発光体80の積層方法としては、例えば、カラーフィルタ上面へ透明陽極71、正孔注入層72、正孔輸送層73、発光層74、電子注入層75、および陰極76を逐次形成していく方法や、別基板上へ形成した有機発光体80を無機酸化膜60上に貼り合わせる方法などが挙げられる。有機発光体80における、透明陽極71、正孔注入層72、正孔輸送層73、発光層74、電子注入層75、および陰極76、その他の構成は、公知のものを適宜用いることができる。このようにして作製された有機発光表示装置100は、例えば、パッシブ駆動方式の有機ELディスプレイにもアクティブ駆動方式の有機ELディスプレイにも適用可能である。
 なお、本発明の有機発光表示装置は、この図3に示される構成に限定されるものではなく、一般的にカラーフィルタが用いられた有機発光表示装置として公知の構成とすることができる。
As a method for laminating the organic light emitter 80, for example, the transparent anode 71, the hole injection layer 72, the hole transport layer 73, the light emitting layer 74, the electron injection layer 75, and the cathode 76 are sequentially formed on the upper surface of the color filter. Examples thereof include a method and a method in which an organic light emitter 80 formed on another substrate is bonded onto the inorganic oxide film 60. As the transparent anode 71, the hole injection layer 72, the hole transport layer 73, the light emitting layer 74, the electron injection layer 75, the cathode 76, and other configurations in the organic light emitting body 80, known structures can be appropriately used. The organic light emitting display device 100 manufactured as described above can be applied to, for example, a passive drive type organic EL display or an active drive type organic EL display.
Note that the organic light emitting display device of the present invention is not limited to the configuration shown in FIG. 3, and may be a known configuration as an organic light emitting display device that generally uses a color filter.
 以下、本発明について実施例を示して具体的に説明する。これらの記載により本発明を制限するものではない。なお、下記合成及び調製においては、必要に応じて操作を繰り返し、所望量を得た。 Hereinafter, the present invention will be specifically described with reference to examples. These descriptions do not limit the present invention. In addition, in the following synthesis | combination and preparation, operation was repeated as needed and the desired amount was obtained.
(色材Aの合成)
(1)中間体1の合成
 和光純薬(株)製 1-ヨードナフタレン15.2g(60mmol)、三井化学(株
)製 ノルボルナンジアミン(NBDA)(CAS No.56602-77-8)4.
63g(30mmol)、ナトリウム-tert-ブトキシド 8.07g(84mmol)、アルドリッチ製 2-ジシクロヘキシルホスフィノ-2’,6’,-ジメトキシビフェニル 0.09g(0.2mmol)、和光純薬(株)製 酢酸パラジウム 0.021g(0.1mmol)、キシレン 30mLに分散し130-135℃で48時間反応させた。反応終了後、室温に冷却し水を加え抽出した。次いで硫酸マグネシウムで乾燥し濃縮することにより下記化学式(i)で示される中間体1 8.5g(収率70%)を得た。
 得られた化合物は、下記の分析結果より目的の化合物であることを確認した。
・MS(ESI) (m/z):407(M+H)、
・元素分析値:CHN実測値 (85.47%、8.02%、6.72%);理論値(8
5.26%、8.11%、6.63%)
(Synthesis of colorant A)
(1) Synthesis of Intermediate 1 1-Iodonaphthalene 15.2 g (60 mmol) manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd. Norbornanediamine (NBDA) (CAS No. 56602-77-8) manufactured by Mitsui Chemicals, Inc.
63 g (30 mmol), sodium-tert-butoxide 8.07 g (84 mmol), Aldrich 2-dicyclohexylphosphino-2 ′, 6 ′,-dimethoxybiphenyl 0.09 g (0.2 mmol), manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd. 0.021 g (0.1 mmol) of palladium acetate and 30 mL of xylene were dispersed and reacted at 130-135 ° C. for 48 hours. After completion of the reaction, the mixture was cooled to room temperature and extracted with water. Next, it was dried with magnesium sulfate and concentrated to obtain 8.5 g of intermediate 1 represented by the following chemical formula (i) (yield 70%).
The obtained compound was confirmed to be the target compound from the following analysis results.
MS (ESI) (m / z): 407 (M + H),
Elemental analysis value: CHN measured value (85.47%, 8.02%, 6.72%); theoretical value (8
(5.26%, 8.11%, 6.63%)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022
(2)中間体2の合成
 中間体1 8.46g(20.8mmol)、東京化成工業製 4,4’-ビス(ジメチルアミノ)ベンゾフェノン13.5g(41.6mmol)トルエン60mLを入れ45-50℃で攪拌した。和光純薬工業製オキシ塩化リン 6.38g(51.5mmol)を滴下し、2時間還流し冷却した。反応終了後、トルエンをデカントした。樹脂状析出物をクロロホルム40mL、水40mL、濃塩酸を加えて溶解しクロロホルム層を分液した。クロロホルム層を水で洗浄し、硫酸マグネシウムで乾燥、濃縮した。濃縮物に酢酸エチル65mLを加え還流した。冷却の後に析出物を濾過し下記化学式(ii)で示される中間体2(BB7-Nb-dimer)を15.9g(収率70%)得た。
 得られた化合物は、下記の分析結果より目的の化合物であることを確認した。
・MS(ESI) (m/z):511(+)、2価
・元素分析値:CHN実測値 (78.13%、7.48%、7.78%);理論値(7
8.06%、7.75%、7.69%)
(2) Synthesis of Intermediate 2 Intermediate 46 (46. 6 g, 20.8 mmol), Tokyo Chemical Industry 4,4'-bis (dimethylamino) benzophenone (13.5 g, 41.6 mmol) and toluene (60 mL) were added. Stir at ° C. 6.38 g (51.5 mmol) of phosphorus oxychloride manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd. was added dropwise, refluxed for 2 hours and cooled. After completion of the reaction, toluene was decanted. The resinous precipitate was dissolved by adding chloroform (40 mL), water (40 mL) and concentrated hydrochloric acid, and the chloroform layer was separated. The chloroform layer was washed with water, dried over magnesium sulfate and concentrated. 65 mL of ethyl acetate was added to the concentrate and refluxed. After cooling, the precipitate was filtered to obtain 15.9 g (yield 70%) of intermediate 2 (BB7-Nb-dimer) represented by the following chemical formula (ii).
The obtained compound was confirmed to be the target compound from the following analysis results.
MS (ESI) (m / z): 511 (+), divalent, elemental analysis value: CHN measured value (78.13%, 7.48%, 7.78%); theoretical value (7
(8.06%, 7.75%, 7.69%)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000023
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000023
(3)色材Aの合成
 中間体2 5.00g(4.58mmol)を水300mlに加え、90℃で溶解させ中間体2溶液とした。次に日本無機化学工業製リンタングステン酸・n水和物 H[PW1240]・nHO(n=30) 10.44g(3.05mmol)を水100mLに入れ、90℃で攪拌し、リンタングステン酸水溶液を調製した。先の中間体2溶液にリンタングステン酸水溶液を90℃で混合し、生成した沈殿物を濾取し、水で洗浄した。得られたケーキを乾燥して下記化学式(iii)で表される色材Aを13.25g(収率98%)を得た。
 得られた化合物は、下記の分析結果より目的の化合物であることを確認した。
・MS(ESI) (m/z):510(+)、2価
・元素分析値:CHN実測値 (41.55%、5.34%、4.32%);理論値(41.66%、5.17%、4.11%)
 また、リンタングステン酸のポリ酸構造が色材Aとなった後も保たれていることを31P-NMRにより確認した。
(3) Synthesis of Colorant A Intermediate 2 5.00 g (4.58 mmol) was added to 300 ml of water and dissolved at 90 ° C. to obtain Intermediate 2 solution. Next, 10.44 g (3.05 mmol) of phosphotungstic acid · n hydrate H 3 [PW 12 O 40 ] · nH 2 O (n = 30) manufactured by Nippon Inorganic Chemical Industry Co., Ltd. was added to 100 mL of water and stirred at 90 ° C. An aqueous phosphotungstic acid solution was prepared. The intermediate 2 solution was mixed with an aqueous phosphotungstic acid solution at 90 ° C., and the resulting precipitate was collected by filtration and washed with water. The obtained cake was dried to obtain 13.25 g (yield 98%) of coloring material A represented by the following chemical formula (iii).
The obtained compound was confirmed to be the target compound from the following analysis results.
MS (ESI) (m / z): 510 (+), divalent, elemental analysis value: CHN measured value (41.55%, 5.34%, 4.32%); theoretical value (41.66%) (5.17%, 4.11%)
In addition, it was confirmed by 31 P-NMR that the polyacid structure of phosphotungstic acid was maintained even after becoming colorant A.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000024
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000024
(合成例2:色材Bの合成)
 下記式で表されるアシッドレッド289(AR289、東京化成社製) 5.0gを水500mlに加え、80℃で溶解させ、染料溶液を調製した。ポリ塩化アルミニウム(「商品名:タキバイン#1500」多木化学社製、Al(OH)Cl、塩基度83.5質量%、アルミナ分として23.5質量%)3.85gを水200mlに入れ、80℃で攪拌し、ポリ塩化アルミニウム水溶液を調製した。調製したポリ塩化アルミニウム水溶液を、80℃で15分かけて前記染料溶液に滴下し、さらに80℃で1時間攪拌した。生成した沈殿物を濾取し、水で洗浄した。得られたケーキを乾燥してローダミン系酸性染料の金属レーキ色材(色材B) 6.30g(収率 96.2%)を得た。
(Synthesis Example 2: Synthesis of Color Material B)
Acid Red 289 (AR289, manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) represented by the following formula was added to 500 ml of water and dissolved at 80 ° C. to prepare a dye solution. 3.85 g of polyaluminum chloride (“trade name: Takibaine # 1500” manufactured by Taki Chemical Co., Ltd., Al 2 (OH) 5 Cl, basicity 83.5 mass%, alumina content 23.5 mass%) in 200 ml of water The mixture was stirred at 80 ° C. to prepare a polyaluminum chloride aqueous solution. The prepared polyaluminum chloride aqueous solution was added dropwise to the dye solution at 80 ° C. over 15 minutes, and further stirred at 80 ° C. for 1 hour. The formed precipitate was collected by filtration and washed with water. The obtained cake was dried to obtain 6.30 g (yield 96.2%) of a metal lake color material (color material B) of a rhodamine acid dye.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000025
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000025
(合成例3:色材Cの合成)
 500mlの4つ口フラスコに、下記化学式(iv)のスルホフルオラン化合物40.2質量部、メタノール312質量部、N-メチル-2,6-キシリジン6.8質量部及びN-メチル-o-トルイジン6.0質量部を仕込み、30時間還流させた。この反応液を60℃でろ過して不溶解分を除いた後、反応液が約70mlになるまで減圧下で溶剤を除き、6%塩酸200質量部に注いだ。次いで、水600質量部を加えて室温で30分間攪拌した後、ウェットケーキをろ取した。このウェットケーキを100質量部の水に懸濁させて60℃で2時間攪拌した後、再びろ取して60℃の湯で水洗後、乾燥させることにより、下記式で表される色材C 27.4質量部を得た。
(Synthesis Example 3: Synthesis of Color Material C)
In a 500 ml four-necked flask, 40.2 parts by mass of a sulfofluorane compound of the following chemical formula (iv), 312 parts by mass of methanol, 6.8 parts by mass of N-methyl-2,6-xylidine and N-methyl-o- 6.0 parts by mass of toluidine was charged and refluxed for 30 hours. The reaction solution was filtered at 60 ° C. to remove insoluble components, and then the solvent was removed under reduced pressure until the reaction solution reached about 70 ml, and the mixture was poured into 200 parts by mass of 6% hydrochloric acid. Next, after adding 600 parts by mass of water and stirring for 30 minutes at room temperature, the wet cake was collected by filtration. The wet cake was suspended in 100 parts by mass of water, stirred at 60 ° C. for 2 hours, filtered again, washed with hot water at 60 ° C., and then dried, whereby a colorant C represented by the following formula: 27.4 parts by mass were obtained.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000026
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000026
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000027
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000027
(合成例4:潜在性酸化防止剤の合成)
 下記化学式(vi)で表されるフェノール化合物0.01mol、二炭酸ジ-tert-ブチル0.05mol及びピリジン30gを混合し、窒素雰囲気下、室温で4-ジメチルアミノピリジン0.025molを加え、60℃で3時間撹拌した。室温まで冷却後、反応液をイオン交換水150gに注ぎ、クロロホルム200gを加えて油水分離を行った。有機層を無水硫酸ナトリウムで乾燥後、溶媒を留去し、残渣にメタノール100gを加えて晶析を行った。得られた白色粉状結晶を60℃で3時間減圧乾燥させ、
前記化学式(A)で表される潜在性酸化防止剤(化合物A)を得た。なお、得られた潜在性酸化防止剤の構造はIR及びNMRで確認した。
(Synthesis Example 4: Synthesis of latent antioxidant)
A phenol compound represented by the following chemical formula (vi) (0.01 mol), di-tert-butyl dicarbonate (0.05 mol) and pyridine (30 g) were mixed, and in a nitrogen atmosphere, 0.025 mol of 4-dimethylaminopyridine was added at room temperature. Stir at 0 ° C. for 3 hours. After cooling to room temperature, the reaction solution was poured into 150 g of ion-exchanged water, and 200 g of chloroform was added to perform oil / water separation. The organic layer was dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, the solvent was distilled off, and 100 g of methanol was added to the residue for crystallization. The obtained white powder crystal was dried under reduced pressure at 60 ° C. for 3 hours,
A latent antioxidant (compound A) represented by the chemical formula (A) was obtained. The structure of the obtained latent antioxidant was confirmed by IR and NMR.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000028
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000028
(合成例5:分散剤(ブロック共重合体A)の合成)
 冷却管、添加用ロート、窒素用インレット、機械的攪拌機、デジタル温度計を備えた500mL丸底4口セパラブルフラスコにTHF250質量部、塩化リチウム0.6質量部を加え、充分に窒素置換を行った。反応フラスコを-60℃まで冷却した後、ブチルリチウム4.9質量部(15質量%ヘキサン溶液)、ジイソプロピルアミン1.1質量部、イソ酪酸メチル1.0質量部をシリンジを用いて注入した。Bブロック用モノマーのメタクリル酸1-エトキシエチル(EEMA)2.2質量部、メタクリル酸2-ヒドロキシエチル(HEMA)18.7質量部、メタクリル酸2-エチルヘキシル(EHMA)12.8質量部、メタクリル酸n-ブチル(BMA)13.7質量部、メタクリル酸ベンジル(BzMA)9.5質量部、メタクリル酸メチル(MMA)17.5質量部を、添加用ロートを用いて60分かけて滴下した。30分後、Aブロック用モノマーであるメタクリル酸ジメチルアミノエチル(DMMA)26.7質量部を20分かけて滴下した。30分間反応させた後、メタノール1.5質量部を加えて反応を停止させた。得られた前駆体ブロック共重合体THF溶液はヘキサン中で再沈殿させ、濾過、真空乾燥により精製を行い、PGMEAで希釈し固形分30質量%溶液とした。水を32.5質量部加え、100℃に昇温し7時間反応させ、EEMA由来の構成単位を脱保護しメタクリル酸(MAA)由来の構成単位とした。得られたブロック共重合体PGMEA溶液はヘキサン中で再沈殿させ、濾過、真空乾燥により精製を行い、一般式(2)で表される構成単位を含むAブロックとカルボキシ基含有モノマー由来の構成単位を含み親溶剤性を有するBブロックとを含むブロック共重合体A(酸価8mgKOH/g)を得た。このようにして得られたブロック共重合体Aを、GPC(ゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィー)にて確認したところ、重量平均分子量Mwは7730であった。また、アミン価は95mgKOH/gであった。
(Synthesis Example 5: Synthesis of dispersant (block copolymer A))
Add 250 parts by weight of THF and 0.6 parts by weight of lithium chloride to a 500 mL round bottom 4-neck separable flask equipped with a condenser, addition funnel, nitrogen inlet, mechanical stirrer, and digital thermometer, and perform sufficient nitrogen replacement. It was. After cooling the reaction flask to −60 ° C., 4.9 parts by mass of butyllithium (15% by mass hexane solution), 1.1 parts by mass of diisopropylamine and 1.0 part by mass of methyl isobutyrate were injected using a syringe. B block monomer 1-ethoxyethyl methacrylate (EEMA) 2.2 parts by weight, 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate (HEMA) 18.7 parts by weight, 2-ethylhexyl methacrylate (EHMA) 12.8 parts by weight, methacryl 13.7 parts by mass of n-butyl acid (BMA), 9.5 parts by mass of benzyl methacrylate (BzMA), and 17.5 parts by mass of methyl methacrylate (MMA) were added dropwise using an addition funnel over 60 minutes. . After 30 minutes, 26.7 parts by mass of dimethylaminoethyl methacrylate (DMMA), which is a monomer for the A block, was added dropwise over 20 minutes. After reacting for 30 minutes, 1.5 parts by mass of methanol was added to stop the reaction. The obtained precursor block copolymer THF solution was reprecipitated in hexane, purified by filtration and vacuum drying, diluted with PGMEA to obtain a solid content solution of 30% by mass. 32.5 parts by mass of water was added, the temperature was raised to 100 ° C., and the mixture was allowed to react for 7 hours. The structural unit derived from EEMA was deprotected to obtain a structural unit derived from methacrylic acid (MAA). The obtained block copolymer PGMEA solution is reprecipitated in hexane, purified by filtration and vacuum drying, and a structural unit derived from a block containing a structural unit represented by the general formula (2) and a carboxy group-containing monomer A block copolymer A (acid value: 8 mgKOH / g) containing B block having solvophilic property was obtained. The block copolymer A thus obtained was confirmed by GPC (gel permeation chromatography), and the weight average molecular weight Mw was 7730. The amine value was 95 mgKOH / g.
(合成例6:アルカリ可溶性樹脂Aの合成)
 重合槽に、PGMEAを150質量部仕込み、窒素雰囲気下で100℃に昇温した後、メタクリル酸(MAA)21質量部、メタクリル酸メチル(MMA)15質量部、メタクリル酸シクロヘキシル(CHMA)50質量部及びパーブチルO(日油株式会社製)6質量部、連鎖移動剤(n-ドデシルメルカプタン)2質量部を1.5時間かけて連続的に滴下した。その後、100℃を保持して反応を続け、上記主鎖形成用混合物の滴下終了から2時間後に重合禁止剤として、p-メトキシフェノール0.1質量部を添加して重合を停止した。
 次に、空気を吹き込みながら、エポキシ基含有化合物としてメタクリル酸グリシジル(GMA)14質量部を添加して、110℃に昇温した後、トリエチルアミン0.8質量部を添加して110℃で15時間付加反応させ、アルカリ可溶性樹脂A(重量平均分子量(Mw)9020、酸価90mgKOH/g、固形分40質量%)を得た。
 なお、上記重量平均分子量の測定方法は、ポリスチレンを標準物質とし、THFを溶離液としてショウデックスGPCシステム-21H(Shodex GPC System-21H)により重量平均分子量を測定した。また酸価の測定方法は、JIS K 0070:1992に基づいて測定した。
(Synthesis Example 6: Synthesis of alkali-soluble resin A)
A polymerization tank was charged with 150 parts by mass of PGMEA and heated to 100 ° C. in a nitrogen atmosphere, and then 21 parts by mass of methacrylic acid (MAA), 15 parts by mass of methyl methacrylate (MMA), and 50 parts by mass of cyclohexyl methacrylate (CHMA). And 6 parts by mass of perbutyl O (manufactured by NOF Corporation) and 2 parts by mass of a chain transfer agent (n-dodecyl mercaptan) were continuously added dropwise over 1.5 hours. Thereafter, the reaction was continued while maintaining 100 ° C., and after 2 hours from the completion of dropping of the main chain forming mixture, 0.1 part by mass of p-methoxyphenol was added as a polymerization inhibitor to terminate the polymerization.
Next, while blowing air, 14 parts by mass of glycidyl methacrylate (GMA) was added as an epoxy group-containing compound, and the temperature was raised to 110 ° C. Then, 0.8 parts by mass of triethylamine was added and the mixture was heated at 110 ° C. for 15 hours. By addition reaction, alkali-soluble resin A (weight average molecular weight (Mw) 9020, acid value 90 mgKOH / g, solid content 40% by mass) was obtained.
The weight average molecular weight was measured by a Shodex GPC System-21H (Shorex GPC System-21H) using polystyrene as a standard substance and THF as an eluent. The acid value was measured based on JIS K 0070: 1992.
(調製例1:色材分散液Aの調製)
 225mLマヨネーズ瓶中に、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセタート(PGMEA)68.8質量部、ブロック共重合体A(アミン価95mgKOH/g)2.7質量部を入れ攪拌した。そこへフェニルホスホン酸(商品名:PPA、日産化学社製)2.45質量部(ブロック共重合体の3級アミノ基に対して0.7モル当量)を加え、室温で30分攪拌して塩型ブロック共重合体溶液を得た。
 アルカリ可溶性樹脂A(固形分40質量%)を13.0質量部加え、室温で撹拌後、前記色材A 13.0質量部、粒径2.0mmジルコニアビーズ100質量部を入れ、予備解砕としてペイントシェーカー(浅田鉄工社製)で1時間振とうし、次いで粒径0.1mmのジルコニアビーズ200部に変更し本解砕としてペイントシェーカーで4時間分散を行い、色材分散液Aを得た。
(Preparation Example 1: Preparation of colorant dispersion A)
In a 225 mL mayonnaise bottle, 68.8 parts by mass of propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (PGMEA) and 2.7 parts by mass of block copolymer A (amine value 95 mgKOH / g) were added and stirred. Thereto, 2.45 parts by mass of phenylphosphonic acid (trade name: PPA, manufactured by Nissan Chemical Co., Ltd.) (0.7 molar equivalent to the tertiary amino group of the block copolymer) was added and stirred at room temperature for 30 minutes. A salt type block copolymer solution was obtained.
Add 13.0 parts by mass of alkali-soluble resin A (solid content: 40% by mass), stir at room temperature, add 13.0 parts by mass of coloring material A, and 100 parts by mass of zirconia beads having a particle size of 2.0 mm, and pre-crush Shake for 1 hour with a paint shaker (manufactured by Asada Tekko Co., Ltd.), then change to 200 parts of zirconia beads with a particle size of 0.1 mm and disperse for 4 hours with the paint shaker as the main crushing to obtain a colorant dispersion A It was.
(調製例2:色材分散液Bの調製)
 前記調製例1において、色材Aの代わりに、色材Bを用いた以外は、調製例1と同様にして、色材分散液Bを得た。
(Preparation Example 2: Preparation of colorant dispersion B)
A color material dispersion B was obtained in the same manner as in Preparation Example 1 except that Color Material B was used instead of Color Material A in Preparation Example 1.
(調製例3:色材分散液Cの調製)
 フラスコに、色材C 100質量部に対し、メタノールを1000質量部加えてマグネチックスターラーにて溶解させた。溶解を確認後、濃塩酸19質量部を加え攪拌して、さらにPGMEA1000質量部を加えた。次いで分散剤ブロック共重合体A198質量部を加えて攪拌した。その後、還流冷却管を接続し、ウォーターバスにて80℃まで昇温させ、80℃到達後4時間反応させた。その後エバポレーターにより、ウォーターバス45℃でメタノールを溜去し、PGMEA1000質量部を加えた後16時間室温で冷却放置した。次いでろ過して得られたろ液を回収し、染料が均一に分散された色材分散液Cを得た。
(Preparation Example 3: Preparation of colorant dispersion C)
To the flask, 1000 parts by mass of methanol was added to 100 parts by mass of the coloring material C, and dissolved with a magnetic stirrer. After confirming dissolution, 19 parts by mass of concentrated hydrochloric acid was added and stirred, and 1000 parts by mass of PGMEA was further added. Next, 198 parts by mass of dispersant block copolymer A was added and stirred. Thereafter, a reflux condenser was connected, the temperature was raised to 80 ° C. with a water bath, and the reaction was performed for 4 hours after reaching 80 ° C. Thereafter, methanol was distilled off by an evaporator at a water bath of 45 ° C., 1000 parts by mass of PGMEA was added, and the mixture was allowed to cool at room temperature for 16 hours. Next, the filtrate obtained by filtration was collected to obtain a colorant dispersion C in which the dye was uniformly dispersed.
(製造例1:感光性バインダーAの調製)
 合成例6で得られたアルカリ可溶性樹脂A溶液(固形分40質量%)23.5質量部に対して、多官能モノマーとしてジペンタエリスリトールペンタ(メタ)アクリレート(アロニックスM403(東亜合成製))14.1質量部、開始剤としてイルガキュア907(3級アミン構造を有する光開始剤:BASF製)4.4質量部、NCI-930(オキシムエステル系光開始剤:ADEKA製)1.5質量部、合成例4の化合物A(潜在性酸化防止剤)を0.6質量部、PGMEA55.9質量部を加えて、感光性バインダーAを得た。
(Production Example 1: Preparation of photosensitive binder A)
Dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate (Aronix M403 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.)) 14 as a polyfunctional monomer with respect to 23.5 parts by mass of the alkali-soluble resin A solution (solid content 40% by mass) obtained in Synthesis Example 6 .1 part by mass, Irgacure 907 (photoinitiator having tertiary amine structure: manufactured by BASF) as an initiator, 4.4 parts by mass, NCI-930 (oxime ester photoinitiator: manufactured by ADEKA), 1.5 parts by mass, 0.6 parts by mass of Compound A (latent antioxidant) of Synthesis Example 4 and 55.9 parts by mass of PGMEA were added to obtain a photosensitive binder A.
(製造例2~6:感光性バインダーB~Fの調製)
 製造例1において、配合割合を下記表1のように変更した以外は、製造例1と同様にし、感光性バインダーB~Fを得た。なお表1中の化合物αは、BASF社製酸化防止剤IRGANOX1010を表す。
(Production Examples 2 to 6: Preparation of photosensitive binders B to F)
Photosensitive binders B to F were obtained in the same manner as in Production Example 1 except that the blending ratio in Production Example 1 was changed as shown in Table 1 below. In addition, the compound (alpha) in Table 1 represents the antioxidant IRGANOX1010 by BASF Corporation.
(比較製造例1~2:感光性バインダーG~Hの調製)
 製造例1において、配合割合を下記表1のように変更した以外は、製造例1と同様にし、感光性バインダーG~Hを得た。
(Comparative Production Examples 1 and 2: Preparation of photosensitive binders G to H)
Photosensitive binders G to H were obtained in the same manner as in Production Example 1 except that the blending ratio in Production Example 1 was changed as shown in Table 1 below.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000029
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000029
(実施例1:感光性着色樹脂組成物1の調製)
 調製例1で得られた色材分散液A 24.6質量部、製造例1で得られた感光性バインダーA 34.1質量部、界面活性剤メガファックR08MH(DIC製)0.16質量部、PGMEA41.1質量部を混合し、実施例1の感光性着色樹脂組成物1を得た。
(Example 1: Preparation of photosensitive colored resin composition 1)
24.6 parts by mass of the colorant dispersion A obtained in Preparation Example 1, 34.1 parts by mass of the photosensitive binder A obtained in Production Example 1, and 0.16 parts by mass of the surfactant Megafac R08MH (manufactured by DIC) 41.1 parts by mass of PGMEA were mixed to obtain a photosensitive colored resin composition 1 of Example 1.
(実施例2~6:感光性着色樹脂組成物2~6の調製)
 実施例1において、感光性バインダーAの代わりに、製造例2~6の感光性バインダーB~Fをそれぞれ用いた以外は、実施例1と同様にして、感光性着色樹脂組成物2~6を得た。
(Examples 2 to 6: Preparation of photosensitive colored resin compositions 2 to 6)
In Example 1, photosensitive colored resin compositions 2 to 6 were prepared in the same manner as in Example 1, except that photosensitive binders B to F of Production Examples 2 to 6 were used instead of photosensitive binder A, respectively. Obtained.
(比較例1~2:感光性着色樹脂組成物X1~X2の調製)
 実施例1において、感光性バインダーAの代わりに、比較製造例1~2の感光性バインダーG~Hをそれぞれ用いた以外は、実施例1と同様にして、感光性着色樹脂組成物X1~X2を得た。
(Comparative Examples 1 and 2: Preparation of photosensitive colored resin compositions X1 and X2)
In Example 1, photosensitive colored resin compositions X1 to X2 were used in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the photosensitive binders G to H of Comparative Production Examples 1 and 2 were used in place of the photosensitive binder A, respectively. Got.
(実施例7:感光性着色樹脂組成物7の調製)
 実施例1において、色材分散液A 24.6質量部の代わりに、色材分散液A 17.2質量部と、色材分散液B 7.4質量部とを組み合わせて用いた以外は、実施例1と同様にして、感光性着色樹脂組成物7を得た。
(Example 7: Preparation of photosensitive colored resin composition 7)
In Example 1, instead of using 24.6 parts by mass of the color material dispersion A, 17.2 parts by mass of the color material dispersion A and 7.4 parts by mass of the color material dispersion B were used in combination. In the same manner as in Example 1, a photosensitive colored resin composition 7 was obtained.
(実施例8~9:感光性着色樹脂組成物8~9の調製)
 実施例7において、感光性バインダーAの代わりに、製造例2の感光性バインダーB、製造例4の感光性バインダーDをそれぞれ用いた以外は、実施例7と同様にして、感光性着色樹脂組成物8~9を得た。
(Examples 8 to 9: Preparation of photosensitive colored resin compositions 8 to 9)
In Example 7, a photosensitive colored resin composition was used in the same manner as in Example 7 except that instead of the photosensitive binder A, the photosensitive binder B of Production Example 2 and the photosensitive binder D of Production Example 4 were used. Products 8-9 were obtained.
(比較例3~4:感光性着色樹脂組成物X3~X4の調製)
 実施例7において、感光性バインダーAの代わりに、比較製造例1~2の感光性バインダーG~Hをそれぞれ用いた以外は、実施例7と同様にして、感光性着色樹脂組成物X3~X4を得た。
(Comparative Examples 3 to 4: Preparation of photosensitive colored resin compositions X3 to X4)
In Example 7, photosensitive colored resin compositions X3 to X4 were used in the same manner as in Example 7 except that the photosensitive binders G to H of Comparative Production Examples 1 and 2 were used in place of the photosensitive binder A, respectively. Got.
(実施例10:感光性着色樹脂組成物10の調製)
 実施例1において、色材分散液A 24.6質量部の代わりに、色材分散液A 19.7質量部と、色材分散液C 8.3質量部とを組み合わせて用い、感光性バインダーAの配合量を33.9質量部、PGMEAの配合量を37.9質量部に変更した以外は、実施例1と同様にして、感光性着色樹脂組成物10を得た。
(Example 10: Preparation of photosensitive colored resin composition 10)
In Example 1, instead of 24.6 parts by mass of the color material dispersion A, 19.7 parts by mass of the color material dispersion A and 8.3 parts by mass of the color material dispersion C were used in combination. A photosensitive colored resin composition 10 was obtained in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the amount of A was changed to 33.9 parts by mass and the amount of PGMEA was changed to 37.9 parts by mass.
(実施例11~12:感光性着色樹脂組成物11~12の調製)
 実施例10において、感光性バインダーAの代わりに、製造例2の感光性バインダーB、製造例4の感光性バインダーDをそれぞれ用いた以外は、実施例10と同様にして、感光性着色樹脂組成物11~12を得た。
(Examples 11 to 12: Preparation of photosensitive colored resin compositions 11 to 12)
In Example 10, a photosensitive colored resin composition was used in the same manner as in Example 10 except that instead of the photosensitive binder A, the photosensitive binder B of Production Example 2 and the photosensitive binder D of Production Example 4 were used. Items 11-12 were obtained.
(比較例5~6:感光性着色樹脂組成物X5~X6の調製)
 実施例10において、感光性バインダーAの代わりに、比較製造例1~2の感光性バインダーG~Hをそれぞれ用いた以外は、実施例10と同様にして、感光性着色樹脂組成物X5~X6を得た。
(Comparative Examples 5 to 6: Preparation of photosensitive colored resin compositions X5 to X6)
In Example 10, photosensitive colored resin compositions X5 to X6 were used in the same manner as in Example 10 except that the photosensitive binders G to H of Comparative Production Examples 1 and 2 were used in place of the photosensitive binder A, respectively. Got.
(実施例13:感光性着色樹脂組成物13の調製)
 実施例1において、色材分散液A 24.6質量部の代わりに、色材分散液C 41.6質量部を用い、感光性バインダーAの配合量を33.1質量部、PGMEAの配合量を25.2質量部に変更した以外は、実施例1と同様にして、感光性着色樹脂組成物13を得た。
(Example 13: Preparation of photosensitive colored resin composition 13)
In Example 1, 41.6 parts by mass of the colorant dispersion C was used instead of 24.6 parts by mass of the colorant dispersion A, and the compounding amount of the photosensitive binder A was 33.1 parts by mass, and the compounding amount of PGMEA Except having changed into 25.2 mass parts, it carried out similarly to Example 1, and obtained the photosensitive colored resin composition 13.
(実施例14~15:感光性着色樹脂組成物14~15の調製)
 実施例13において、感光性バインダーAの代わりに、製造例2の感光性バインダーB、製造例4の感光性バインダーDをそれぞれ用いた以外は、実施例13と同様にして、感光性着色樹脂組成物14~15を得た。
(Examples 14 to 15: Preparation of photosensitive colored resin compositions 14 to 15)
In Example 13, a photosensitive colored resin composition was prepared in the same manner as in Example 13 except that instead of the photosensitive binder A, the photosensitive binder B of Production Example 2 and the photosensitive binder D of Production Example 4 were used. Items 14 to 15 were obtained.
(比較例7~8:感光性着色樹脂組成物X7~X8の調製)
 実施例13において、感光性バインダーAの代わりに、比較製造例1~2の感光性バインダーG~Hをそれぞれ用いた以外は、実施例13と同様にして、感光性着色樹脂組成物X7~X8を得た。
(Comparative Examples 7 to 8: Preparation of photosensitive colored resin compositions X7 to X8)
In Example 13, photosensitive colored resin compositions X7 to X8 were used in the same manner as in Example 13 except that the photosensitive binders G to H of Comparative Production Examples 1 and 2 were used in place of the photosensitive binder A, respectively. Got.
(輝度評価)
 実施例及び比較例の感光性着色樹脂組成物を、それぞれ厚み0.7mmのガラス基板(NHテクノグラス(株)製、「NA35」)上に、スピンコーターを用いて塗布した。80℃のホットプレート上で3分間加熱乾燥を行った後、超高圧水銀灯を用いて60mJ/cmの紫外線を照射した。その後、230℃のクリーンオーブンで75分間ポストベイクした。前記紫外線の照射前後において、それぞれ着色膜色度(x、y)、輝度(Y)を測定した。色度及び輝度はオリンパス(株)社製「顕微分光測定装置OSP-SP200」を用いて測定した。結果を表2~5に示す。
(Luminance evaluation)
The photosensitive colored resin compositions of Examples and Comparative Examples were each applied on a 0.7 mm-thick glass substrate (NH Techno Glass Co., Ltd., “NA35”) using a spin coater. After drying for 3 minutes on a hot plate at 80 ° C., ultraviolet rays of 60 mJ / cm 2 were irradiated using an ultra-high pressure mercury lamp. Thereafter, it was post-baked in a clean oven at 230 ° C. for 75 minutes. Before and after the ultraviolet irradiation, the color film chromaticity (x, y) and luminance (Y) were measured. The chromaticity and luminance were measured using “Microspectroscope OSP-SP200” manufactured by Olympus Corporation. The results are shown in Tables 2-5.
(線幅増減率評価)
 各実施例及び各比較例で得られた感光性着色樹脂組成物を、ガラス基板(NHテクノグラス(株)社製、「NA35」)上に、スピンコーターを用いて硬化塗膜が厚さ3.0μmとなるように塗布した後、ホットプレートを用いて80℃で3分間乾燥しガラス基板上に塗膜を形成した。この塗膜に線幅1μmから100μmまでの独立細線パターンフォトマスクを介して、超高圧水銀灯を用いて60mJ/cmの紫外線で露光することにより、ガラス基板上に露光後塗膜を形成し、次いで、0.05wt%水酸化カリウム水溶液を現像液としてスピン現像し、現像液に60秒間接液させた後に純水で洗浄することで現像処理し、その後、230℃のクリーンオーブンで25分間ポストベークし、細線パターンを形成した。形成された細線パターンのうち、露光時のクロムマスクの開口幅が90μmに当たる部分の細線パターンの幅を光学顕微鏡で測定し、酸化防止剤を添加していない比較例の線幅を基準として、下記数式(2)により、線幅増減率を算出した。結果を表2~5に示す。
        数式(2): (L-L)/L×100(%)
 数式(2)中、Lは、酸化防止剤を添加していない比較例の線幅、Lは評価対象となる実施例又は比較例の線幅を表す。
<評価基準>
A:酸化防止剤を添加しない線幅に対して-3%以上
B:酸化防止剤を添加しない線幅に対して-10%以上-3%未満
C:酸化防止剤を添加しない線幅に対して-10%未満
(Evaluation of line width change rate)
The photosensitive colored resin composition obtained in each example and each comparative example was coated on a glass substrate (NH Techno Glass Co., Ltd., “NA35”) using a spin coater to obtain a cured coating film having a thickness of 3 After coating to a thickness of 0.0 μm, it was dried at 80 ° C. for 3 minutes using a hot plate to form a coating film on the glass substrate. By exposing the coating film with ultraviolet light of 60 mJ / cm 2 using an ultrahigh pressure mercury lamp through an independent fine line pattern photomask having a line width of 1 μm to 100 μm, a post-exposure coating film is formed on the glass substrate, Next, 0.05 wt% aqueous potassium hydroxide solution is spin-developed as a developing solution, the developing solution is subjected to an indirect solution for 60 seconds and then washed with pure water, followed by post-processing for 25 minutes in a 230 ° C. clean oven. Baking was performed to form a fine line pattern. Among the formed fine line patterns, the width of the fine line pattern of the portion where the opening width of the chromium mask at the time of exposure corresponds to 90 μm is measured with an optical microscope, and based on the line width of the comparative example in which no antioxidant is added, The line width increase / decrease rate was calculated according to Equation (2). The results are shown in Tables 2-5.
Formula (2): (L−L 0 ) / L 0 × 100 (%)
In Formula (2), L 0 represents the line width of the comparative example to which no antioxidant is added, and L represents the line width of the example or comparative example to be evaluated.
<Evaluation criteria>
A: -3% or more with respect to the line width to which no antioxidant is added B: -10% to less than -3% with respect to the line width to which no antioxidant is added C: against the line width to which no antioxidant is added Less than -10%
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000030
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000030
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000031
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000031
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000032
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000032
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000033
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000033
[表2~表5の結果のまとめ]
 従来の酸化防止剤を用いた比較例2、4、6及び8の感光性着色樹脂組成物を用いた着色層は、酸化防止剤を用いない比較例1、3、5及び7と比較して、線幅変化が大きいことが明らかとなった。一方、比較例1、3、5及び7は、酸化防止剤を含有しないため、線幅の変化は抑制されているものの、輝度が低下した。潜在性酸化防止剤を用いた実施例1~15の感光性樹脂組成物は、同一の色材を含む比較例と比較して、輝度が高く、また、従来の酸化防止剤を用いた比較例と比較して、線幅変化が抑制されていることが明らかとなった。このような結果から、本発明によれば、高輝度な着色層を形成可能で、かつ、線幅の変化が抑制された感光性着色樹脂組成物が得られることが明らかとなった。
 表2の結果に示される通り、潜在性酸化防止剤と、酸化防止剤とを組み合わせることにより、線幅変化を抑制しつつ、潜在性酸化防止剤単独で用いた場合よりも、耐光性が向上して紫外線照射による着色層の輝度の低下を抑制することができることが示された。
 また、表5の結果に示される通り、染料である色材Cを含有する感光性着色樹脂組成物は、線幅が細くなる傾向にあった。これは、染料である色材Cが感度を低下させたためと推測される。特に、比較例8の着色樹脂組成物を用いた着色層は、このような色材Cと、酸化防止剤との組み合わせにより、露光部であっても感度が不十分となり、現像に耐えられる硬度が得られず、細線パターンが形成されなかった。実施例13~15に示される通り、潜在性酸化防止剤を用いた本発明の感光性着色樹脂組成物は、このような染料を含む場合であっても良好な感度が得られ、線幅の変化が抑制されることが明らかとなった。
[Summary of results in Table 2 to Table 5]
The colored layer using the photosensitive colored resin composition of Comparative Examples 2, 4, 6 and 8 using the conventional antioxidant is compared with Comparative Examples 1, 3, 5 and 7 using no antioxidant. It was revealed that the line width change was large. On the other hand, since Comparative Examples 1, 3, 5 and 7 did not contain an antioxidant, the change in line width was suppressed, but the luminance was lowered. The photosensitive resin compositions of Examples 1 to 15 using the latent antioxidant have higher brightness than the comparative examples containing the same color material, and the comparative examples using the conventional antioxidant It was revealed that the line width change was suppressed as compared with. From these results, it became clear that according to the present invention, a photosensitive colored resin composition capable of forming a high-luminance colored layer and suppressing a change in line width can be obtained.
As shown in the results of Table 2, by combining the latent antioxidant and the antioxidant, the light resistance is improved as compared with the case where the latent antioxidant is used alone while suppressing the change in the line width. As a result, it was shown that the decrease in luminance of the colored layer due to ultraviolet irradiation can be suppressed.
Further, as shown in the results of Table 5, the photosensitive colored resin composition containing the coloring material C as a dye tended to have a narrow line width. This is presumably because the coloring material C, which is a dye, has decreased sensitivity. In particular, the colored layer using the colored resin composition of Comparative Example 8 has such a combination that the color material C and the antioxidant are insufficient in sensitivity even in the exposed portion, and has a hardness that can withstand development. Was not obtained, and a fine line pattern was not formed. As shown in Examples 13 to 15, the photosensitive colored resin composition of the present invention using the latent antioxidant can obtain good sensitivity even when such a dye is contained, and has a line width of It became clear that the change was suppressed.
(製造例7:感光性バインダーIの調製)
 合成例6で得られたアルカリ可溶性樹脂A溶液(固形分40質量%)23.5質量部に対して、多官能モノマーとしてジペンタエリスリトールペンタ(メタ)アクリレート(アロニックスM403(東亜合成製))14.1質量部、開始剤としてイルガキュア907(3級アミン構造を有する光開始剤:BASF製)2.9質量部、NCI-930(オキシムエステル系光開始剤:ADEKA製)1.5質量部、PBG3057(オキシムエステル系光開始剤、常州強力電子新材料社製、「TR-PBG-3057」)1.5質量部、合成例4の化合物A(潜在性酸化防止剤)を0.6質量部、PGMEA55.9質量部を加えて、感光性バインダーIを得た。
(Production Example 7: Preparation of photosensitive binder I)
Dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate (Aronix M403 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.)) 14 as a polyfunctional monomer with respect to 23.5 parts by mass of the alkali-soluble resin A solution (solid content 40% by mass) obtained in Synthesis Example 6 .1 part by mass, Irgacure 907 (photoinitiator having tertiary amine structure: manufactured by BASF) 2.9 parts by mass as an initiator, NCI-930 (oxime ester photoinitiator: manufactured by ADEKA) 1.5 parts by mass, 1.5 parts by mass of PBG3057 (oxime ester photoinitiator, Changzhou Power Electronics New Materials Co., Ltd., “TR-PBG-3057”), 0.6 parts by mass of Compound A (latent antioxidant) of Synthesis Example 4 And 55.9 parts by mass of PGMEA were added to obtain a photosensitive binder I.
(製造例8、比較製造例3:感光性バインダーJ,Kの調製)
 製造例7において、配合割合を下記表6のように変更した以外は、製造例7と同様にし、感光性バインダーJ,Kを得た。なお表6中の化合物αは、BASF社製酸化防止剤IRGANOX1010を表す。
(Production Example 8, Comparative Production Example 3: Preparation of photosensitive binders J and K)
In Production Example 7, photosensitive binders J and K were obtained in the same manner as Production Example 7 except that the blending ratio was changed as shown in Table 6 below. In addition, the compound (alpha) in Table 6 represents the antioxidant IRGANOX1010 by BASF Corporation.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000034
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000034
(実施例16:感光性着色樹脂組成物16の調製)
 調製例1で得られた色材分散液A 24.6質量部、製造例7で得られた感光性バインダーI 34.1質量部、界面活性剤メガファックR08MH(DIC製)0.16質量部、PGMEA41.1質量部を混合し、実施例16の感光性着色樹脂組成物16を得た。
(Example 16: Preparation of photosensitive colored resin composition 16)
24.6 parts by mass of the colorant dispersion A obtained in Preparation Example 1, 34.1 parts by mass of the photosensitive binder I obtained in Production Example 7, and 0.16 parts by mass of the surfactant MegaFac R08MH (manufactured by DIC) 41.1 parts by mass of PGMEA were mixed to obtain a photosensitive colored resin composition 16 of Example 16.
(実施例17、比較例9:感光性着色樹脂組成物17、X9の調製)
 実施例16において、感光性バインダーIの代わりに、製造例8、比較製造例3の感光性バインダーJ,Kをそれぞれ用いた以外は、実施例16と同様にして、感光性着色樹脂組成物17、X9を得た。
(Example 17, Comparative Example 9: Preparation of photosensitive colored resin composition 17, X9)
In Example 16, photosensitive colored resin composition 17 was prepared in the same manner as in Example 16 except that photosensitive binders J and K of Production Example 8 and Comparative Production Example 3 were used instead of photosensitive binder I. X9 was obtained.
(実施例18:感光性着色樹脂組成物18の調製)
 実施例16において、色材分散液A 24.6質量部の代わりに、色材分散液A 17.2質量部と、色材分散液B 7.4質量部とを組み合わせて用いた以外は、実施例16と同様にして、感光性着色樹脂組成物18を得た。
(Example 18: Preparation of photosensitive colored resin composition 18)
In Example 16, instead of using 24.6 parts by mass of the color material dispersion A, 17.2 parts by mass of the color material dispersion A and 7.4 parts by mass of the color material dispersion B were used in combination. In the same manner as in Example 16, a photosensitive colored resin composition 18 was obtained.
(実施例19、比較例10:感光性着色樹脂組成物19、X10の調製)
 実施例18において、感光性バインダーIの代わりに、製造例8、比較製造例3の感光性バインダーJ,Kをそれぞれ用いた以外は、実施例18と同様にして、感光性着色樹脂組成物19、X10を得た。
(Example 19, Comparative Example 10: Preparation of photosensitive colored resin composition 19, X10)
In Example 18, the photosensitive colored resin composition 19 was used in the same manner as in Example 18 except that instead of the photosensitive binder I, the photosensitive binders J and K of Production Example 8 and Comparative Production Example 3 were used, respectively. X10 was obtained.
(実施例20:感光性着色樹脂組成物20の調製)
 実施例16において、色材分散液A 24.6質量部の代わりに、色材分散液A 19.7質量部と、色材分散液C 8.3質量部とを組み合わせて用い、感光性バインダーIの配合量を33.9質量部、PGMEAの配合量を37.9質量部に変更した以外は、実施例16と同様にして、感光性着色樹脂組成物20を得た。
(Example 20: Preparation of photosensitive colored resin composition 20)
In Example 16, instead of 24.6 parts by mass of the color material dispersion A, 19.7 parts by mass of the color material dispersion A and 8.3 parts by mass of the color material dispersion C were used in combination. A photosensitive colored resin composition 20 was obtained in the same manner as in Example 16, except that the amount of I was changed to 33.9 parts by mass and the amount of PGMEA was changed to 37.9 parts by mass.
(実施例21、比較例11:感光性着色樹脂組成物21、X11の調製)
 実施例20において、感光性バインダーIの代わりに、製造例8、比較製造例3の感光性バインダーJ,Kをそれぞれ用いた以外は、実施例20と同様にして、感光性着色樹脂組成物21、X11を得た。
(Example 21, Comparative Example 11: Preparation of photosensitive colored resin composition 21, X11)
In Example 20, the photosensitive colored resin composition 21 was used in the same manner as in Example 20 except that instead of the photosensitive binder I, the photosensitive binders J and K of Production Example 8 and Comparative Production Example 3 were used, respectively. X11 was obtained.
(実施例22:感光性着色樹脂組成物22の調製)
 実施例16において、色材分散液A 24.6質量部の代わりに、色材分散液C 41.6質量部を用い、感光性バインダーIの配合量を33.1質量部、PGMEAの配合量を25.2質量部に変更した以外は、実施例16と同様にして、感光性着色樹脂組成物22を得た。
(Example 22: Preparation of photosensitive colored resin composition 22)
In Example 16, in place of 24.6 parts by mass of the color material dispersion A, 41.6 parts by mass of the color material dispersion C was used, the blending amount of the photosensitive binder I was 33.1 parts by mass, and the blending amount of PGMEA. A photosensitive colored resin composition 22 was obtained in the same manner as in Example 16 except that the amount was changed to 25.2 parts by mass.
(実施例23、比較例12:感光性着色樹脂組成物23、X12の調製)
 実施例22において、感光性バインダーIの代わりに、製造例8、比較製造例3の感光性バインダーJ,Kをそれぞれ用いた以外は、実施例22と同様にして、感光性着色樹脂組成物23、X12を得た。
(Example 23, Comparative Example 12: Preparation of photosensitive colored resin composition 23, X12)
In Example 22, the photosensitive colored resin composition 23 was obtained in the same manner as in Example 22 except that the photosensitive binders J and K of Production Example 8 and Comparative Production Example 3 were used instead of the photosensitive binder I. X12 was obtained.
 得られた実施例16~23、及び比較例9~12の感光性着色樹脂組成物について、実施例1の感光性着色樹脂組成物と同様に、輝度評価と、線幅増減率評価を行った。結果を表7に示す。 The resulting photosensitive colored resin compositions of Examples 16 to 23 and Comparative Examples 9 to 12 were evaluated for luminance and line width increase / decrease rate in the same manner as the photosensitive colored resin composition of Example 1. . The results are shown in Table 7.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000035
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000035
 得られた実施例1、7、10、13、16、18、20、22の感光性着色樹脂組成物について、下記のように、水染み評価と、現像耐性評価を行った。結果を表8に示す。 For the photosensitive colored resin compositions of Examples 1, 7, 10, 13, 16, 18, 20, and 22 obtained, water stain evaluation and development resistance evaluation were performed as follows. The results are shown in Table 8.
(水染み評価)
 上記カラーフィルタ用感光性着色樹脂組成物を、ガラス基板(NHテクノグラス(株)社製、「NA35」)上に、スピンコーターを用いてポストベーク後に厚さ1.6μmの着色層を形成する膜厚で塗布した後、ホットプレートを用いて60℃で3分間乾燥し、フォトマスクを介さずに超高圧水銀灯を用いて60mJ/cmの紫外線を全面照射することにより、ガラス基板上に着色層を形成した。次いで、0.05wt%カリウム(KOH)を現像液としてスピン現像し、現像液に60秒間接液させた後に純水で洗浄することで現像処理し、洗浄後の基板を10秒間回転させ水を遠心除去した直後に、下記のように純水の接触角を測定して水染みを評価した。
 純水の接触角の測定は、前記水を遠心除去した直後の着色層表面に、純水1.0μLの液滴を滴下し、着滴30秒後の静的接触角をθ/2法に従って計測した。測定装置は、協和界面科学社製 接触角計DM 500を用いて、測定した。
<評価基準>
A:接触角80度以上
B:接触角65度以上80度未満
C:接触角50度以上65度未満
D:接触角50度未満
 水染み評価基準がA又はBであれば、実用上使用できるが、評価結果がAであればより効果が優れている。
(Water stain evaluation)
A colored layer having a thickness of 1.6 μm is formed on the glass substrate (NH Techno Glass Co., Ltd., “NA35”) after post-baking the photosensitive colored resin composition for color filter using a spin coater. After coating with a film thickness, it is dried at 60 ° C. for 3 minutes using a hot plate, and colored on the glass substrate by irradiating the entire surface with 60 mJ / cm 2 ultraviolet rays using an ultrahigh pressure mercury lamp without using a photomask. A layer was formed. Next, spin development is performed using 0.05 wt% potassium (KOH) as a developer, the developer is subjected to an indirect solution for 60 seconds and then washed with pure water, and the washed substrate is rotated for 10 seconds to remove water. Immediately after centrifugation, the contact angle of pure water was measured as described below to evaluate water stain.
The contact angle of pure water is measured by dropping 1.0 μL of pure water on the surface of the colored layer immediately after removing the water by centrifugation, and determining the static contact angle 30 seconds after the landing according to the θ / 2 method. Measured. The measuring device was measured using a contact angle meter DM 500 manufactured by Kyowa Interface Science Co., Ltd.
<Evaluation criteria>
A: Contact angle of 80 ° or more B: Contact angle of 65 ° or more and less than 80 ° C: Contact angle of 50 ° or more and less than 65 ° D: Contact angle of less than 50 ° If the water stain evaluation standard is A or B, it can be used practically. However, if the evaluation result is A, the effect is more excellent.
(現像耐性評価)
 上記カラーフィルタ用感光性着色樹脂組成物を、それぞれ厚み0.7mmのガラス基板(NHテクノグラス(株)製、「NA35」)上に、スピンコーターを用いて塗布した。80℃のホットプレート上で3分間加熱乾燥を行った後、超高圧水銀灯を用いて30mJ/cmの紫外線を照射した。この時点での膜厚を測定して、T1(μm)とする。その後、アルカリ現像液として0.05質量%水酸化カリウム水溶液を用いてシャワー現像した。現像後の膜厚を測定してT2(μm)とする。T2/T1×100(%)を計算した。
(現像耐性評価基準)
 A:95%以上
 B:90%以上95%未満
 C:90%未満
 評価結果がBであれば実用上使用できるが、上記評価基準がAであれば、より効果が優れている。
(Development resistance evaluation)
The photosensitive colored resin composition for a color filter was applied on a glass substrate having a thickness of 0.7 mm (“NA35” manufactured by NH Techno Glass Co., Ltd.) using a spin coater. After heating and drying on an 80 ° C. hot plate for 3 minutes, ultraviolet rays of 30 mJ / cm 2 were irradiated using an ultrahigh pressure mercury lamp. The film thickness at this point is measured and set to T1 (μm). Thereafter, shower development was performed using a 0.05% by mass aqueous potassium hydroxide solution as an alkaline developer. The film thickness after development is measured and set to T2 (μm). T2 / T1 × 100 (%) was calculated.
(Development resistance evaluation criteria)
A: 95% or more B: 90% or more and less than 95% C: less than 90% If the evaluation result is B, it can be used practically, but if the evaluation criterion is A, the effect is more excellent.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000036
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000036
[表7~表8の結果のまとめ]
 表7の結果から、オキシム系開始剤を少なくとも2種含むと、線幅が大きくなり、感度が向上することが示された。また、表8の結果から、オキシム系開始剤を少なくとも2種含むと、現像耐性が向上し、水染み発生抑制効果が高くなることが示された。
[Summary of results in Tables 7 to 8]
From the results of Table 7, it was shown that when at least two oxime initiators were included, the line width was increased and the sensitivity was improved. In addition, the results shown in Table 8 indicate that when at least two oxime initiators are included, the development resistance is improved, and the effect of suppressing the occurrence of water stains is enhanced.
 1 基板
 2 遮光部
 3 着色層
 10 カラーフィルタ
 20 対向基板
 30 液晶層
 40 液晶表示装置
 50 有機保護層
 60 無機酸化膜
 71 透明陽極
 72 正孔注入層
 73 正孔輸送層
 74 発光層
 75 電子注入層
 76 陰極
 80 有機発光体
100 有機発光表示装置
DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Substrate 2 Light-shielding part 3 Colored layer 10 Color filter 20 Counter substrate 30 Liquid crystal layer 40 Liquid crystal display device 50 Organic protective layer 60 Inorganic oxide film 71 Transparent anode 72 Hole injection layer 73 Hole transport layer 74 Light emitting layer 75 Electron injection layer 76 Cathode 80 Organic light emitter 100 Organic light emitting display device

Claims (10)

  1.  色材と、光重合性化合物と、開始剤と、潜在性酸化防止剤と、溶剤とを含有し、前記色材が、染料及びレーキ色材より選択される1種以上を含み、前記潜在性酸化防止剤が下記一般式(1)で表される化合物を含む、感光性着色樹脂組成物。
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001
    (一般式(1)中、環Aは、五員環又は六員環の炭化水素環又は複素環であり、
     Rは、それぞれ独立に、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、水酸基、ニトロ基、カルボキシ基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素原子数1~40のアルキル基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素原子数6~20のアリール基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素原子数7~20のアリールアルキル基、又は置換基を有していてもよい炭素原子数2~20の複素環含有基であるか、又は、複数のR同士が結合してベンゼン環若しくはナフタレン環を形成し、
     Rは、炭素原子数1~20のアルキル基、炭素原子数2~20のアルケニル基、炭素原子数6~20のアリール基、炭素原子数7~20のアリールアルキル基、炭素原子数2~20の複素環含有基、又はトリアルキルシリル基であり、
     R及びRが有するアルキル基中に、炭素-炭素二重結合、-O-、-S-、-C(=O)-、-O-C(=O)-、-C(=O)-O-、-O-C(=O)-O-、-S-C(=O)-、-C(=O)-S-、-S-C(=O)-O-、-O-C(=O)-S-、-C(=O)-NH-、-NH-C(=O)-、-NH-C(=O)-O-、-NR’-、-S-S-又は-SO-を有してもよく、R’は、水素原子又は炭素原子数1~8のアルキル基であり、複数あるR及びRはそれぞれ同一であっても異なっていてもよい。
     Xは、a価の基であって、直接結合、窒素原子、酸素原子、硫黄原子、リン原子、(-O)P=O、>C=O、>NR、-OR、-SR、-N(R)(R)、置換基を有していてもよい炭素原子数1~120の脂肪族炭化水素基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素原子数6~35の芳香環含有炭化水素基、又は、置換基を有していてもよい炭素原子数2~35の複素環含有基であり、R及びRは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素原子数1~35の脂肪族炭化水素基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素原子数6~35の芳香環含有炭化水素基、又は置換基を有していてもよい炭素原子数2~35の複素環含有基である。Xにおける前記脂肪族炭化水素基、及び前記芳香環含有炭化水素基中に、炭素-炭素二重結合、-O-、-S-、-C(=O)-、-O-C(=O)-、-C(=O)-O-、-O-C(=O)-O-、-S-C(=O)-、-C(=O)-S-、-S-C(=O)-O-、-O-C(=O)-S-、-C(=O)-NH-、-NH-C(=O)-、-NH-C(=O)-O-、-NR’-、-S-S-、-SO-又は窒素原子を有してもよい。
     aは、1~10の整数を表し、bは、1~4の整数を表し、cは、1~3の整数を表す。)
    A colorant, a photopolymerizable compound, an initiator, a latent antioxidant, and a solvent, wherein the colorant includes one or more selected from a dye and a lake colorant, The photosensitive coloring resin composition in which antioxidant contains the compound represented by following General formula (1).
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001
    (In general formula (1), ring A is a 5-membered or 6-membered hydrocarbon ring or heterocyclic ring,
    R 1 each independently has a halogen atom, a cyano group, a hydroxyl group, a nitro group, a carboxy group, an alkyl group having 1 to 40 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or a substituent. An aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, an arylalkyl group having 7 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or a heterocyclic ring having 2 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent Or a plurality of R 1 are bonded to each other to form a benzene ring or a naphthalene ring,
    R 2 is an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, an arylalkyl group having 7 to 20 carbon atoms, or 2 to 2 carbon atoms. 20 heterocycle-containing groups, or trialkylsilyl groups,
    In the alkyl group of R 1 and R 2 , a carbon-carbon double bond, —O—, —S—, —C (═O) —, —O—C (═O) —, —C (═O ) —O—, —O—C (═O) —O—, —S—C (═O) —, —C (═O) —S—, —S—C (═O) —O—, — OC (═O) —S—, —C (═O) —NH—, —NH—C (═O) —, —NH—C (═O) —O—, —NR′—, —S -S- or -SO 2 -may be present, R 'is a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, and a plurality of R 1 and R 2 may be the same or different. May be.
    X is an a-valent group, and is a direct bond, nitrogen atom, oxygen atom, sulfur atom, phosphorus atom, (—O) 3 P═O,>C═O,> NR 3 , —OR 3 , —SR 3 , —N (R 3 ) (R 4 ), an optionally substituted aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 120 carbon atoms, and optionally having 6 to 35 carbon atoms An aromatic ring-containing hydrocarbon group or a heterocyclic group having 2 to 35 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, and R 3 and R 4 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent. An aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 35 carbon atoms that may have, an aromatic ring-containing hydrocarbon group having 6 to 35 carbon atoms that may have a substituent, or a substituent. It is also a heterocyclic group having 2 to 35 carbon atoms. In the aliphatic hydrocarbon group and the aromatic ring-containing hydrocarbon group in X, a carbon-carbon double bond, —O—, —S—, —C (═O) —, —O—C (═O ) —, —C (═O) —O—, —O—C (═O) —O—, —S—C (═O) —, —C (═O) —S—, —S—C ( ═O) —O—, —O—C (═O) —S—, —C (═O) —NH—, —NH—C (═O) —, —NH—C (═O) —O— , -NR'-, -SS-, -SO 2-, or a nitrogen atom.
    a represents an integer of 1 to 10, b represents an integer of 1 to 4, and c represents an integer of 1 to 3. )
  2.  更に、ヒンダードフェノール系酸化防止剤を含む、請求項1に記載の感光性着色樹脂組成物。 Furthermore, the photosensitive coloring resin composition of Claim 1 containing a hindered phenolic antioxidant.
  3.  更に分散剤を含有し、当該分散剤が少なくとも下記一般式(2)で表される繰り返し単位(a)を含む重合体である、請求項1又は2に記載の感光性着色樹脂組成物。
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002
    (一般式(2)中、R41は、水素原子又はメチル基、Lは、2価の連結基、R42は、炭素数1~8のアルキレン基、-[CH(R45)-CH(R46)-O]-CH(R45)-CH(R46)-又は-[(CH-O]-(CH-で示される2価の有機基、R43及びR44は、それぞれ独立に、置換されていてもよい鎖状又は環状の炭化水素基を表すか、R43及びR44が互いに結合して環状構造を形成する。R45及びR46は、それぞれ独立に水素原子又はメチル基である。
     xは1~18の整数、yは1~5の整数、zは1~18の整数を示す。)
    The photosensitive colored resin composition according to claim 1 or 2, further comprising a dispersant, wherein the dispersant is a polymer containing at least a repeating unit (a) represented by the following general formula (2).
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002
    (In the general formula (2), R 41 is a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, L is a divalent linking group, R 42 is an alkylene group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, — [CH (R 45 ) —CH ( A divalent organic group represented by R 46 ) —O] x —CH (R 45 ) —CH (R 46 ) — or — [(CH 2 ) y —O] z — (CH 2 ) y —, R 43 and R 44, each independently, represent a substituted optionally also be a chain or cyclic hydrocarbon group, .R 45 and R 46 R 43 and R 44 form a ring structure by bonding with each other is, Each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
    x represents an integer of 1 to 18, y represents an integer of 1 to 5, and z represents an integer of 1 to 18. )
  4.  前記色材が、キサンテン骨格を有するレーキ色材、トリアリールメタン骨格を有するレーキ色材、及び、キサンテン骨格を有する染料より選択される1種以上を含む、請求項1乃至3のいずれか一項に記載の感光性着色樹脂組成物。 The color material includes one or more selected from a lake color material having a xanthene skeleton, a lake color material having a triarylmethane skeleton, and a dye having a xanthene skeleton. The photosensitive colored resin composition described in 1.
  5.  前記溶剤が、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテートを含み、更に、ジエチレングリコールエチルメチルエーテル、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、3-メトキシ-3メチル-1-ブタノール、3-メトキシ-3-メチル-1-ブチルアセテート、及び、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテートより選択される1種以上を含む、請求項1乃至4のいずれか一項に記載の感光性着色樹脂組成物。 The solvent includes propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, and further includes diethylene glycol ethyl methyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, 3-methoxy-3-methyl-1-butanol, 3-methoxy-3-methyl-1-butyl acetate, and The photosensitive coloring resin composition as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 4 containing 1 or more types selected from propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate.
  6.  前記開始剤が、オキシム系開始剤を含む、請求項1乃至5のいずれか一項に記載の感光性着色樹脂組成物。 The photosensitive colored resin composition according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein the initiator includes an oxime initiator.
  7.  前記開始剤が、オキシム系開始剤を少なくとも2種含む、請求項1乃至6のいずれか一項に記載の感光性着色樹脂組成物。 The photosensitive colored resin composition according to any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein the initiator contains at least two kinds of oxime initiators.
  8.  基板と、当該基板上に設けられた着色層とを少なくとも備えるカラーフィルタであって、当該着色層の少なくとも1つが請求項1乃至7のいずれか一項に記載の感光性着色樹脂組成物の硬化物である、カラーフィルタ。 A color filter comprising at least a substrate and a colored layer provided on the substrate, wherein at least one of the colored layers is a cured cured photosensitive colored resin composition according to any one of claims 1 to 7. Color filters that are things.
  9.  基板と、当該基板上に設けられた着色層とを少なくとも備えるカラーフィルタの製造方法であって、
     当該着色層の少なくとも1つを、請求項1乃至7のいずれか一項に記載の感光性着色樹脂組成物を用いて形成する工程を有する、カラーフィルタの製造方法。
    A method for producing a color filter comprising at least a substrate and a colored layer provided on the substrate,
    The manufacturing method of a color filter which has the process of forming at least 1 of the said colored layer using the photosensitive colored resin composition as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 7.
  10.  請求項8に記載のカラーフィルタを有する、表示装置。 A display device comprising the color filter according to claim 8.
PCT/JP2017/012133 2016-03-31 2017-03-24 Photosensitive coloring resin composition, color filter and method for producing same, and display device WO2017170263A1 (en)

Priority Applications (3)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201780016692.0A CN108780273B (en) 2016-03-31 2017-03-24 Photosensitive colored resin composition, color filter and manufacturing method thereof, and display device
JP2017550960A JP7059009B2 (en) 2016-03-31 2017-03-24 Photosensitive colored resin composition, color filter and its manufacturing method, and display device
JP2022001675A JP7308993B2 (en) 2016-03-31 2022-01-07 Photosensitive colored resin composition, color filter, manufacturing method thereof, and display device

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2016072750 2016-03-31
JP2016-072750 2016-03-31

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2017170263A1 true WO2017170263A1 (en) 2017-10-05

Family

ID=59965720

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2017/012133 WO2017170263A1 (en) 2016-03-31 2017-03-24 Photosensitive coloring resin composition, color filter and method for producing same, and display device

Country Status (4)

Country Link
JP (2) JP7059009B2 (en)
CN (1) CN108780273B (en)
TW (1) TWI714746B (en)
WO (1) WO2017170263A1 (en)

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN110320755A (en) * 2018-03-27 2019-10-11 奇美实业股份有限公司 Minus white photosensitive resin composition and its application
US10894797B2 (en) 2018-09-18 2021-01-19 Nikang Therapeutics, Inc. Fused tricyclic ring derivatives as SRC homology-2 phosphatase inhibitors

Families Citing this family (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN110174819B (en) * 2019-05-06 2020-07-10 深圳市华星光电技术有限公司 Photoresist

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2004157231A (en) * 2002-11-05 2004-06-03 Konica Minolta Holdings Inc Dry imaging material
JP2006259553A (en) * 2005-03-18 2006-09-28 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Negative type curable composition containing dye, color filter and method for manufacturing the color filter
WO2014021023A1 (en) * 2012-07-31 2014-02-06 株式会社Adeka Latent additive and composition containing latent additive
JP2015131937A (en) * 2013-12-11 2015-07-23 株式会社Adeka Coloring compositions
WO2016024596A1 (en) * 2014-08-12 2016-02-18 株式会社Dnpファインケミカル Coloring material dispersion, colored resin composition for color filter, color filter, and display device

Family Cites Families (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
TWI588142B (en) * 2012-07-31 2017-06-21 住友化學股份有限公司 Colored curable resin composition
JP2015132791A (en) * 2013-12-13 2015-07-23 株式会社Adeka Colored photosensitive composition

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2004157231A (en) * 2002-11-05 2004-06-03 Konica Minolta Holdings Inc Dry imaging material
JP2006259553A (en) * 2005-03-18 2006-09-28 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Negative type curable composition containing dye, color filter and method for manufacturing the color filter
WO2014021023A1 (en) * 2012-07-31 2014-02-06 株式会社Adeka Latent additive and composition containing latent additive
JP2015131937A (en) * 2013-12-11 2015-07-23 株式会社Adeka Coloring compositions
WO2016024596A1 (en) * 2014-08-12 2016-02-18 株式会社Dnpファインケミカル Coloring material dispersion, colored resin composition for color filter, color filter, and display device

Cited By (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN110320755A (en) * 2018-03-27 2019-10-11 奇美实业股份有限公司 Minus white photosensitive resin composition and its application
US10894797B2 (en) 2018-09-18 2021-01-19 Nikang Therapeutics, Inc. Fused tricyclic ring derivatives as SRC homology-2 phosphatase inhibitors
US11034705B2 (en) 2018-09-18 2021-06-15 Nikang Therapeutics, Inc. Fused tricyclic ring derivatives as Src homology-2 phosphate inhibitors
US11459340B2 (en) 2018-09-18 2022-10-04 Nikang Therapeutics, Inc. Tri-substituted heteroaryl derivatives as Src homology-2 phosphatase inhibitors
US11518772B2 (en) 2018-09-18 2022-12-06 Nikang Therapeutics, Inc. Fused tricyclic ring derivatives as Src homology-2 phosphate inhibitors

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
TW201807485A (en) 2018-03-01
CN108780273B (en) 2022-06-28
JP7308993B2 (en) 2023-07-14
TWI714746B (en) 2021-01-01
JP2022062022A (en) 2022-04-19
JP7059009B2 (en) 2022-04-25
JPWO2017170263A1 (en) 2019-02-07
CN108780273A (en) 2018-11-09

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP6762739B2 (en) Photosensitive colored resin composition for color filters, color filters, display devices
JP6059397B2 (en) Color material dispersion for color filter, photosensitive colored resin composition for color filter, color filter, and display device
JP7308993B2 (en) Photosensitive colored resin composition, color filter, manufacturing method thereof, and display device
JP7008508B2 (en) Photosensitive colored resin compositions for color filters, color filters, and display devices
JP6494875B2 (en) Color material dispersion for color filter, colored resin composition for color filter, color filter, and display device
JP6578252B2 (en) Color material dispersion for color filter, photosensitive colored resin composition for color filter, color filter, and display device
TWI510564B (en) Coloring composition for color filter, color filter, display element, and pigment dispersion for color filter
JP6692184B2 (en) Photosensitive colored resin composition for color filter, color filter, display device
WO2017169951A1 (en) Resin composition, color filter and image display device
JP2018101018A (en) Colored resin composition for color filter, coloring material dispersion liquid, color filter, and display
TW202104172A (en) Photosensitive colored resin composition for color filter, cured product, color filter and display device
JP6868359B2 (en) Color material dispersion liquid for color filters, photosensitive coloring resin composition for color filters, color filters, and display devices
JP6826828B2 (en) Color material dispersion for color filters, photosensitive coloring resin composition for color filters, color filters, and display devices
JP7153651B2 (en) Photosensitive colored resin composition and cured product thereof, color filter, and display device
CN112585507B (en) Colored resin composition, cured product, color filter, and display device
JP7123660B2 (en) Photosensitive colored resin composition and cured product thereof, color filter, and display device
JP2018101015A (en) Colored resin composition for color filter, coloring material dispersion liquid, color filter, and display
JP6450057B1 (en) Photosensitive colored resin composition and cured product thereof, color filter, and display device
JP2021162759A (en) Modified color material, color material dispersion liquid, colored curable composition, color filter and display device
WO2018159541A1 (en) Coloring material dispersion for color filter, coloring material resin composition for color filter, color filter, and display device
WO2023002875A1 (en) Halogenated phthalocyanine colorant, colored curable composition, color filter and display device
JP2018173461A (en) Photosensitive coloring resin composition, cured product, color filter, and display device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2017550960

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 17774800

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 17774800

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1